<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.2//EN" "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.2/docbookx.dtd" [
<!ENTITY whatsnew SYSTEM "hig-ch-whatsnew.xml">
<!ENTITY checks SYSTEM "hig-ch-checks.xml">
<!ENTITY controls SYSTEM "hig-ch-controls.xml">
<!ENTITY credits SYSTEM "hig-ch-credits.xml">
<!ENTITY desktop SYSTEM "hig-ch-desktop.xml">
<!--ENTITY dialogs-old SYSTEM "hig-ch-dialogs-old.xml"--><!ENTITY feedback SYSTEM "hig-ch-feedback.xml">
<!ENTITY gnome3 SYSTEM "hig-ch-gnome3.xml">
<!ENTITY icons SYSTEM "hig-ch-icons.xml">
<!--ENTITY icons-new SYSTEM "hig-ch-icons-new.xml"--><!ENTITY input SYSTEM "hig-ch-input.xml">
<!ENTITY intro SYSTEM "hig-ch-intro.xml">
<!ENTITY language SYSTEM "hig-ch-language.xml">
<!ENTITY layout SYSTEM "hig-ch-layout.xml">
<!ENTITY menus SYSTEM "hig-ch-menus.xml">
<!ENTITY principles SYSTEM "hig-ch-principles.xml">
<!ENTITY toolbars SYSTEM "hig-ch-toolbars.xml">
<!ENTITY windows SYSTEM "hig-ch-windows.xml">
<!ENTITY bibliography SYSTEM "hig-ch-bibliography.xml">
]>
<book id="index" lang="de">
<bookinfo>
    <author role="maintainer"><firstname>Das GNOME-Benutzerfreundlichkeitsprojekt</firstname></author>
<copyright><year>2002-2012</year> <holder>Calum Benson, Adam Elman, Seth Nickell, colin z robertson</holder></copyright>
<pubdate>03.Oktober 2012</pubdate>
<edition>2.2.3</edition>

<abstract role="description">
<para>Dieses Dokument beschreibt, wie Sie Anwendungen entwerfen, die gut aussehen, sich ordnungsgemäß verhalten und gut in die GNOME-Benutzeroberfläche als Ganzes passen. Es ist für Oberflächengestalter, Grafikkünstler und Softwareentwickler geschrieben worden, die Software für die GNOME-Arbeitsumgebung entwerfen. Es gibt spezifische Ratschläge zum effizienten Nutzen von Oberflächenelementen. Es wird auch die Philosophie und die allgemeinen Gestaltungsprinzipien hinter der GNOME-Oberfläche beschrieben.</para>
</abstract>

<legalnotice>
  <para>Das vorliegende Dokument kann gemäß den Bedingungen der GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 oder jeder späteren, von der Free Software Foundation veröffentlichten Version ohne unveränderbare Abschnitte sowie ohne Texte auf dem vorderen und hinteren Buchdeckel kopiert, verteilt und/oder modifiziert werden. Eine Kopie der <citetitle>GNU Free Documentation License</citetitle> finden Sie unter diesem <ulink type="http" url="http://www.fsf.org">Link</ulink> oder indem Sie zu der folgenden Adresse schreiben: Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.</para>
  <para>Bei vielen der von Firmen zur Unterscheidung ihrer Produkte und Dienstleistungen verwendeten Namen handelt es sich um Marken. An den Stellen, an denen derartige Namen in einer GNOME-Dokumentation vorkommen und wenn die Mitglieder des GNOME-Dokumentationsprojekts über diese Marken informiert wurden, sind die Namen in Großbuchstaben oder mit großen Anfangsbuchstaben geschrieben.</para>
</legalnotice>

<title>GNOME Richtlinien für Benutzeroberflächen 2.2.3</title>


    <othercredit class="translator">
      <personname>
        <firstname>Mario Blättermann</firstname>
      </personname>
      <email>mario.blaettermann@gmail.com</email>
    </othercredit>
    <copyright>
      
        <year>2009</year>
      
        <year>2010</year>
      
        <year>2012</year>
      
      <holder>Mario Blättermann</holder>
    </copyright>
  
    <othercredit class="translator">
      <personname>
        <firstname>Tobias Endrigkeit</firstname>
      </personname>
      <email>tobiasendrigkeit@googlemail.com</email>
    </othercredit>
    <copyright>
      
        <year>2012</year>
      
      <holder>Tobias Endrigkeit</holder>
    </copyright>
  
    <othercredit class="translator">
      <personname>
        <firstname>Christian Kirbach</firstname>
      </personname>
      <email>christian.kirbach@gmail.com</email>
    </othercredit>
    <copyright>
      
        <year>2012</year>
      
      <holder>Christian Kirbach</holder>
    </copyright>
  </bookinfo>


<!-- :xml.root=hig-book.xml: -->

  <preface id="whatsnew">
    <title>Was ist neu?</title>
    <para>Dieser Abschnitt hebt kürzliche Änderungen in den Richtlinien für Benutzeroberflächen hervor, die Ihre Anwendung betreffen könnten.</para>
    
<para>Die folgenden Änderungen geschahen in Version 2.2.3:</para>
    <itemizedlist>
	<listitem><para>Aufgefrischte Verweise zu Barrierefreiheits-, Dokumentations- und Freedesktop-Projekten.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

    <para>Die folgenden Änderungen geschahen in Version 2.2.2:</para>
    <itemizedlist>
	<listitem><para>Hinzufügen von <xref linkend="note-on-gnome3"/> durch die Relevanz dieser Anleitung für GNOME 3.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

     <para>Die folgenden Änderungen geschahen in Version 2.2.1:</para>
    <itemizedlist>
	<listitem><para>Erwähne in <xref linkend="windows-progress"/>, dass eingebettete Fortschrittsanzeigen den modalen Dialogfenstern vorzuziehen sind.</para></listitem>
    	<listitem><para>
	    	Replace guidance in <xref linkend="windows-progress"/> about progress windows having 
		same title as their primary text, which lead to unnecessary redundancy. Advice is now 
		that progress window title should summarize the overall operation.
		</para></listitem>	
	</itemizedlist>

    <para>Die folgenden Abschnitte wurden in Version 2.0 hinzugefügt:</para>
    <itemizedlist>
    	<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="gconf-keys"/>
		</para></listitem>	
	<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="windows-show-hide"/>
		</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="desktop-notification-area"/>
		</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="windows-progress"/>
		</para></listitem>
        <listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="toolbars-media"/>
		</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="controls-scrollbars"/>
		</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="controls-lists-sortable"/>
		</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="controls-trees-sortable"/>
		</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="controls-tab-status"/>
		</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="controls-progress-bars"/>
		</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="icons-design-accessible"/>
		</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>
	    	<xref linkend="bibliography"/>
		</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	
    <para>Neue oder überarbeitete Richtlinien wurden zu diesen abschnitten in Version 2.0 hinzugefügt:</para>

  	<itemizedlist>
	    <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="internationalization"/>
		</para></listitem>

	    <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="desktop-integration"/>
		</para></listitem>

	    <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="windows-primary"/>
		</para></listitem>
	    
	    <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="windows-utility"/>
		</para></listitem>

	     <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="alerts-confirmation"/>
		</para></listitem>
	
	     <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="windows-assistant"/>
		</para></listitem>

	     <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="menus-menubar"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="the-file-menu"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="menu-standard-view"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="menu-standard-bookmarks"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="menu-standard-go"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="application-windows-menu"/>
		</para></listitem>

	       <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="controls-status-bars"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="controls-entry"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="controls-frames"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="feedback-choosing"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="feedback-interrupting"/>
		</para></listitem>

	       <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="layout-capitalization"/>
		</para></listitem>

	     <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="mouse-buttons"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="selection"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="drag-drop"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="choosing-access-keys"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="shortcuts"/>
		</para></listitem>

	      <listitem><para>
		<xref linkend="standard-shortcuts"/>
		</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>

<para>Die folgenden Begriffe wurden in Version 2.0 geändert:</para>
<itemizedlist>
	<listitem><para>»Option menus« werden nun »Drop-down lists« genannt</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>»Combo boxes« werden nun »Drop-down combination boxes« genannt</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>

</preface>



  <preface id="intro">
    <title>Einführung</title>
    <para>Dieses Dokument beschreibt, wie Sie Anwendungen entwerfen, die gut aussehen, sich ordnungsgemäß verhalten und gut in die GNOME-Benutzeroberfläche als Ganzes passen. Es ist für Oberflächengestalter, Grafikkünstler und Softwareentwickler geschrieben worden, die Software für die GNOME-Arbeitsumgebung entwerfen. Es gibt spezifische Ratschläge zum effizienten Nutzen von Oberflächenelementen. Es wird auch die Philosophie und die allgemeinen Gestaltungsprinzipien hinter der GNOME-Oberfläche beschrieben.</para>
    <para>Diese Richtlinien sollen dazu dienen, Ihnen beim Entwurf und dem Schreiben von benutzerfreundlichen und konsistenten Anwendungen für die GNOME-Arbeitsumgebung zu helfen. Das Einhalten dieser dieser Richtlinien hat zahlreiche Vorteile: <itemizedlist>
	<listitem><para>Benutzer werden schneller lernen, ihre Programme zu nutzen, weil die Elemente der Benutzeroberfläche sich in gewohnter Weise verhalten und aussehen.</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Sowohl neue, als auch fortgeschrittene Benutzer werden fähig sein, Aufgaben schnell und einfach zu lösen, weil sie durch die Benutzeroberfläche nicht irritiert werden und diese ihre Aufgaben nicht erschweren.</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Ihre Anwendung wird ein attraktives Aussehen besitzen, welches in den Rest der Arbeitsumgebung passt.</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Ihre Anwendung wird weiterhin gut aussehen, auch wenn Benutzer die Themen, die Schriftarten oder die Farben der Arbeitsumgebung ändern.</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Ihre Anwendung wird barrierefrei für alle Benutzer sein, einschließlich Behinderter und jener mit besonderen Bedürfnissen.</para></listitem>
      </itemizedlist></para>
    <para>Um Ihnen beim Erreichen dieser Ziele zu helfen, beziehen sich diese Richtlinien grundlegende Elemente der Benutzeroberfläche, auf deren effektives Zusammenspiel und auf die Integration in die übrige Arbeitsumgebung.</para>
    <para>Diese Empfehlungen bauen auf Designaspekten auf, die auf anderen Systemen wie MacOS, Windows, Java und KDE erfolgreich sind. Doch gleichzeitig erhalten Sie eine unverkennbare GNOME-Note.</para>

    <tip><title>Denken Sie daran …</title>
       <para>Das Einhalten dieser Richlinien macht Ihre Arbeit einfacher, nicht schwieriger!</para>
    </tip>

  </preface>




  <preface id="note-on-gnome3">
    <title>Eignung für GNOME 3</title>
	<para>Diese Version der Richtlinien für Benutzeroberflächen ist für Gestalter und Entwickler von GNOME 2-Anwendungen geschrieben worden. Dieser Fokus wird in den Ratschlägen und in den begleitenden Bildern gezeigt.</para>

	<para>Da die meisten davon auch in GNOME 3 anwendbar sind, können und sollten Sie der Mehrheit dieser Prinzipien der Benutzerfreundlichkeit und Richtlinien auch in GNOME 3 folgen.</para>

	<para>Eine aktualisierte Fassung der Richtlinien der Benutzeroberflächen, welche sich auf GNOME 3 konzentriert, werden zur gegeben Zeit veröffentlicht. In der Zwischenzeit können Sie spezifische GNOME 3-Richtlinien auf der Wiki-Seite <ulink url="http://live.gnome.org/GnomeShell/Design/Guidelines">»GNOME-Shell-Richtlinien«</ulink> finden.</para>

	<para>Das GNOME-Benutzerfreundlichkeitsprojekt, März 2011</para>

  </preface>




  <chapter id="principles">
    
    <title>Prinzipien der Benutzerfreundlichkeit</title>

    <para>Dieser Abschnitt erläutert die Grundprinzipien, die hinter den in diesem Dokument empfohlenen technischen Richtlinien stehen. Wir glauben, dass diese Prinzipien für jegliche Entwicklung von Anwendungen bedeutsam sind.</para>

    <sect1 id="principles-people">
      <title>Design für Menschen</title>

      <para>Vergessen Sie nie, dass jede Anwendungssoftware es einer Gruppe von Menschen ermöglichen soll, eine bestimmte Art von Aufgaben auszuführen. Daher sollten Sie beim Entwurf Ihrer Anwendung zunächst über Folgendes nachdenken:</para>

	<orderedlist>
		<listitem><para>wer Ihre Benutzer sind</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>welche Art von Aufgaben sie erledigen sollen</para></listitem>
	</orderedlist>

      <para>Beispielsweise wollen Sie eine Anwendung entwerfen, mit deren Hilfe Ingenieure (Software-, Elektro- oder Maschinenbau-) Diagramme erstellen können. Oder Sie wollen eine Anwendung für Systemverwalter schreiben, damit diese eine Webserver einrichten und überwachen können. Oder eine Anwendung für Grundschüler zum Erlernen der Mathematik.</para>

      <para>Von Bedeutung ist hier, dass Sie Ihr Publikum kennen und sowohl dessen Ziele als auch die Aufgabenstellungen zum Erreichen dieser Ziele verstehen. Es gibt eine große Zahl von Büchern, die sich mit dem Design interaktiver Anwendungen beschäftigen, weiterhin Kurse über Designmethoden, die in diesem Prozess hilfreich sein können. Viele sind sehr nützlich, eine Auswahl davon finden Sie in <xref linkend="bibliography"/>. Wie auch immer, die meisten dieser Methoden gehen den spezifischen Erfordernissen des Verstehens Ihrer Benutzer auf den Grund, den Aufgaben, deren Lösung Sie ihnen ermöglichen wollen sowie dem Auffinden von Wegen, wie Ihre Anwendung diese Aufgaben unterstützen kann.</para>

    </sect1>
    <sect1 id="principles-broad-userbase">
      <title>Begrenzen Sie nicht Ihr Zielpublikum</title>

      <para>Wenn Sie eine Anwendung für Ingenieure, Kinder oder Systemverwalter entwerfen, stellen Sie bitte sicher, dass diese Anwendung von <emphasis>allen</emphasis> Ingenieuren, Kindern oder Systemverwaltern benutzt werden kann, einschließlich denjenigen mit Behinderungen oder denen, die Ihre eigene Sprache nicht sprechen. Denken Sie an die Integration von Hilfstechnologien und die Internationalisierung. Vieles davon wird in den vorliegenden Richtlinien näher erläutert.</para>

      <sect2 id="accessibility">
	<title>Barrierefreiheit</title>

	<para>Barrierefreiheit (manchmal <emphasis>a11y</emphasis> genannt) bedeutet, es Personen mit Behinderung bestimmter Art zu ermöglichen, an Aktivitäten des Lebens teilzunehmen: In diesem Fall, Ihre Software zu nutzen. Zum Beispiel:</para>

	<itemizedlist>
		<listitem><para>Farbenblinde können möglicherweise nicht ihre Anwendung nutzen, falls sie nur Farbkodierung nutzen, um zwischen verschiedenen Typen von Informationen zu unterscheiden.</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Schwerhörige oder gehörlose Benutzer werden Ihre Anwendung nicht benutzen können, wenn Sie Klänge ausgeben lassen, um kritische Informationen anzuzeigen</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Benutzer mit eingeschränkter Bewegungsfreiheit können möglicherweise nicht in der Lage sein Ihre Anwendung zu nutzen, falls Sie keine tastaturähnlichen Eingabemöglichkeiten für Befehle bereitstellen.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	<para>Ihre Software sollte auch für Audiooberflächen, Bildschirmlesern wie <ulink url="http://projects.gnome.org/orca/">Orca</ulink>, alternativen Eingabemethoden und anderen Hilfstechnologien nutzbar sein. Die Standard-GNOME-Bibliotheken machen die meiste Arbeit für Sie, aber mit einer kleinen, zusätzlichen Anstrengung, können Sie Ihre Anwendung gleichwertig für jene Benutzer machen, die auf diese Technologien angewiesen sind, wie für jene, die darauf nicht angewiesen sind.</para>

	<para>GNOME hat eine exzellente Unterstützung für Barrierefreiheit durch die Bibliotheken ATK und GAIL, die in vielen Fällen die meiste Arbeit für Sie übernehmen können, eingebaut. Mehr Informationen zur Barrierefreiheit in GNOME finden Sie im <ulink url="http://projects.gnome.org/accessibility">GNOME Projekt Barrierefreiheit</ulink>.</para>

      </sect2>
      <sect2 id="internationalization">
	<title>Internationalisierung und Lokalisierung</title>

	<para>Internationalisierung bedeutet das Gestalten der Software in der Art, dass sie in verschiedenen Sprachumgebungen funktioniert. Lokalisierung ist der eigentliche Prozess der Übersetzung der Nachrichten, Beschriftungen und weiterer Benutzerschnittstellen der Anwendung in eine andere Sprache.</para>

	<para>GNOME has excellent support for both internationalization (also referred to as i18n) and localization (also referred to as l10n).  In most cases, simply using standard GNOME APIs for displaying text and messages will allow you or others to localize your application for other locales.  For more information on how to make your application localizable, see the <ulink url="http://www.pango.org">Pango project home page</ulink> (Pango is the GNOME library for rendering internationalized text), the <ulink url="http://www.gnome.org/i18n/">GNOME Translations page</ulink>, and the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gtp/">GNOME Translation Project page</ulink>.</para>
	
	<para>Sensitivity to cultural and political issues is also an important consideration. Designing icons and sounds, and even choosing colors requires some understanding of the connotations they might have to a user from a different part of the world.</para>
	<para>Beispiele für Elemente, die aus diesen Gründen gemieden werden sollten:</para>
	<itemizedlist>
		<listitem><para>Abbildungen von Flaggen und Währungen</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Maps showing political boundaries or contentious location names</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Liste von Ländern oder Städten in nicht-alphabetischer Sortierung, es  sei denn, dies ist speziell gefordert oder im Kontext unumgänglich</para></listitem> 
		<listitem><para>Symbole, die Tiere darstellen</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Symbole, die nur Hände oder Füße darstellen</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

      </sect2>
    
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="principles-match">
      <title>Erstellen Sie eine Übereinstimmung Ihrer Anwendung  mit der realen Welt</title>

      <para id="use-users-language">Always use words, phrases, and concepts that are familiar to the user rather than terms from the underlying system.  Use terms that relate to the user's knowledge of the tasks your application supports.  For example, in medicine, the paper folder that contains all information about a specific patient is called a "chart."  Hence, a medical application might refer to a patient record that contains the same information as a paper chart as a "patient chart" rather than as a "patient database record."</para>

      <para>You can often take advantage of your users' knowledge of the real world by using metaphor— that is, a familiar concept from the outside world— to represent elements within your application.  For example:</para>

	<itemizedlist>
		<listitem><para>an image of a file folder suggests a container into which documents can be placed</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>a waste basket suggests a container into which items can be placed when they are no longer needed</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

      <para>When using metaphors, however, it is important to neither take the metaphor too literally, nor to extend the metaphor beyond its reasonable use.  For example, the capacity of a file folder should not be limited to the capacity of a physical file folder, which presumably could contain only a few documents before becoming unwieldy.  On the other hand, a waste basket should not be used for anything other than holding discarded files.  It should not be used, for example, to eject a removable disk such as a floppy or CD.</para>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="principles-consistency">
      <title>Machen Sie Ihre Anwendung konsistent</title>

      <para>Make your application consistent with itself and with other applications, in both its appearance and its behavior. This is one of the most important design principles, and probably the most famous, but it is also frequently ignored. While this document serves as the basis for consistency between GNOME applications, you are encouraged to look at and follow other application's conventions where this document provides no guidelines.</para>

      <para>Consistency enables users to apply their existing knowledge of their computing environment and other applications to understanding a new application.  This not only allows users to become familiar with new applications more quickly, but also helps create a sense of comfort and trust in the overall environment.  Most of the recommendations in the GNOME HI Guidelines are designed to help you create applications that are consistent with the GNOME environment and other GNOME applications.</para>

      <para>A word of caution: a mis-applied or incomplete consistency is often worse than inconsistency.  If your application includes an <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> menu item for consistency, but it is always disabled because your application does not actually support Undo, this will reduce the user's trust in the availability of Undo in other applications on their desktop.  Either make your application support Undo, or eliminate the <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> menu item.</para>

    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="principles-feedback">
      <title>Halten Sie den Benutzer auf dem Laufenden</title>

      <para>Always let the user know what is happening in your application by using appropriate feedback at an appropriate time.  The user should never have to guess about the status of the system or of your application.  When the user performs an action, provide feedback to indicate that the system has received the input and is operating on it. Feedback can be visual, audio, or both. If the system will take a long time to process the request, provide as much feedback as possible about how lengthy the operation will be. Types of helpful feedback include but are not limited to: cursor changes, animated "throbbers", progress indicators, audio feedback such as a beep, and error messages. Error messages should use simple language, clearly state the problem, and provide solutions or tell the user how to get out of the current situation if possible.</para>

      <para>It is critical that feedback be <emphasis>accurate</emphasis> and <emphasis>precise</emphasis>.  If you display a determinate progress indicator to display the state of completion of a task and it is inaccurate, the user will lose faith in progress indicators, and they will find the environment less usable.  If you display a generic error message that indicates that there is a problem but fails to provide enough information to diagnose or solve the problem, your users will be unable to continue with their task.</para>
      <para>Weitere Informationen über Rückmeldungen finden Sie in <xref linkend="feedback"/> und <xref linkend="windows-alert"/>.</para>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="principles-simplicity">
      <title>Keep It Simple and Pretty</title>

      <para>Your application should enable the user to concentrate on the task at hand.  So, design your application to show only useful and relevant information and interface elements.  Every extra piece of information or interface control competes with the truly relevant bits of information and distracts the user from important information.  Hence, don't clutter your interface, and don't overload the user with buttons, menu options, icons, or irrelevant information.  Instead, use progressive disclosure and other techniques to limit what the user sees at any given moment.</para>

      <para>Finally, present your information and interface elements in an aesthetically pleasing manner.  A disorganized, cluttered-looking interface with a few elements can be just as distracting as an organized interface with too much information.  Make sure that dialog elements are cleanly-aligned, and do not overuse or misuse color or graphics.  If you know a graphic designer, seek their advice if possible— the guidelines in this document will help you with the basics, but there is no substitute for a trained eye.</para>

	<para>Siehe <xref linkend="design"/> und <xref linkend="icons"/> für weitere Informationen über das Design des visuellen Erscheinungsbildes Ihrer Anwendung.</para>

    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="principles-user-control">
      <title>Dem Benutzer die Kontrolle geben</title>

      <para>Erinnern Sie sich daran, dass Computer dem Menschen dienen. Ein Benutzer sollte immer das Gefühl haben, die volle Kontrolle zu besitzen das zu tun, was er tun will. Dies bedeutet, dass grundsätzlich Moden vermeiden sollen; Benutzer sollten immer in der Lage sein, zwischen verschiedenen Aufgaben (und besonders zwischen verschiedenen Fenstern) zu jeder Zeit zu wechseln.  Lesen Sie <xref linkend="window-props-modality"/> für weitere Informationen zu Moden.</para>

      <para>Der Benutzer sollte die Möglichkeit haben, Aspekte ihrer Arbeitsumgebung auf ihre persönliche Vorlieben abzustimmen. Dennoch ist es sehr wichtig, dass Sie vermeiden, zu viele Einstellungsmöglichkeiten oder die Einstellung von Parametern, welche die meisten Benutzer nicht verstehen oder nützlich finden zu bearbeiten, zu erlauben. Wo immer es möglich ist, benutzen Sie visuelle und verhaltensbezogene Parameter aus den globalen Einstellungen, wie die des aktuellen GTK+-Themas.</para>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="principles-forgiveness">
      <title>Vergeben Sie dem Benutzer</title>

      <para>Wir alle machen Fehler. Ob wir nun gerade den Umgang mit unserem System erlernen oder schon Experten sind, wir drücken doch einmal die falsche Taste, schließlich sind wir alle Menschen. Ihre Anwendung sollte es daher den Benutzern gestatten, ohne viel Aufwand die Ergebnisse ihrer Aktionen rückgängig zu machen.</para>

      <para>Falls eine Aktion besonders gefährlich ist und nicht rückgängig gemacht werden kann, warnen Sie den Benutzer und bitten Sie um Bestätigung. Tun Sie dies nur in Extremfällen! Falls Sie dem Benutzer öfter solche Bestätigungsanfragen präsentieren, beginnt er sie zu ignorieren, wodurch sie nutzlos werden.</para>

      <para>In allen Fällen ist die Arbeit des Benutzers unantastbar. Um keinen Preis sollte Ihre Anwendung die Arbeit des Benutzers ohne dessen expliziten Eingriff vernichten oder beschädigen. Unter anderem kann das erreicht werden, indem Sie Dokumente automatisch speichern lassen oder mehrere Ebenen zum Zurücknehmen von Aktionen bereitstellen.</para>

    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="principles-direct-manipulation">
      <title>Stellen Sie direkte Bearbeitungsmöglichkeiten bereit</title>

      <para>Wo immer es möglich ist, erlauben Sie Benutzern direkt auf Objekte und Dateien einzuwirken, anstatt durch Dialoge und explizite Befehle. Zum Beispiel ist es intuitiver, ein Kreisobjekt in einem Diagramm rundherum zu bewegen, anstatt ein »Verschieben«-Befehl aus einem Menü auszuwählen, während der Kreis ausgewählt ist. Gleichermaßen sollten Sie dem Benutzer in einer E-Mail-Anwendung erlauben, Dateien anzuhängen, indem diese aus dem Datei-Manager gezogen und dann in das Nachrichtenfenster fallen gelassen werden, falls diese es so wünschen.</para>

	<para>Siehe <xref linkend="input"/> für weitere Informationen über direkte Manipulation.</para>

    </sect1>

  </chapter>




<chapter id="desktop-integration">
  <title>Integration in die Arbeitsumgebung</title>
  
  <para>Es gibt zwei Elemente zur grundsätzlichen Integration in die Umgebung der GNOME-Arbeitsumgebung. <orderedlist>
      <listitem><para>Platzieren Sie einen Eintrag für ihre Anwendung in das <guimenu>Anwendung</guimenu>-Menü. Dies ist der primäre Mechanismus, mit dem Benutzern Anwendung finden und starten.</para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>Falls Ihre Anwendung Dateien öffnen und speichern kann, platzieren Sie Einträge für solche Dateitypen in der Anwendungsdatenbank und in der Dokumententyp- (MIME)-Datenbank. Dies ermöglicht es der Dateiverwaltung und anderen Anwendungen automatisch Ihre Anwendung zu starten, wenn diese auf Dateien treffen, mit welchen Ihre Anwendung umgehen kann.</para></listitem>
    </orderedlist> Fügen Sie keine Starter oder andere Symbole zur Arbeitsfläche hinzu, wenn Ihre Anwendung installiert wird. Die Arbeitsfläche ist ein Bereich des Benutzers, und ist reserviert für Symbole, welche sie selbst angefordert oder hinzugefügt haben.</para>
  <sect1 id="desktop-application-menu">
    <title>Setzen von Einträgen im Menü »Anwendungen«</title>
    
	<figure><title>Das Anwendungsmenü</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/desktop-applications-menu.png" format="PNG" width="160" depth="365"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/desktop-applications-menu.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Screenshot of the open Applications menu on the GNOME menu panel</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>
	
       <para>Das <guimenu>Anwendungen</guimenu>-Menü, welches standardmäßig auf der Leiste an der oberen Seite des Bildschirm erscheint, ist der hauptsächliche Mechanismus, bei dem Benutzern Anwendungen entdecken und starten. Sie platzieren Einträge in dieses Menü, indem Sie eine passende <filename>».desktop«</filename>-Datei installieren.</para>

    <para>The menu is arranged into a set of categories, such as Accessories and Games. Applications are placed in particular categories by the set of keywords they include in their <filename>.desktop</filename> file. </para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
		<listitem><para>Assign your application to only one category on the <guimenu>Applications</guimenu> menu</para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>For application suites that wrap a number of smaller sub-applications into a single window, such as Evolution or OpenOffice.org, add a menu item for each sub-application. For example, the mail, calendar, and tasklist in Evolution should each have their own menu item.</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>

	<para>Technical details can be found in the freedesktop.org <ulink url="http://freedesktop.org/Standards/menu-spec">menu</ulink> and <ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/desktop-entry-spec">desktop entry</ulink> specifications.</para>


    <sect2 id="menu-item-names">
      <title>Namen der Menüeinträge</title>


      <sect3 id="menu-item-functional-description">
	<title>Include a functional description in the menu name</title>

	<para>In the menu item name, include a description of functionality in addition to the proper name of the application. This is especially useful novice users, and to users of systems where numerous applications are installed by default. Users are more likely to find your application if the name that appears in the menu includes a description of its functionality.</para>

	<para>For example, <ulink url="http://ist.mit.edu/services/consulting/usability">user testing of MIT's Athena system</ulink> revealed that users had difficulty finding the file manager because they were unfamiliar with the name "Nautilus". Because users did not associate the word "Nautilus" with the concept "file manager" the menu item did not help them. This is an example of not using the user's language. See <xref linkend="principles-match"/> for more on this topic.</para>


	    <example>
		<title>Including functional description in menu names</title>
		<informaltable frame="all">
			
			<tgroup cols="2" align="left">
			  <thead>
				<row>
		      			<entry>Originaler Menüeintrag</entry>
				      <entry>Revidierter Menüeintrag</entry>
	   			</row>
			  </thead>
			<tbody>
	     			<row>
					<entry>Epiphany</entry>
					<entry>Epiphany Web Browser</entry>
				</row>
	  		</tbody>
         	</tgroup>
		</informaltable>
	</example>

      </sect3>

      <sect3>
	<title>Setzen Sie nur nützliche Informationen in den Menünamen</title>
	<para>Do not include words like "GNOME", "X Window System", "GTK+" or other platform details in <guimenu>Application</guimenu> menu names. The user probably already knows what platform they are using, and if they don't, then application names are not the right place to inform them.</para>
	<example>
		<title>Removing non-essential information from menu names</title>
		<informaltable frame="all">
			
			<tgroup cols="2" align="left">
			  <thead>
				<row>
		      			<entry>Originaler Menüeintrag</entry>
				      <entry>Revidierter Menüeintrag</entry>
	   			</row>
			  </thead>
			<tbody>
	     			<row>
					<entry>GNOME-Bildbetrachter</entry>
					<entry>Bildbetrachter</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>GTK Blog Editor</entry>
					<entry>Blog Editor</entry>
				</row>
	  		</tbody>
         	</tgroup>
		</informaltable>
	</example>

	<para>Do not include technical details when the user does not need to know them, or can infer them from context.  Avoid technical jargon unless the application is to be used only by a technical audience.</para>
	<para>For example, when both a client and a server for something are listed in the menus, remove the word "Client" from the menu name for the client.</para>
	
	<example>
		<title>Removing technical jargon from menu names</title>
		<informaltable frame="all">
			
			<tgroup cols="2" align="left">
			  <thead>
				<row>
		      			<entry>Originaler Menüeintrag</entry>
				      <entry>Revidierter Menüeintrag</entry>
	   			</row>
			  </thead>
			<tbody>
	     			<row>
					<entry>Gnome Batalla Naval Client</entry>
					<entry>Batalla Naval</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>Gnome Batalla Naval Server</entry>
					<entry>Batalla Naval Multiplayer Server</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>Gnome VideoLAN Client</entry>
					<entry>VideoLAN Movie Player</entry>
				</row>
	  		</tbody>
         	</tgroup>
		</informaltable>
	</example>

	<tip><title>Bereitstellung der richtigen Informationen</title>
        <para>Try to imagine what words users will be looking for when they select your application from the <guimenu>Applications</guimenu> menu. That is the information that should be in the menu name. For example, a user wanting to play a movie will probably not be looking for the word "Client". On the other hand, a user wanting to transmit movies from their computer may well look for the word "Server". Avoid thinking of the applications menu as an ontology!</para></tip>
      </sect3>

      <sect3>
	<title>Formate für Menünamen</title>
	<orderedlist>
	  
         <listitem>
	    <para>If your application's proper name is already descriptive of its functionality, and not just suggestive, use the format: <replaceable>Application Name</replaceable></para>
	<example>
		<title>Verwendung des Anwendungsnamens als Menüname</title>
		<informaltable frame="all">
			
			<tgroup cols="2" align="left">
			  <thead>
				<row>
		      			<entry>Anwendungsname</entry>
				      <entry>Menüname</entry>
	   			</row>
			  </thead>
			<tbody>
	     			<row>
					<entry>Wörterbuch</entry>
					<entry>Wörterbuch</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>Suchwerkzeug</entry>
					<entry>Suchwerkzeug</entry>
				</row>
	  		</tbody>
         	</tgroup>
		</informaltable>
        	</example>
          </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para>If there is a succinct functional description of your application, use the format: <replaceable>ApplicationName FunctionalDescription</replaceable></para>

	<example>
		<title>Verwenden </title>
		<informaltable frame="all">
			
			<tgroup cols="2" align="left">
			  <thead>
				<row>
		      			<entry>Anwendungsname</entry>
				      <entry>Name des Menüeintrags</entry>
	   			</row>
			  </thead>
			<tbody>
	     			<row>
					<entry>GIMP</entry>
					<entry>GIMP-Bildbearbeitung</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>Evolution email sub-application</entry>
					<entry>Evolution Email</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>AbiWord</entry>
					<entry>AbiWord Textverarbeitung</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>Galeon</entry>
					<entry>Galeon Webbrowser</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>Gramps</entry>
					<entry>Gramps Genealogy</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>AisleRiot</entry>
					<entry>AisleRiot Solitär</entry>
				</row>

	  		</tbody>
         	</tgroup>
		</informaltable>
	</example>


	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para>A few applications, particularly games, do not have appropriate functional descriptions (but note that many games do). In this case, use <replaceable>Application Name</replaceable> as the menu name.</para>

	<example>
		<title>Verwendung des Anwendungsnamens als Menüname für den Fall, dass keine funktionale Beschreibung verfügbar ist</title>
		<informaltable frame="all">
			
			<tgroup cols="2" align="left">
			  <thead>
				<row>
		      			<entry>Anwendungsname</entry>
				      <entry>Name des Menüeintrags</entry>
	   			</row>
			  </thead>
			<tbody>
	     			<row>
					<entry>Bomber Maze</entry>
					<entry>Bomber Maze</entry>
				</row>
	  		</tbody>
         	</tgroup>
		</informaltable>
	</example>

	  </listitem>

	</orderedlist>
      </sect3>
<!--
	<sect3>
	<title>Generic Name and Name</title>

        <para>There are two name types required for a menu item, a generic name and a proper name.  The menu item requires these two names to distinguish the applications when there are more than one of the same application type present and to simplify the item name when there is only one present.  If only one application of a generic name exists in the menu the application assumes the generic name, otherwise the proper name is displayed.</para>

	<example>
		<title>X-Chat .desktop file</title>
		 <programlisting>
	Name=X-Chat IRC
	GenericName=IRC
		 </programlisting>
	</example>

	<para>
	The generic name or GenericName, is a name describing only the applications functionality without the applications proper name.  This is the name to be displayed when there are no other applications of the same generic name present and should simply describe the pure functionality of the application without its actual name.
	</para>

	<para>
	A proper name or Name, is the displayed name of the application when there are more than one applications present with the same generic name.  This distinguishes the multiple generic names with the applications proper name.
	</para>

	<example>
		<title>GenericName and Name</title>
		<informaltable frame="all">
			
			<tgroup cols="2" align="left">
			  <thead>
				<row>
		      			<entry>GenericName</entry>
					<entry>Name</entry>
	   			</row>
			  </thead>
			  <tbody>
	     			<row>
					<entry>Web Browser</entry>
					<entry>Epiphany Web Browser</entry>
				</row>
	     			<row>
					<entry>Web Browser</entry>
					<entry>Mozilla Web Browser</entry>
				</row>
	     			<row>
					<entry>Word Processor</entry>
					<entry>AbiWord Word Processor</entry>
				</row>
	     			<row>
					<entry>Word Processor</entry>
					<entry>OpenOffice.org Word Processor</entry>
				</row>
	  		</tbody>
	         	</tgroup>
		</informaltable>
	</example>
	</sect3>
-->
    </sect2>
    <sect2 id="menu-item-tooltips">

      <title>Minihilfen für Menüeinträge</title>

      <para>Tooltips help provide users with enough information to run the right application. Many users use tooltips to explore a new environment.</para>
	<para>Provide a tooltip for each <guimenu>Application</guimenu> menu item you add, following these guidelines:</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
		<listitem><para>Phrase the tooltip as an imperative verb, for example "design", "write" or "check".</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Describe the most important tasks users can accomplish with your application.</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Zwar sollten Minihilfen nicht allzu ausführlich sein, aber doch länger als der Name des Objekt und mit entsprechend höherem Informationsgehalt.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	<example>
		<title>Beispiele für Minihilfen für GNOME-Anwendungen</title>
		<informaltable frame="all">
			
			<tgroup cols="2" align="left">
			  <thead>
				<row>
		      			<entry>Anwendung</entry>
				      <entry>Die Minihilfe des Menüeintrages</entry>
	   			</row>
			  </thead>
			<tbody>
	     			<row>
					<entry>Zeichentabelle</entry>
					<entry>Sonderzeichen in Dokumente einfügen</entry>
				</row>

				<row>
					<entry>Memprof</entry>
					<entry>Prüfen Sie Ihre Anwendungen auf Speicherlecks</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>Same Gnome</entry>
					<entry>Arrange long chains of similarly-colored balls to eliminate them</entry>
				</row>
				<row>
					<entry>Gnome Batalla Naval Client</entry>
					<entry>Find and sink enemy ships in this networked version of Battleship</entry>
				</row>
	  		</tbody>
	         	</tgroup>
		</informaltable>
	</example>

    </sect2>
   </sect1>
    <sect1 id="gconf-keys">

      <title>GConf-Schlüssel</title>

      <para>GConf keys are required to have long and short descriptions for each key.  Many keys have no interface through the application, so for someone administering the key values from another application each description field will be the only interface available to them.</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
		<listitem><para>Kurzbeschreibungen sollten kurz sein (weniger als 8 Wörter) und den Zweck des Schlüssels beschreiben</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Long Description should be complete in describing the possible values of the key and the effects that those values have on the application</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	<example>
		<title>Beispiele für GConf-Schlüsselbeschreibungen aus gnome-terminal</title>
		<informaltable frame="all">
			
			<tgroup cols="3" align="left">
			  <thead>
				<row>
					<entry>Schlüssel</entry>
		      			<entry>Kurzbeschreibung</entry>
				      <entry>Langbeschreibung</entry>
	   			</row>
			  </thead>
			<tbody>
	     			<row>
					<entry>background_type</entry>
					<entry>HIntergrundtyp</entry>
					<entry>Type of terminal background. May be "solid" for a solid color, "image" for an image, or "transparent" for pseudo-transparency. </entry>
				</row>	
	     			<row>
					<entry>delete_binding</entry>
					<entry>Effekt der Entfernen-Taste</entry>
					<entry>Legt fest, welchen Code die Entf-Taste ausgibt. Zulässige Werte: »ascii-del« (ASCII-DEL-Zeichen), »control-h« (Strg-H bzw. ASCII-BS-Zeichen) sowie »escape-sequence« (im Normalfall der Rück- oder Löschtaste zugewiesene Terminiersequenz). Empfohlener Schlüsselwert: »escape-sequence«.</entry>
				</row>	
			</tbody>
	         	</tgroup>
		</informaltable>
	</example>
   </sect1>
  
  <sect1 id="desktop-mimedatabase">
    <title>Zuordnen von Dokumenttypen zu Anwendungen</title>
    
    <para>The document type (MIME) database allows users to specify their preferred applications for opening different types of documents. This is the mechanism by which Nautilus, Evolution and other applications decide which application to run when they encounter a document they cannot open themselves.</para>

    <para>It is important for users to be able to double-click on documents they see on the desktop, such as files and email messages, and have them launch in their favorite application.  Therefore, your GNOME application should associate itself at install-time with all the document types it can handle. Technical details on doing this can be found in the Freedesktop <ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/shared-mime-info-spec"><citetitle>Shared MIME Info Specification</citetitle></ulink> and <ulink url="http://standards.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/desktop-entry-spec-latest.html"><citetitle>Desktop Entry Specification</citetitle></ulink>.</para>

    <!-- FIXME: need to cover things like the preferred list and when an application should add itself to the preferred list -->

  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="desktop-notification-area">
	<title>Verwendung des Benachrichtigungsfelds</title>
	<para>
	 Using the status notification area applications can notify the user of non-critical events (for example, arrival of new email, or a chat 'buddy' having logged on), and expose the status of active system processes (for example, a printing document, or a laptop's battery charging).</para>

	<para>Following the guidelines in this section will help to clarify the difference in the user's mind between information presented in the notification area, and controls and information presented on other parts of the panel.</para>

		<warning><para>The utility of the notification area decreases rapidly when more than about four icons are always present. For this reason, icons that appear only temporarily in response to events are preferable.</para></warning>

	<sect2 id="desktop-notification-or-applet"><title>Benachrichtigungsfeld oder Panel-Applet?</title>
	<para>
	You should probably write an applet instead of using the notification area if:</para>
	<itemizedlist>
		<listitem><para>clicking your notification area icon does anything other than opening a window directly associated with the icon (e.g. a mail folder window for a new mail icon, or a print queue window for printer notification icon), or </para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>there are icon-specific options on its context menu for doing anything other than that</para></listitem> 
		<listitem><para>your application would ever need to display more than one notification icon at the same time</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
	</sect2>

	<sect2><title>Erscheinungsbild der Symbole</title>
	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
		<listitem><para>Use table perspective for icons representing physical devices, with the light source above and to the left of the represented object.  For example, a printer icon during printing. See <xref linkend="icon_style_perspective"/> for more about table perspective.</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Use shelf perspective, with overhead lighting, for all other icons. For example, an envelope shown when new mail arrives. See <xref linkend="icon_style_perspective"/> for more about shelf perspective.</para></listitem>	
		<listitem><para>For monitors or progress bars that change over
time, such as a battery charge monitor, clearly delimit the border of the area.</para></listitem>

		</itemizedlist>

		<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
			<listitem><para>Only core GNOME programs may perpetually display an icon in the status area.</para></listitem>
			<listitem><para>Non-core programs for which a perpetual icon may be useful must default to not perpetually showing the icon. Users may select to enable a perpetual icon for the application as a preference. <remark>Standard way of presenting this option would be nice.</remark></para></listitem>
		</itemizedlist>

	</sect2>

	<sect2 id="notification-area-animation">
	<title>Animation</title>
	
	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
		<listitem><para>Icons should not usually appear animated. They may change to
indicate a change of state, but should not do so when that change
occurs regularly or rapidly. A battery status indicator would
usually change slowly, therefore an icon is appropriate. By contrast,
a load meter would always be changing, therefore it should use a flat
image.</para></listitem>
<!--		<listitem><para>Icons are permitted to blink under a few conditions.
 An icon may blink for n (=5?) seconds when first displayed
   if showing the icon is not caused by user action.
   A printing-in-progress icon would be shown because the user
   is printing a document, therefore it should not blink.
   An incoming email or personal message (IM) would be shown
   because something has changed absent the user, therefore it
   may blink.</para></listitem>

 		<listitem><para>A icon may blink for n seconds if its conditions for initially
   blinking recur. For example, an incoming email icon which was
   shown and blinked when a message arrived and which has remained
   visible may blink again when another message arrives.</para></listitem>
-->
 		<listitem><para>Any icon may blink to indicate an error in deference to showing
   an alert. For example, a printing-in-progress icon may blink when
   there is a paper jam, but not when the printer is on fire - that
   should show an alert.
   </para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Do not rely on blinking or animation as a means of alerting the user to any particular event.  <!-- commenting out until it exists...  -Seth The notification area respects the global desktop "no animation" preference for accessibility reasons. <remark>Note: This doesn&apos;t exist yet but it&apos;s on the list...</remark> --></para></listitem>
		</itemizedlist>

	</sect2>
	
	<sect2 id="notification-icon-interaction">
	<title>Interaktion</title>
		<para>Icons should respond to these user actions.
(Keypresses apply only when the icon has focus, of course)</para>
		<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
  			<listitem><para>Double-click or <keysym>Space</keysym> key
     should perform the icon's default action.  Normally this should open a window with relevant data, for example:
			<itemizedlist>
     				<listitem><para>the printer queue for a printing-in-progress icon.</para></listitem>
     				<listitem><para>the inbox for an incoming email icon</para></listitem>
     				<listitem><para>the message for an incoming message</para></listitem>
			</itemizedlist></para></listitem>
  		<listitem><para>Right-click or <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo>
     should present a menu for the icon containing at least
     the icon's default action.</para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>If the icon's properties may be altered, it should
  have a menu item <guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem> in its menu,
 nd show its property panel in response to Alt+Enter.</para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>Icons should obey normal tooltip conventions.</para></listitem>
		</itemizedlist>
	</sect2>
 </sect1>

</chapter>



<chapter id="windows">
  <title>Fenster</title>

  <sect1 id="windows-properties">
    <title>Parts of Windows and System Interaction</title>

    <sect2 id="window-props-titles">
      <title>Titel</title>

      <para>Geben Sie jedem Fenster einen Titel (mit der Ausnahme von  <link linkend="windows-alert">Alarme</link> und <link linkend="toolbox-windows">Werkzeugboxen</link>). Ein guter Fenstertitel beinhaltet Informationen, die für den Benutzer relevant sind, und ein bestimmtes Fenster von einem anderen, offenem Fenster unterscheidet. Vermeiden Sie Informationen, die bei dieser Auswahl nicht helfen, wie zum Beispiel die Versionsnummer oder der Name des Herstellers.</para>

      <figure>
        <title>Beispiel für einen Fenstertitel</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="28" fileref="images/windows-titlebar.png" format="PNG" width="379"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-titlebar.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Screenshot showing a window title bar with title
            "Parts of Windows and System Interaction - Mozilla Firefox"</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <para>See the description of each particular window type for title
      formats.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="window-props-borders">
      <title>Rahmen und Fensterbefehle</title>

      <para>Most windows have borders, except certain shaped windows and some
      torn-off windows. Do not attempt to draw your own window borders, but
      instead provide hints to the window manager for the desired border type.</para>

      <para>Different window commands are appropriate to different types of
      window. See the description of each particular window type for a list of
      appropriate window commands. These are the possible window commands:</para>

      <itemizedlist>
        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Schließen</title>

            <para>Closes the window. <emphasis>Always</emphasis> draw this as
            a button on the window border when relevant to the window type.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Maximieren</title>

            <para>Causes the window to use all unused screen space.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Minimieren</title>

            <para>Causes the window to be temporarily hidden. It will continue
            to appear on the desktop window list.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Roll-up/Unroll</title>

            <para>Shows only the title bar of the window, as if it has been
            "rolled up".</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="window-props-modality">
      <title>Modalität</title>

      <para>A <emphasis role="bold">non-modal</emphasis> window does not
      restrict the user's interaction with other open windows on the
      desktop in any way. Using non-modal windows gives the user maximum
      flexibility to perform tasks within your application in any order and by
      whichever means they choose.</para>

      <para>An <emphasis role="bold">application modal</emphasis> window,
      while it is open, prevents the user from interacting with other windows
      in the same application.</para>

      <para>A <emphasis role="bold">system modal</emphasis> window, while it
      is open, prevents the user from interacting with any other window in any
      application, including the desktop itself.</para>

      <itemizedlist>
        <title>Richtlinien</title>

        <listitem>
          <para>Use an application modal window only if allowing interaction
          with other parts of the application while the window is open could
          cause data loss or some other serious problem. Provide a clear way
          of leaving the modal window, such as a <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
          button in an alert.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Do not use system modal windows.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="window-props-focus">
      <title>Fokus</title>

      <para>Focus is the means by which the user designates which window
      should receive data from the keyboard, mouse or other input device. If
      using a screen reader or similar assistive technology, focus may also
      designate the window that the user wants to receive information about.
      The focused window is considered the window the user is currently
      "working with".</para>

      <para>Ensure your application functions properly with the three
      different mechanisms by which windows can receive focus in GNOME:</para>

      <itemizedlist>
        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Fokuswechsel durch Klicken</title>

            <para>A window is focused by clicking in it.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Point-to-focus</title>

            <para>A window is focused by moving the mouse pointer into it.
            Sometimes known as "sloppy focus".</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Tastaturfokus</title>

            <para>A window is focused by using a keyboard shortcut such as
            <keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo>.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <note>
        <title>Special restrictions for point to focus</title>

        <para>Note that point-to-focus places a number of restrictions on
        GNOME applications that are not present in environments such as MacOS
        or Windows. For example, utility windows shared between multiple
        document windows, like the toolbox in the GIMP Image Editor, cannot be
        context-sensitive— that is, they cannot initiate an action such as
        <guibutton>Save</guibutton> on the current document. This is because
        while moving the mouse from the current document to the utility
        window, the user could inadvertantly pass the pointer over a different
        document window, thus changing the focus and possibly saving the wrong
        document.</para>
      </note>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="windows-show-hide">
	<title>Anzeigen und Verbergen von Fenstern</title>
	<para>How your application shows and hides windows can greatly affect the user's perception of your application, particularly its performance.</para>
	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
		<listitem><para>Always show a window as soon as possible, but make sure your window is the correct size before displaying it. Resizing a window after it is visible is disorienting and gives an unpolished look to your application.</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>If a window contains information that takes a few seconds to compute or display, it is often better not to fill it in completely before displaying the window.  For example, a window containing a large text area can be shown
quickly, and then the text can be filled in afterwards (provided this does not result in the window resizing).  This will make your application feel more responsive than if you had not shown the window until its content was complete.</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Hide a window as soon as possible after it is
closed. Unless an alert might be shown, immediately hide a window that the user has closed by clicking the Close button in the window border--  
your application can still perform any internal clean-up operations afterwards. Besides making the
system appear slow, not doing this can cause the window manager to think the application is not responding, and display an unnecessary alert to the user.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist> 

    </sect2>

  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="windows-primary">
    <title>Primäre Fenster</title>

    <para>A primary window usually presents a view of the user's data,
    such as a text document in a word processor application, an image in a
    drawing program, or calculations in a calculator or spreadsheet
    application. It may also be a view of something more abstract, like a
    game. A single instance of an application may have more than one primary
    window, and more than one kind of primary window.</para>

    <para>A primary window is always shown on the panel window list.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Ein typisches primäres Fenster (gedit)</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="372" fileref="images/windows-primary.png" format="PNG" width="397"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/windows-primary.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>A typical primary window: the gedit document view</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <para>Ein primäres Anwendungsfenster hat normalerweise einen Rahmen, eine Menüleiste und eine Statuszeile. Es kann auch eine oder mehrere Werkzeugleisten enthalten.</para>

    <sect2 id="primary-window-titles">
      <title>Titel</title>

      <para>Das wichtigste Element eines dokumentbasierten Anwendungsfenstertitels ist der Name des geöffneten Dokuments. Bei anderen Anwendungen ist es üblicherweise der Name der Anwendung.</para>

      <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

	<listitem><para>Use <replaceable>Filename</replaceable>
	as the window title for document-based applications. 
	Do not use the full pathname, as
	the filename alone is easier to distinguish amongst
	other open window titles, for example on the window list.</para>
      	<example>
        <title>Verwendung von Dokumentnamen als Fenstertitel</title>

        <informaltable frame="all">
          <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
            <thead>
              <row>
                <entry>Anwendung</entry>

                <entry>Beispiel für einen Fenstertitel</entry>
              </row>
            </thead>

            <tbody>
              <row>
                <entry>AbiWord</entry>

                <entry>Mein Bericht.abw</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Evolution</entry>

                <entry>Eingang</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Musikwiedergabe</entry>

                <entry>U2 - Better Than the Real Thing</entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </informaltable>
      	</example>
	<para>If the
      	pathname is important, for example the user has opened two documents
      	with the same name from different directories in the same application,
      	show the full pathname in the statusbar.</para>
	</listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Before a new document has been saved for the first time, set
	the window title to <replaceable>Unsaved &lt;document type&gt;</replaceable>.
	For example, 	
	<replaceable>Unsaved Drawing</replaceable>, 
	<replaceable>Unsaved Spreadsheet</replaceable>, or the more
	generic <replaceable>Unsaved Document</replaceable>.</para>
	</listitem>



      	<listitem><para>When a document has pending changes, insert an asterisk 
      (*) at the beginning of the window title.
      For example, <replaceable>*Unsaved Drawing</replaceable>,
      <replaceable>*AnnualReport</replaceable>.</para></listitem>
      
	<listitem><para>For non-document-based applications, use 
		<replaceable>Application Name</replaceable>
      		as the window title.</para>

      	<example>
        <title>Using application names as window titles</title>

        <informaltable frame="all">
          <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
            <thead>
              <row>
                <entry>Anwendung</entry>

                <entry>Fenstertitel</entry>
              </row>
            </thead>

            <tbody>
              <row>
                <entry>Wörterbuch</entry>

                <entry>Wörterbuch</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Taschenrechner</entry>

                <entry>Taschenrechner</entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </informaltable>
      </example>
      </listitem>

      <listitem><para>Do not place version numbers, company names, or other information
      that is of no immediate use to the user in the window title. These
      consume space, making titles in limited spaces such as the system window
      list less useful, and add more text the user has to scan to find useful
      information. In a "beta" product, where version numbers are
      critical for bug information, placing version numbers can be useful, but
      remove them from stable releases. Place version information in the about
      box instead.</para></listitem>

     </itemizedlist>

      <para>While document names are most pertinent to users, we understand
      that application developers may want to increase recognition of their
      application. If you plan to include your application's name in the
      title of a primary window, use the following format:
      <replaceable>Document Name</replaceable> - <replaceable>Application Name</replaceable>.
      This will ensure that the document name appears in limited space
      situations such as the system window list.</para>

      <warning><para>Including the application name in the title of a document-based application is <emphasis role="bold">not</emphasis> recommended.</para></warning>

      <tip><para>Think about naming windows in the context of the panel window list. On a typical screen with a relatively small number of windows open, a window will have 20-30 characters of text and an icon. Consider which text will provide the most immediately obvious clues to a user looking for a particular window.</para></tip>

    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="primary-window-commands">
      <title>Fensterbefehle</title>

      <para>Close, Maximize/Restore, Minimize, Roll-up/Unroll</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="document-interface-types">
      <title>Relation zwischen Dokumenten und Fenstern</title>

      <sect3 id="sdi">
        <title>Single Document Interface (SDI)</title>

        <para>A single document interface places each document in its own
        primary window. Toolboxes and other utility windows may be shared
        between multiple SDI documents, but closing them should have no effect
        on the document windows. Use SDI for your GNOME application unless
        there is a compelling reason not to.</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Eine typische SDI-Anwendung (Eye of GNOME)</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="226" fileref="images/windows-sdi.png" format="PNG" width="268"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/windows-sdi.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>A typical SDI application: Eye of GNOME being used to
              inspect an icon</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>
      </sect3>

      <sect3 id="mdi">
        <title>Multiple Document Interface (MDI)</title>

        <para>A multiple document interface presents a paned, tabbed or
        similar presentation of two documents<!--, or two views of the same document-->
        within a single window.</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Eine typische MDI-Anwendung (gedit) mit drei in Reitern geöffneten Dokumenten</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="349" fileref="images/windows-mdi.png" format="PNG" width="372"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/windows-mdi.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>A typical MDI application: gedit with three open
              documents in the same window</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <para>MDI has several inherent usability problems, so its use is
        discouraged in applications. It is better to open each document in a
        new primary window, with its own menubar, toolbars and statusbar, or
        allow multiple instances of your application to be run simultaneously.
        In either case, this leaves it for the window manager (acting on the
        user's preferences) rather than your application to decide how to
        group and present document windows from the same application.</para>
      </sect3>

      <sect3 id="csdi">
        <title>Controlled Single Document Interface (CSDI)</title>
        <para>In a typical SDI application, document windows are treated as
        primary. For example, when all document windows have been closed, the 
        application (including utility windows) exits as well. In CSDI a utility
        window is treated as the primary window. For example, closing this
        utility window will close all document windows and exit the application.</para>

        <warning><para>Using CSDI is <emphasis role="bold">not</emphasis> recommended</para></warning>

        <para>CSDI is sometimes used because document windows might be too
        small to have menu bars. Typically this is not the normal use case for the
        application, but does represent a significant minority use case. For
        example, an image editor being used to edit small web page elements will
        often result in very small document windows that cannot accomodate
        a title bar.</para>

        <para>A better way to address this problem is to allow menu bars to "collapse"
        into an overflow button, in much the same way toolbars operate when the window
        shrinks to below the toolbar width. This allows for small windows, but also
        provides an opportunity for people to figure out where their menus have gone.</para>

        <tip><para>Note that if very small documents are the <emphasis>primary</emphasis> use 
        case for your application, you should consider finding a means to avoid windows
        altogether. Windows are not an effective interface for dealing with large
        numbers of small items. Consider looking for a fixed/automated layout system
        for presenting the "documents". Also consider if the "documents" will be primarily
        used in a higher level grouping, in which case that grouping could become the
        document instead.</para></tip>
      </sect3>

    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="windows-utility">
    <title>Utility Windows</title>

    <para>Utility windows, such as palettes and toolboxes, normally have
    borders. They do not contain a menu bar, a toolbar, or a statusbar.</para>
    <para>
	A utility window should not appear in the panel window list unless
	it is, or may be, the only window shown by an application.
	<!-- Can't think of an example just now! CFB
	For example, a BLAH window  may be shown after
	the main BLAH application window has been closed.
    </para>
    <para> -->
	Otherwise, the utility window should be raised above the application when
	the application window itself is selected from the window list.
    </para>

    <sect2 id="windows-instant-apply">
      <title>Instant apply windows</title>

      <para>For windows that allow the user to change values or settings, such
      as property and preference windows, update those values or settings
      immediately to reflect the changes made in the window. This is known as
      "instant apply". Do not make the user press an
      <guibutton>OK</guibutton> or <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button to make
      the changes happen, unless either:</para>

      <itemizedlist>
        <listitem>
          <para>the change will take more than about one second to apply, in
          which case applying the change immediately could make the system
          feel slow or unresponsive, or</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>the changes in the window have to be applied simultaneously to
          prevent the system entering a potentially unstable state. For
          example, the hostname and proxy fields in a network properties
          window.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <para>If either of these conditions affect only a few of the controls in
      your window, arrange those controls together into one or more groups,
      each with its own <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button. Leave the rest of
      the controls as instant apply.</para>

	<itemizedlist>
		<title>Richtlinien</title>
		
        	<listitem><para>Do not attempt to validate or apply changes caused by editing a
        text field control until the user has moved focus to a different
        control in the window, or the window is closed. 
	Validating after each keypress is usually
        annoying and unnecessary. Exception: if the field accepts only a fixed 
	number of characters, such as a hexadecimal color code, validate and
	apply the change as soon as that number of characters have been entered.
	</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>When the user moves focus to a different control, do not indicate an invalid entry by displaying an alert or undoing the change the user made. Both of these methods are particularly disruptive for focus-follows-mouse users, for whom focus may leave the control more often than it does for a click-to-focus user.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
      </sect2>

	<sect2 id="windows-explicit-apply">
		<title>Explicit apply windows</title>
      <para>If most of the controls in your window are not suitable for
      instant apply, consider making the whole window "explicit
      apply". An explicit apply window has these three buttons in its
      button box, plus an optional <guibutton>Help</guibutton> button:</para>

      <itemizedlist>
        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Anwenden</title>

            <para>Applies all the settings in the window, but does not close
            the window in case the user wishes to change their mind.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Abbrechen</title>

            <para>Resets all settings in the window to those that were in
            force when the window was opened. Note: this must undo the effects
            of all applications of the <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> since the
            window was opened, not just the most recent one.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>OK</title>

            <para>Applies all settings in the window, and closes the window.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <figure id="explicit-apply-figure">
        <title>Buttons in an explicit apply window</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="55" fileref="images/windows-explicit-apply.png" format="PNG" width="387"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-explicit-apply.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Screenshot showing correct positions for Help, Apply,
            Cancel and OK buttons in a dialog</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="default-buttons">
      <title>Standardknöpfe</title>

      <para>When designing a dialog or utility window, you can assign the
      <keycap>Return</keycap> key to activate a particular button in the
      window. GNOME indicates this button to the user by drawing a different
      border around it. For example, the <guibutton>Help</guibutton> button in
      <xref linkend="explicit-apply-figure"/>.</para>

      <para>Choose the default button to be the most likely action, such as a
      confirmation action or an action that applies changes in a utility
      window. Do not make a button the default if its action is irreversible,
      destructive or otherwise inconvenient to the user. If there is no
      appropriate button in your window, to designate as the default button,
      do not set one.</para>

      <para>In particular, it is currently <emphasis>not</emphasis>
      recommended to make the <guibutton>Close</guibutton> button the default
      in an <link linkend="windows-instant-apply">instant apply</link> window, as this
      can lead to users closing the window accidentally before they have
      finished using it.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="property-windows">
      <title>Eigenschaftsfenster</title>

      <para>Property windows allow the user to view and change the
      characteristics of an object such as a document, file, drawing, or
      application launcher.</para>

      <figure>
        <title>Beispiel für ein Eigenschaftsfenster</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-properties.png" format="PNG" width="302" depth="335"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-properties.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Screenshot showing the "file properties" window
            from Nautilus</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Titelformat:</title>

        <para><replaceable>Object Name</replaceable> Properties</para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

        <para>Close, Minimize, Roll-up/Unroll</para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Knöpfe:</title>

        <para>Place a <guibutton>Close</guibutton> button in the lower right
        corner. A <guibutton>Help</guibutton> may be placed in the lower left
        corner.</para>
      </formalpara>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="preference-windows">
      <title>Einstellungsfenster</title>

      <para>Preferences windows allow the user to change the way an
      application looks or behaves.</para>

      <figure>
        <title>Beispiel für ein Einstellungsfenster</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="249" fileref="images/windows-preferences.png" format="PNG" width="354"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-preferences.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Screenshot showing the Gnibbles preferences window</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Titelformat:</title>

        <para><replaceable>Application Name</replaceable> Preferences</para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

        <para>Close, Minimize, Roll-up/Unroll</para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Knöpfe:</title>

        <para>Place a <guibutton>Close</guibutton> button in the lower right
        corner. A <guibutton>Help</guibutton> may be placed in the lower left
        corner.</para>
      </formalpara>

      <sect3 id="preference-windows-overriding-colors">
        <title>Anpassen von Schriften und Farben</title>

	<para>If your preferences window allows the user to customize fonts or colors, use the following wording and layout as a guide for these controls:</para>
	
	<example>
		<title>Recommended wording for overriding theme elements- replace with screenshot</title>	
		<programlisting>
	(o) Use font from theme
	(o) Use this font: [ Font selector ]

	(o) Use colors from theme
	(o) Use these colors:
		Background: [ color selector ]
		Foreground: [ color selector ]
		</programlisting>
	</example>

	<para>The wording of the radio buttons may be more specific where required, for example, "Use monospace font from theme", or "Use background color from theme".</para>
      </sect3>

    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="toolbox-windows">
      <title>Werkzeugkästen</title>

      <para>A toolbox provides convenient access to a set of actions and
      toggles through a set of small toolbar-like buttons. Toolboxes can be
      used to provide a specialized group of tools to augment a toolbar
      containing more universal items such as <guibutton>Save</guibutton> and
      <guibutton>open</guibutton>. A single toolbox can be shared between
      multiple documents to save screen space.</para>

      <figure id="toolbox-figure">
        <title>Beispiel für einen Werkzeugkasten</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="89" fileref="images/windows-toolbox-small.png" format="PNG" width="136"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-toolbox-small.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>A screenshot of a toolbox with eight buttons arranged into
            two rows</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Titelformat:</title>

        <para>Werkzeugkästen haben keinen Titel</para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

        <para>Close, Roll-up/Unroll</para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Knöpfe:</title>

        <para>Werkzeugkästen haben keine Knöpfe</para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Größenänderung:</title>

        <para>Make toolboxes resizable, but only resize by discrete toolbox
        item widths. In other words, the user can resize the toolbox to be one
        item wide, two items wide, three items wide, etc. but not one and a
        half items wide.</para>
      </formalpara>

      <itemizedlist>
        <title>Richtlinien</title>

        <listitem>
          <para>Only place buttons in a toolbox that do not open another
          window.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Toolboxes are best used for modal toggle buttons that affect
          the operation of the mouse on the document, such as a set of buttons
          for choosing between paintbrush, eraser, and fill modes in a drawing
          application. Buttons that initiate actions upon clicking (such as a
          save button) are better placed in toolbars.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Ensure that closing a toolbox does not close or otherwise
          alter any primary window with which it is associated.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Do not place toolboxes in the system window list. Toolboxes 
          should always remain above all primary windows with
          which they are associated.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>If all primary windows associated with a toolbox are closed or
          minimized, hide the toolbox as well. Show the toolbox again when one
          of the primary windows is opened or restored.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Make a toolbox two items wide by default, unless it is broken
          into <link linkend="toolbox_windows_categories">categories</link>.
          Make categorized toolboxes four items wide by default.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <sect3 id="toolbox_windows_categories">
        <title>Toolbox Categories</title>

        <para>While categories may not be as visually appealing as a toolbox
        homogenously filled with beautiful icons, they make an unwieldy large
        toolbox more managable. Picking a small icon from more than fifteen
        other items is a difficult task. Additionally, categories allow users
        to hide sets of tool items that are not relevant to their current
        task.</para>

        <figure id="example-toolbox-figure">
          <title>A large toolbox broken into categories</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="156" fileref="images/windows-toolbox-large.png" format="PNG" width="136"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/windows-toolbox-large.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase/>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <itemizedlist>
          <title>Richtlinien</title>

          <listitem>
            <para>Break toolboxes with more than sixteen items into
            categories. The best size for a category is between four and ten
            items.</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>Give each category a label (in title caps) and a collapsing
            arrow. Clicking the label or the arrow toggles the category
            between a collapsed and uncollapsed state.</para>
          </listitem>
        </itemizedlist>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>

    <!-- FIXME - should eventually give general guidelines for other sorts of utility window
    <sect2 id="other-windows">
      <title>Other</title>
      <para>FIXME</para>
    </sect2>
    -->
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="windows-alert">
    <title>Alarme</title>

    <para>An alert provides information about the state of the application
    system, or asks for essential information about how to proceed with a
    particular task. It is distinct from other types of window in that it is
    not directly requested by the user, and usually contains a message or a
    question rather than editable controls. Since alerts are an unwelcome
    intrusion into the user's work, do not use them except where necessary
    to avoid potential data loss or other serious problems.</para>

    <para>
 	An alert has a border similar to that of a dialog, and is object modal. 
    </para>
    <para>
	An alert should not appear in the panel window list unless
	it is, or may be, the only window shown by an application. For
	example, an appointment reminder alert may be shown after
	the main calendar application window has been closed.
    </para>
    <para>
	Otherwise, an alert should be raised above the application when
	the application window itself is selected from the window list.
    </para>

    <figure id="example-alert-figure">
      <title>Beispiel für eine Warnung</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-information.png" width="251" depth="123" format="PNG"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-information.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>An example of an alert, showing the text "You have an
          appointment with George Wells in 15 minutes", and with an OK
          button to dismiss the window.</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!--<remark>FIXME: need to redo the spacing and icons in the alert shots. I think I have a glade file for these somewhere. -Seth</remark>-->

    <formalpara>
      <title>Titelformat</title>

      <para>Alert windows have no titles, as the title would usually
      unnecessarily duplicate the alert's primary text. This way, users
      can read and respond to alerts more quickly as there is less visual
      noise and confounding text.</para>
    </formalpara>

    <formalpara>
      <title>Größenänderung</title>

      <para>Alert windows are not resizable. If the user needs to resize your
      alert, the text is probably not concise enough.</para>
    </formalpara>

    <formalpara>
      <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

      <para>Keine</para>
    </formalpara>

    <caution>
      <title>Warnungen müssen über ihrem Elternelement bleiben</title>

      <para>Alerts do not appear in the system window list. Consequently, take
      care to ensure that alerts stay above their parent window. Otherwise,
      users will be likely to lose the alert and find your application
      unresponsive for no apparent reason. Modal windows should always stay
      above the window(s) they block.</para>
    </caution>

    <!--    
    <para role="library-problem">Buttons in GTK dialogues end up the same size (sized to the button with the longest text label). This is wrong, and looks bad.</para>
    <para role="library-problem">Automatic wrapping of labels happens at funny places and ends up looking wrong. Labels should wrap before the last whole word that does not fit in the allotted space.</para> 
      -->

    <!--
  <para>FIXME - reduced or no frame; one or two buttons: <guibutton>OK</guibutton> for informing alerts, and effectively <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> and <guibutton>OK</guibutton> for confirmation. No other controls: especially not the "Do not show this again" checkbutton. Perhaps locally modal, rarely globally modal.</para>
    -->

    <sect2 id="alert-text">
      <title>Warntext</title>

      <para>Eine Warnung kann sowohl einen primären als auch sekundären Text enthalten. Der primäre Text fasst knapp die Situation zusammen. Der sekundäre Text liefert genauere Informationen.</para>

	<para>Make both the primary and secondary text selectable. This
	makes it easy for the user to copy and paste the text to another
	window, such as an email message.
	</para>

      <figure id="alert-text-figure">
        <title>Primary and Secondary Text Placement</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-text.png" width="446" depth="178" format="PNG"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-text.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Screenshot of an alert showing example of primary text in
            bold, and secondary text in a smaller font underneath.</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Primärer Text</title>

        <para>The primary text provides the user with a one sentence summary
        of the information or suggested action. This summary should concisely
        contain the essential details of the problem or suggestion. Every
        alert has primary text, displayed in a bold font slightly larger than
	the default. The primary text is punctuated in 'newspaper headline'
	style, that is, it has no terminating period, but it may have a 
	terminating question mark.</para>
      </formalpara>

      <para role="technical-note">Denote primary text with the pango markup:
      <programlisting>&lt;span weight="bold"
      size="larger"&gt;<replaceable>Primary Text</replaceable>&lt;/span&gt;</programlisting></para>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Sekundärer Text</title>

        <para>Secondary text provides a more in-depth description of the
        problem and suggested action, including possible side effects.
        Secondary text can also provide information that may be helpful in
        allowing the user to make an informed decision. In most situations the
        user should only need the primary text to make a quick decision, but
        they may read the secondary text if they are unsure of the proper
        course of action, or require extra details. Secondary text is
        optional, but if used, place it one text line height beneath the
        primary text using the default font size and weight.</para>
      </formalpara>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="alert-button-order">
      <title>Alarmknöpfe</title>

      <para>Give all alerts an affirmative button that dismisses the alert and
      performs the action suggested in the primary text. Provide a
      <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button for all alerts displayed in
      response to a user actions, such as <guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem>. If
      the alert warns of a technical problem or other situation that could
      result in data loss, provide a <guibutton>Help</guibutton> button that
      provides more information on the particular situation and explains the
      user's options. You may also provide buttons to perform alternate
      actions that provide another possible solution, fix potential problems,
      or launch related dialogs or programs.</para>

      <figure id="alert-buttons-figure">
        <title>Button ordering and placement for alerts</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-buttons.png" format="PNG" width="425" depth="62"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-buttons.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Screenshot showing ordering and placement of alert
            buttons: Help button in bottom left, and Alternate, Cancel and
            Affirmative buttons in bottom right.</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Button Phrasing</title>

        <para>Write button labels as imperative verbs, for example
        <guibutton>Save</guibutton>, <guibutton>Print</guibutton>. This allows
        users to select an action with less hesitation. An active phrase also
        fits best with the button's role in initiating actions, as
        contrasted with a more passive phrase. For example
        <guibutton>Find</guibutton> and <guibutton>Log In</guibutton> are
        better buttons than <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> and
        <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
      </formalpara>

      <itemizedlist>
        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Affirmative Button</title>

            <para>Place the affirmative button in the lower right corner of
            the alert. The affirmative button accepts the action proposed by
            the alert, or simply dismisses the alert if no action is suggested
            (as is the case with an <link linkend="alerts-information">information
            alert</link>).</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Abbrechen-Knopf</title>

            <para>If the alert was produced in response to a user's action,
            place a <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button immediately to the
            left of the affirmative button. This provides an escape route for
            users to stop an action in response to new information, or just if
            they clicked accidentally. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
            button reverts the application to its state prior to the user
            action.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Hilfe-Knopf</title>

            <para>A <guibutton>Help</guibutton> button may be used to clarify
            alerts that present potentially destructive options. Place the
            <guibutton>Help</guibutton> button in the lower left corner of the
            alert. When clicked, launch a help window clarifying the
            situation, detailing the actions performed by the other buttons,
            and explaining any side-effects that each action may have.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <formalpara>
            <title>Alternate Buttons</title>

            <para>Extra buttons may be used to provide alternates to the
            primary action proposed by the alert text. Place these buttons to
            the left of the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, or the
            affirmative button if <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> is not
            present. An example of a common alternate action would be a
            <guibutton>Quit without Saving</guibutton> button in a save
            confirmation alert. This is an alternative to the primary
            suggested action <guibutton>Save</guibutton> and the
            <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button.</para>
          </formalpara>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="alert-spacing">
      <title>Spacing and Positioning Inside Alerts</title>

      <para>Using clear, consistent spacing in alerts makes the message easier
      to digest and the available responses more obvious.</para>

      <figure id="alert-spacing-figure">
        <title>Spacing inside an alert</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-spacing.png" format="PNG" width="530" depth="250"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-spacing.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Diagram showing correct spacing to use between controls
            and buttons in an alert window. This is detailed in the guidelines
            below.</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <itemizedlist>
        <title>Richtlinien</title>

        <listitem>
          <para>The border around all edges of the alert, and the space
          between the icon and the text, is 12 pixels.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>The horizontal spacing between the buttons is 6 pixels.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Add one line break at the standard font size below both the
          primary and secondary text, or 24 pixels if you are using Glade.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Align the top of the icon with the top of the primary text.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Left-align the message text, for western locales.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <tip>
        <title>Technisce Details für ein sauberes Layout</title>

        <para>Create a new GtkDialog window specifying the number of buttons
        you wish the alert to contain (and a help button if appropriate). The
        GtkDialog will contain a GtkVBox with an empty upper row, and a lower
        row containing a GtkButtonBox with buttons in it. In the empty upper
        row, place a new GtkHBox. In the left column of the GtkHBox place a
        GtkImage. In the right column of the GtkHBox place a GtkLabel. Inside
        the GtkLabel place <replaceable>Primary Text</replaceable> first
        (using the appropriate Pango markup, see <xref linkend="alert-text"/>),
        then put two linebreaks (return), then place
        <replaceable>Secondary Text</replaceable>. Now change the properties
        for each control according to these tables:</para>

        <table frame="topbot" pgwide="0">
          <title>Eigenschaften für GtkDialog</title>

          <tgroup align="left" cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <thead>
              <row valign="top">
                <entry>Eigenschaft</entry>

                <entry>Wert</entry>
              </row>
            </thead>

            <tbody>
              <row>
                <entry>Titel</entry>

                <entry>(kein)</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Rahmenbreite</entry>

                <entry>6</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Typ</entry>

                <entry>Oberste Ebene</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Größe veränderbar</entry>

                <entry>Nein</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Has Separator</entry>

                <entry>Nein</entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </table>

        <table frame="topbot" pgwide="0">
          <title>Properties for the GtkVBox (included in the dialog by
          default)</title>

          <tgroup align="left" cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <thead>
              <row valign="top">
                <entry>Eigenschaft</entry>

                <entry>Wert</entry>
              </row>
            </thead>

            <tbody>
              <row>
                <entry>Abstand</entry>

                <entry>12</entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </table>

        <table frame="topbot" pgwide="0">
          <title>Eigenschaften des GtkHBox</title>

          <tgroup align="left" cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <thead>
              <row valign="top">
                <entry>Eigenschaft</entry>

                <entry>Wert</entry>
              </row>
            </thead>

            <tbody>
              <row>
                <entry>Abstand</entry>

                <entry>12</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Rahmenbreite</entry>

                <entry>6</entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </table>

        <table frame="topbot" pgwide="0">
          <title>Eigenschaften des GtkImage</title>

          <tgroup align="left" cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <thead>
              <row valign="top">
                <entry>Eigenschaft</entry>

                <entry>Wert</entry>
              </row>
            </thead>

            <tbody>
              <row>
                <entry>Y-Ausrichtung</entry>

                <entry>0.00</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Symbolgröße</entry>

                <entry>Dialog</entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </table>

        <table frame="topbot" pgwide="0">
          <title>Properties for the GtkLabel</title>

          <tgroup align="left" cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0">
            <thead>
              <row valign="top">
                <entry>Eigenschaft</entry>

                <entry>Wert</entry>
              </row>
            </thead>

            <tbody>
              <row>
                <entry>Syntax-Hervorhebung verwenden</entry>

                <entry>Ja</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Zeilenumbruch</entry>

                <entry>Ja</entry>
              </row>

              <row>
                <entry>Y-Ausrichtung</entry>

                <entry>0.00</entry>
              </row>
            </tbody>
          </tgroup>
        </table>
      </tip>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="alerts-information">
      <title>Information Alerts</title>

      <para>Use an information alert when the user must know the information
      presented before continuing, or has specifically requested the
      information. Present less important information by other means such as a
      statusbar message.</para>

      <figure id="information-alert-figure">
        <title>An information alert</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="123" fileref="images/windows-alert-information.png" format="PNG" width="251"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-information.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase/>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <itemizedlist>
        <title>An information alert...</title>

        <listitem>
          <para>uses the stock information icon.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>presents a selectable message and an <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
          button. The button is placed in the bottom right corner of the
          alert. Pressing <keysym>Enter</keysym> or <keysym>Escape</keysym>
          dismisses the alert.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>may present a convenience button to give access to a relevant
          object. For example, a <guibutton>Details</guibutton> button in an
          appointment reminder alert that opens the appointment's property
          window. Place this button to the left of the affirmative button.</para>

          <!-- FIXME: Reword -->
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

        <para>Roll-up/Unroll, Minimize (if the alert has no parent window),
        Close</para>
      </formalpara>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="alerts-error">
      <title>Fehlerwarnungen</title>

      <para>Display an error alert when a user-requested operation cannot be
      sucessfully completed. Present errors caused by operations not requested
      by the user by another means, unless the error could result in data loss
      or other serious problems. For example, an error encountered during an
      email check initiated by the user clicking a toolbar button should
      present an error alert. However, an error encountered in an automated
      periodic email check would more appropriately report failure with a
      statusbar message.</para>

      <figure id="error-alert-figure">
        <title>An error alert</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-error.png" width="287" depth="156" format="PNG"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-error.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase/>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <itemizedlist>
        <title>An error alert...</title>

        <listitem>
          <para>uses the stock error icon.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>presents a selectable message and an <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
          button. The button is placed in the bottom-right corner of the
          alert. Pressing <keysym>Enter</keysym> may dismiss the error alert.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>may present a convenience button to allow immediate handling
          of the error. For example, a <guibutton>Format...</guibutton> button
          in a "This disk is not formatted" alert. Place this button
          to the left of the affirmative button.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

        <para><!-- Minimize, ??? -->Roll-up/Unroll</para>
      </formalpara>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="alerts-confirmation">
      <title>Confirmation Alerts</title>

      <para>Present a confirmation alert when the user's command may
      destroy their data, create a security risk, or take more than 30 seconds
      of user effort to recover from if it was selected in error.</para>

      <figure id="confirmation-alert-figure">
        <title>A confirmation alert</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-confirmation.png" contentwidth="450" contentdepth="162" format="PNG"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-confirmation.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase/>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <itemizedlist>
        <title>A confirmation alert...</title>

        <listitem>
          <para>uses the stock warning icon.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>presents a selectable message and a button labelled with 
          a verb or verb phrase
          describing the action to be confirmed, or labelled
          <guilabel>OK</guilabel> if such a phrase would be longer than three
          words. This button is placed in the bottom right corner of the
          alert.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>presents a <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button that will
          prevent execution of the user's command. This button is placed
          to the immediate left of the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> or equivalent
          button.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>may present an alternate action button or a convenience
          button. Place this button to the left of the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
          button.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>


      <formalpara>
        <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

        <para><!-- Minimize, ??? -->Roll-up/Unroll</para>
      </formalpara>

      <sect3 id="save-confirmation-alerts">
        <title>Save Confirmation Alerts</title>

        <para>Save confirmation alerts help ensure that users do not lose
        document changes when they close applications. This makes closing
        applications a less dangerous operation.</para>

        <figure id="save-alert-figure">
          <title>A save confirmation alert</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-save.png" width="500" depth="194" format="PNG"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-save.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>Save confirmation alert: "[ Close without Saving] [
              Cancel ] [[ Save ]] "</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <formalpara>
          <title>Primärer Text</title>

          <para>Save changes to document <replaceable>Document Name</replaceable>
          before closing?</para>
        </formalpara>

        <para>You may replace <quote>document</quote> with a more appropriate
        description, for example <quote>image</quote> or <quote>diagram</quote>
        if the document in question is not primarily text.</para>

        <formalpara>
          <title>Sekundärer Text</title>

          <para>If you close without saving, changes from the last
          <replaceable>Time Period</replaceable> will be discarded</para>
        </formalpara>

        <para role="explanation">The secondary text provides the user with
        some context about the number of changes that might be unsaved.</para>

        <formalpara>
          <title>Knöpfe</title>

          <para><guibutton>Close without Saving</guibutton>,
          <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, <guibutton>Save</guibutton></para>
        </formalpara>
      <para>
When a confirmation alert is needed,
present it immediately. If the user confirms closing without saving,
hide the alert and the document or application  window immediately, 
before doing any necessary internal clean-up.
If the user chooses to save before
closing, hide the alert immediately but show the document window until the document is
saved, in case an error occurs.  Then hide the document window immediately after it has been saved successfuly.
	</para>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="alerts-authentication">
      <title>Authentication Alerts</title>

      <para>Authentication alerts prompt the user for information necessary to
      gain access to protected resources, such as their username or password.
      Authentication alerts are a special kind of alert because they are both
      routine and largely unavoidable. Every attempt should be made to retain
      information entered into an authentication alert as long as is possible
      within security constraints.</para>

      <figure id="authentication-alert-figure">
        <title>An authentication alert</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-authentication.png" width="460" depth="279" format="PNG"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-alert-authentication.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase/>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <para><itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title><listitem><para>Use the
      stock authentication icon.</para></listitem><listitem><para>Show
      a labelled field for each required item of information. Suggested fields
      are <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel> (in
      that order) where appropriate.</para></listitem><listitem><para>If it is
      secure to retain the username longer than the password, pre-fill the
      username field and give focus to the password field when the alert is
      displayed.</para></listitem><listitem><para>Show a button labelled with
      a verb or verb phrase describing the authentication action, or
      <guilabel>OK</guilabel> if there is no appropriate phrase or such a
      phrase would be longer than three words. Place this button in the bottom
      right corner of the alert.</para></listitem><listitem><para>Do not
      enable the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> or equivalent button until all
      fields that require input have been attended to by the user. Remember
      that not all fields may require input however, for example an empty
      password may be acceptable in some applications.</para></listitem><listitem><para>Show
      a <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button that will prevent authentication
      and close the alert. Place this button to the immediate left of the
      <guibutton>OK</guibutton> or equivalent button.</para></listitem><listitem><para>Place
      any alternative action or convenience button to the left of the
      <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button.</para></listitem><listitem><para>When
      the user presses <keycap>Return</keycap> in the last field, activate the
      default button. When the user presses <keycap>Return</keycap> in any
      other field, move focus to the next field.</para></listitem></itemizedlist></para>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

        <para><!-- Minimize, ??? -->Roll-up/Unroll</para>
      </formalpara>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="windows-progress">
    <title>Fortschrittsfenster</title>

    <para>A progress window can be used to provide <link linkend="feedback">feedback</link>
    during an operation that takes more than a few seconds. See <xref linkend="controls-progress-bars"/> for more details about proper use of
    progress bars.</para>
		
    <para>A progress window should always appear as an independent window in a window list.
	If progress of a task makes a window temporarily unusable, do not present a modal dialog-like progress window in front of it.
	Instead, present progress somewhere in the original window, making all its other elements temporarily insensitive.
	This helps reduce visual clutter.</para>

    <figure id="example-progress-figure">
      <title>Beispiel für ein Fortschrittsfenster</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress.png" width="425" depth="159" format="PNG"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>An example of a progress window</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <formalpara>
      <title>Titelformat</title>

      <para>Progress windows should have a title representing the overall
      operation: for example <guilabel>Copying Files</guilabel>, <guilabel>Installing</guilabel>, or <guilabel>Calling</guilabel>.
      As with other window titles, do not end progress window titles with an ellipsis.</para>
    </formalpara>

    <formalpara>
      <title>Größenänderung</title>

      <para>Progress windows should be resizable if they contain non-static
      information the user may want to copy (for example, the source URL in a
      download progress window). Otherwise they should not be resizable.</para>
    </formalpara>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>It is often better to use the progress bar contained in many
        primary windows' statusbar rather than a progress window. See
        <xref linkend="progress-windows-vs-status-bar"/> for details on
        choosing between the two.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Progress windows should use primary and secondary text like an
        alert. See <xref linkend="alert-text"/></para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>The progress bar text should provide an idea of how much work
        has been completed. It is better to provide specific information
        rather than a unitless percentage. For example, "13 of 19 images
        rotated" or "12.1 of 30 MB downloaded" rather than
        "13% complete".</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If possible, an estimate of the time left until the operation is
        complete should also be included in the progress bar text. Indicate
        that the "time left" is an estimate using the word
        "about".</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Immediately beneath the progress bar, place italicized text
        indicating the current sub-operation being performed. This might be a
        step in a sequence, "Contacting control tower for permission to
        land", or it could be the current object being operated on in a
        bulk operation, "Rotating MonaLisa.png", "Rotating
        StarryNight.png".</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If the operation in progress is potentially hazardous
        (destructive, costly, etc) or heavily taxes a limited resource for
        more than ten seconds (network bandwidth, hard disk, CPU, etc),
        consider placing a <guibutton>Pause</guibutton> <link linkend="controls-toggle-buttons">toggle button</link> to the right of
        the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button. When paused, the italicized
        current sub-operation text should have " (Paused)" appended.
        This will allow users to perform important tasks requiring that
        resource, or give them time to think whether they want to procede with
        a dangerous operation they inadvertantly triggered.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <figure id="example-complex-progress-figure">
      <title>A progress window for a file copy operation</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress-copy-file.png" width="408" depth="227" format="PNG"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress-copy-file.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>A progress window for a copy operation</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <sect2 id="progress-window-checklists">
      <title>Checklisten-Fenster</title>

      <para>Occasionally a procedure is comprised of a series of user
      performable actions. In these cases, particularly when it is desirable
      that the user acquire some familiarity with the actions involved in a
      procedure, checklist windows may be used.</para>

      <example>
        <title>Firewall Setup Wizard</title>

        <para>A personal firewall setup wizard might install the firewall
        package, add entries for the firewall to /etc/xinetd.conf, restart the
        internet super-daemon, and configure the user's web browser to
        operate through the firewall. It may be desirable that the user is
        exposed to the series of actions involved in setting up the firewall to
        increase the chances that they will be sucessful in making
        modifications later, if they so desire.</para>
      </example>

      <figure id="example-checklist-start-figure">
        <title>An example checklist window (Ready to Start)</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress-checklist-start.png" width="422" depth="249" format="PNG"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress-checklist-start.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>A checklist window</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <figure id="example-checklist-in-progress-figure">
        <title>Beispiel für ein Checklisten-Fenster (in Verarbeitung)</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress-checklist.png" width="336" depth="220" format="PNG"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress-checklist.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>A checklist window</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>
      
      <figure id="example-checklist-done-figure">
        <title>Beispiel für ein Checklisten-Fenster (abgeschlossen)</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress-checklist-done.png" width="356" depth="223" format="PNG"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-progress-checklist-done.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>A checklist window</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <itemizedlist>
        <title>Richtlinien</title>

        <listitem>
          <para>If knowing the series of steps in an operation isn't that
          useful to the user, just use a regular progress window. Remember
          that you are probably more interested in the information than most
          users, many of whom will find the technical steps confusing rather
          than helpful.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Unlike regular progress windows, checklist windows should not
          close automatically when the operation is complete and should
          require explicit user input before they begin. This is because one
          of their purposes is to inform the user concerning an
          operation's contingent steps.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>The progress bar indicates progress in the overall operation,
          not each step. While this is more difficult to program, it is the
          information most useful to the user. Just estimate how long each of
          the steps takes relative to each other and assign each step a fixed
          ratio of the progress bar's progress accordingly.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use a checklist window for a
          series of internal programmatic steps, use a regular progress
          window. For example "Connect to mail server",
          "Authenticate with mail server", "Download
          messages", "Disconnect" would <emphasis>not</emphasis>
          be an appropriate series of steps for a checklist window, but would
          be appropriate sub-operation steps for a regular progress window.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="windows-dialog">
    <title>Dialoge</title>

    <para>A dialog provides an exchange of information, or dialog, between the
    user and the application. Use a dialog to obtain additional information
    from the user that is needed to carry out a particular command or task.</para>
	<para>A dialog should not appear in the panel window list.
	Any open dialogs should be raised above the application when
	the application window itself is selected from the window list.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Beispiel für einen Dialog</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/windows-dialog-tabbed.png" width="357" depth="322" format="PNG"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/windows-dialog-tabbed.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>An example of a tabbed dialog: the GNOME print dialog</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <formalpara>
      <title>Titelformat:</title>

      <para><replaceable>Name of command that opened the dialog</replaceable>
      (without any trailing ellipsis)</para>
    </formalpara>

    <formalpara>
      <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

      <para>Minimize, Roll-up/Unroll</para>
    </formalpara>

    <formalpara>
      <title>Knöpfe:</title>

      <para>Follow the guidelines for Alert buttons, see <xref linkend="alert-button-order"/>.</para>
    </formalpara>

    <para>Your dialog may specify a default button, that is activated when the
    user presses the <keycap>Return</keycap> key. See <xref linkend="default-buttons"/> for guidance on choosing an appropriate
    default button.</para>

    <sect2 id="dialog-buttons">
      <title>Zusätzliche Knöpfe</title>

      <para>You can include other buttons in a dialog's main button area
      in addition to the affirmative button and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>,
      but any more than one or two such buttons will make the dialog appear
      complicated and difficult to use. As with any other button, keep the
      labels as concise as possible to minimize this effect.</para>

      <itemizedlist>
        <title>Richtlinien</title>

        <listitem>
          <para>Place buttons that apply to the dialog as a whole in the main
          button area row at the bottom of the dialog, to the left of the
          <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Place buttons that apply to one or a few controls next to
          their associated controls. For instance, place a
          <guibutton>Browse...</guibutton> button at the trailing edge of the
          text field it fills in.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="dialog-layout">
      <title>Layout</title>

      <para>A clean, logical dialog layout helps the user to quickly
	understand what information is required from them.</para>

      <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem><para>
      Arrange controls in your dialog in the direction that people read.
      In western locales, this is generally left-to-right, top-to-bottom.
      Position the main controls with which the user will interact as close to
      the upper left corner as possible. Follow similar guidelines for
      arranging controls within groups in the dialog, and for specifying the
      order in which controls are traversed using the <keycap>Tab</keycap>
      key.</para></listitem>

      <listitem><para>
    	When opening a dialog, provide initial keyboard focus to the
      component that you expect users to operate first. This focus is
      especially important for users who must use a keyboard to navigate your
      application.</para></listitem>

      <listitem><para>Provide and show sensible default values for as many of the
      controls in your dialog as possible when it is opened, so the user does
      not have to generate the information from scratch. These defaults may
      come from system settings (for example, hostname or IP address), or from
      information that the user has previously entered in this or another
      application (for example, email address or network proxy).</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

      <para>Siehe <xref linkend="design"/> für weitere detaillierte Informationen über die Anordnung von Bedienelementen in Dialogen.</para>

      <para>Siehe <xref linkend="controls-notebooks"/> für Informationen über die Verwendung von Reitermappen als Bedienelemente in Dialogen.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="common-dialogs">
      <title>Häufige Dialoge</title>

      <para>The gtk and GNOME libraries provide standard dialogs for many
      common tasks, including opening and saving files, choosing fonts and
      colors, and printing. Always use these when the user is performing one
      of these tasks. You may modify the dialogs to reflect the needs of your
      particular application (for example, adding preview
      <guibutton>Play</guibutton> and <guibutton>Stop</guibutton> buttons to
      the Open File dialog in an audio application), but do not change or
      remove features so much as to make them unrecognizable.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="windows-assistant">
    <title>Assistenten</title>

    <!--<remark>FIXME: need to finish this section</remark>-->

    <para>An assistant is a secondary window that guides the user through an
    operation by breaking it into sequential steps. Assistants are useful for
    making complex operations less intimidating, as they restrict the
    information visible to the user at any given moment.</para>

    <para>Because assistants provide a relatively small number of controls on
    the screen at any given time, they have sufficient space for inline
    documentation. Therefore, do not include a <guibutton>Help</guibutton>
    button in an assistant window. If you cannot make an operation
    sufficiently clear in an assistant without resorting to a
    <guibutton>Help</guibutton> button, you need to simplify it further.</para>

    <para>Assistants do have major downsides. After using an assistant
    it is often hard to figure out where the individual settings aggregated
    into the assistant are stored. Often people will resort to re-running
    the assistant, re-entering many settings that they don't want to change.
    <remark>Why do they need to re-enter anything? The assistant should
	be populated with the exisiting settings whenever it is run.</remark>
    </para>

    <warning><para>Assistants are often used in situations where a better
    solution would be to simplify, or even better automate, the process.
    Before using an assistant to step people through a complex operation,
    consider if the operation can be fundamentally simplified so an
    assistant is unnecessary.</para></warning>
    

    <formalpara>
      <title>Fensterbefehle:</title>

      <para>Close, Minimize/Unminimize, Roll-up/Unroll</para>
    </formalpara>

    <sect2 id="assistant-first-page">
      <title>Einführende Seite</title>

      <para>The first page provides the user with the "big picture".
      Place the title of the assistant in the window's title bar and the
      assistant's title area, along with an optional picture. Beneath
      this, state the goal of the assistant, and, if it is not obvious, where
      the user can find the information the assistant will be asking for.</para>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Titelformat:</title>

        <para><replaceable>Assistant Title</replaceable></para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Knöpfe:</title>

        <para><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, <guibutton>Forward</guibutton></para>
      </formalpara>

      <figure>
        <title>Beispiel für die erste Seite eines Assistenten</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-assistant-first-page.png" format="PNG" width="502" depth="318"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-assistant-first-page.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Screenshot showing the first page of an assistant for
            creating a new email account</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="assistant-middle-page">
      <title>Content Pages</title>

      <para>Content pages contain the actual settings of the assistant.
      Summarize the type of setting present on each content page in its title
      area. For example, <guilabel>Mail Server</guilabel>.</para>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Titelformat:</title>

        <para><replaceable>Assistant Title</replaceable> - (<replaceable>Current
        Page </replaceable> of <replaceable>Total Pages</replaceable>)</para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Knöpfe:</title>

        <para><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, <guibutton>Back</guibutton>,
        <guibutton>Forward</guibutton></para>
      </formalpara>

<!--
      <figure>
        <title>Example of a middle page of an assistant</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="341" fileref="images/windows-assistant-middle-page.png"
            format="PNG" width="452" />
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/windows-assistant-middle-page.eps" format="EPS" />
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Screenshot showing the third page of an email account
            assistant, asking for mail server information</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>
-->
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="assistant-last-page">
      <title>Letzte Seite</title>

      <para>Die letzte Seite sollte die vom Benutzer vorgenommenen Änderungen zusammenfassen und darüber informieren, wie diese später durch den Benutzer geändert werden können.</para>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Titelformat:</title>

        <para>Finish <replaceable>Assistant Title</replaceable></para>
      </formalpara>

      <formalpara>
        <title>Knöpfe:</title>

        <para><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, <guibutton>Back</guibutton>,
        <guibutton>Finish</guibutton></para>
      </formalpara>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>
</chapter>


  <chapter id="menus">
    <title>Menüs</title>

    <para>Menus present the whole range of an application's commands to the user, and often a subset of its preferences.  When designing a new application, place common menu items in the same locations as they appear in other applications, as this makes it much easier for the user to learn.</para>
  
    <para>In most applications, only primary windows should have a menubar. <link linkend="windows-utility">Utility windows</link> and <link linkend="windows-dialog">dialogs</link> should be simple enough that their functions can be provided by controls such as buttons placed within the window.</para>

    <para>Occasionally, however, a utility window or dialog is so complex that there would be too many such controls. In this case, you may use a menubar provided that:</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem><para>the menus follow the same standard layout as described in <xref linkend="menus-standard"/></para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>the window does not include a dialog button area or any buttons that dismiss it, such as <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, <guibutton>Close</guibutton> or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>.  Place these commands on the <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu or equivalent instead.</para></listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
      <listitem><para>Label menu items with verbs for commands and adjectives for settings, according to the rules in <xref linkend="layout-capitalization"/>.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Make a menu item insensitive when its command is unavailable. For example, the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem></menuchoice> item, which issues the command to copy selected data to the clipboard, should not be active when there is no data selected.</para></listitem>

    <listitem><para>Provide an access key for every menu item.  You may use the same access key on different menus in your application, but avoid duplicating access keys on the same menu.  Note that unlike other controls, once a menu is displayed, its access keys may be used by just typing the letter; it is not necessary to press the <keysym>Alt</keysym> key at the same time.</para></listitem>

      <listitem><para>Design your menu structure to avoid more than one level of submenus.  Deep menu hierarchies are harder to memorize and physically difficult to navigate.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Do not have menus with less than three items on them (except the standard <guimenu>Help</guimenu> menu, which has only two items by default).  If you have a submenu with fewer than three items on it, move them into their parent menu.  If you have a top-level menu with fewer than three items on it, find another suitable menu to add them to, or find suitable items from other menus to add to it.</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>


	<sect1 id="menus-menubar">
	  <title>Die Menüleiste</title>

	<figure id="example-menu-bar">
	<title>Eine typische Menüleiste</title>
	<mediaobject>
	<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-application.png" width="454" depth="27" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-application.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	<textobject><phrase>A typical application menubar, showing File, Edit, View, Insert, Format, Go, Bookmarks, Tools, Windows and Help menus</phrase></textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>

	  <para>The menubar provides a number of drop-down menus.  Only the menu titles are displayed, until the user clicks on one of them.</para>

	<para>The menubar is normally visible at all times and is always accessible from the keyboard, so make all the commands available in your application available on the menubar.</para>

	<note><title>Vollbildmodus</title><para>When your application is running in full screen mode, hide the menubar by default.  However, make its menus and items accessible from the keyboard as usual. Pressing <keycap>ESC</keycap> should cause the application to leave full screen mode. A <guibutton>Leave Fullscreen</guibutton> button should be placed in the upper right hand corner of the window. The button should disappear after the mouse is unused for 5 seconds, and should appear again when the moused is moved. Alternately, in applications where the mouse is used frequently in full screen mode, all but a two pixel row of the button may be slid off the top of the screen. The button should slide back on the screen when the mouse moves near it.</para></note>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

		<listitem><para>Provide a menubar in each primary application window, containing at least a <guimenu>File</guimenu> and a <guimenu>Help</guimenu> menu.</para></listitem>

      		<listitem><para>Organize menu titles in the standard order— see <xref linkend="menus-standard"/></para></listitem>

		 <listitem><para>Do not disable menu titles. Allow the user to explore the menu, even though there might be no available items on it at that time.</para></listitem>

		  <listitem><para>Menu titles on a menubar are single words with their first letter capitalized.  Do not use spaces in menu titles, as this makes them easily-mistaken for two separate menu titles.  Do not use compound words (such as <guimenu>WindowOptions</guimenu>) or hyphens (such as <guimenu>Window-Options</guimenu>) to circumvent this guideline.</para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>Do not provide a mechanism for hiding the menubar, as this may be activated accidentally. Some users will not be able to figure out how to get the menu bar back in this case.</para></listitem>
	
	</itemizedlist>

	</sect1>

   <sect1 id="menus-types">
      <title>Menütypen</title>


	<sect2 id="menu-type-drop-down">
	  <title>Auswahlmenüs</title>
	<figure id="drop-down-menu">
	<title>Ein typisches Auswahlmenü</title>
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-dropdown.png" format="PNG" width="166" depth="300"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-dropdown.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>Screenshot of a typical drop-down menu</phrase></textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>

	  <para>A drop-down menu appears when the user clicks on its title in a menubar, or focuses the title and presses <keycap>Return</keycap>.</para>

    <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

	<listitem><para>Only place items on a menu that relate to that menu's title.</para></listitem>

      <listitem><para>Organize menu items in the standard order— see <xref linkend="menus-standard"/>.  For application-specific items where there is no standard order, arrange in numerical or other logical order (for example, <guimenuitem>50%</guimenuitem>, <guimenuitem>100%</guimenuitem>, <guimenuitem>200%</guimenuitem>), task order (for example, <guimenuitem>Compile</guimenuitem> followed by <guimenuitem>Debug</guimenuitem>) or by expected frequency of use.</para></listitem>

      <listitem><para>Limit top-level menus to a maximum of about 15 items. If you have any more items than this, consider moving a functionally-related subset of the items into a submenu or a new top-level menu.</para></listitem>

      <listitem><para>Do not add or remove individual menu items while the application is running, make them insensitive instead. Entire menus may be added or removed from the menubar at runtime, however, for example in component-based applications.</para></listitem>

      <listitem><para>Immediately update menu items that are edited directly or indirectly by the user, such as those on the <guisubmenu>Open Recent</guisubmenu> submenu and the <guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu> menu.</para></listitem>


    </itemizedlist>


	</sect2>

	<sect2 id="menu-type-submenu">
	  <title>Untermenüs</title>

	<figure id="submenu">
	<title>Ein Auswahlmenü mit einem Untermenü</title>
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-submenu.png" format="PNG" width="352" depth="264"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-submenu.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>Screenshot of a drop-down menu with a submenu</phrase></textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>

	  <para>A submenu appears when the user clicks its title, which is indicated by a small arrow symbol beside its label.  You can save space on long menus by grouping related commands onto a single submenu.</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

		<listitem><para>Use submenus sparingly, as they are physically difficult to navigate and make it harder to find and reach the items they contain.</para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>Do not create submenus with fewer than three items, unless the items are added dynamically (for example the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Tab</guimenuitem></menuchoice> submenu in <application>gnome-terminal</application>).</para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>Do not nest submenus within submenus.  More than two levels of hierarchy are difficult to memorize and navigate.</para></listitem>
		
	</itemizedlist> 

	</sect2>

	<sect2 id="menu-type-popup">
	  <title>Kontextmenüs</title>

	<figure id="popup-menu">
	<title>Ein Kontextmenü für einen Postfach-Ordner</title>
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-popup.png" format="PNG" width="251" depth="233"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-popup.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>Screenshot of a popup menu for a mail folder, listing the actions that can be performed on that folder</phrase></textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>

	<para>Popup menus provide shortcuts to those menu items that are applicable only to the currently selected object.  As such, they are sometimes known as "context menus" or "shortcut menus".  A popup menu is shown when the user right-clicks on an object, or selects the object and presses <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo>.</para>

	<para>Be aware that popup menus are used primarily by intermediate and advanced users.  Even some users who have used graphical desktops for many years do not know about popup menus until somebody shows them.</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
		<listitem><para>Provide a popup menu for every object, selectable part, and text input target such as entry fields.</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Provide an access key for each item.  However, to enhance their spatial efficiency and readability, do not show keyboard shortcuts in popup menus.</para></listitem>
		
		<listitem><para>Since the user may not be aware of their presence, do not provide functions that are only accessible from popup menus unless you are confident that your target users will know how to use popup menus.</para>
		</listitem>

		<listitem><para>Ordnen Sie die Einträge in einem Kontextmenü wie folgt:</para>
		<itemizedlist>
			<listitem><para>the double-click action for object, when it exists</para></listitem>
			<listitem><para>other commands and settings in expected frequency-of-use order</para></listitem>
			<listitem><para>transfer commands such as <command>Cut</command>, <command>Copy</command>, and <command>Paste</command></para></listitem>
			<listitem><para><guimenuitem>Input Methods</guimenuitem>, where applicable. <guimenuitem>Input Methods</guimenuitem> is provided by GTK+ for supporting alternatives to the keyboard for input (such as used for Japanese, Chinese, and some accessibility technologies).</para></listitem>
		</itemizedlist>
		</listitem>

	 	<listitem><para>Popup menus need to be as simple as possible to maximize their efficiency.  Do not place more than about ten items on a popup menu, and do avoid submenus.</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>
	</sect2>
	</sect1>

	<sect1 id="menus-design">
	<title>Entwerfen eines Menüs</title>

	<sect2 id="menu-grouping">
	  <title>Gruppieren von Menüeinträgen</title>

	<figure id="menu-separators">
	<title>In einem Menü gruppierte Einträge mit Trennern</title>
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-dropdown.png" format="PNG" width="166" depth="300"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-dropdown.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>Screenshot of a menu divided into five logical groups with menu separators</phrase></textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>

	  <para>Menu separators are the horizontal dividing lines that visually separate groups of related items on a drop-down menu, submenu, or popup menu.  For example, the separators in <xref linkend="menu-separators"/> divide the menu into five functionally-related groups.  Good use of separators helps to "chunk" the information on a menu and make it easier to scan and memorize.</para>
	  
	  <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

	    <listitem><para>The best size for a group is around 2-5 items.  Single-item groups are best placed at the top or bottom of a menu, otherwise try to group them with other single items of the same type on the same menu.</para></listitem>

	    <listitem><para>Order items within a group logically, numerically, in task order or by expected frequency of use, as appropriate.</para></listitem>

	    <listitem><para>Only place one type of menu item in each group— <link linkend="menu-item-type-command">command</link>, <link linkend="menu-item-type-mutable">mutable</link>, <link linkend="menu-item-type-check">check box</link> or <link linkend="menu-item-type-radio">radio button</link>.  For example, do not place commands (such as <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reload</guimenuitem></menuchoice>) and settings (such as. <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Toolbar</guimenuitem></menuchoice>) in the same group.</para></listitem>

	    </itemizedlist>	  
	</sect2>

	<sect2 id="menu-item-types">
	<title>Typen von Menüeinträgen</title>
	
	<sect3 id="menu-item-type-command">
	  <title>Befehlseinträge</title>

	<figure id="command-items-figure"><title>Eine Gruppe von Befehlseinträgen in einem Menü</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-command-group.png" format="PNG" width="253" depth="105"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-command-group.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Screenshot of a group on a menu containing only command items: Save, Save As, and Revert</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

	  <para>Command items are menu items that initiate a command or perform an action, such as <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem>, <guimenuitem>Print</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem>. They may act on the currently active document in a document based application, or on the application itself.</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

		<listitem><para>Provide a keyboard shortcut for standard or frequently used command items.  See <xref linkend="shortcuts"/> for more information on choosing shortcut keys.</para></listitem>
	  <!-- <para>Shortcuts consist of the <keysym>Control</keysym> key and an alphanumeric key, or of one of the keys <keysym>F1</keysym>-<keysym>F12</keysym>, <keysym>Insert</keysym>, <keysym>Delete</keysym>, <keysym>Home</keysym>, <keysym>End</keysym>, <keysym>Page Up</keysym> or <keysym>Page Down</keysym>. The <keysym>Shift</keysym> key may be used as an additional modifier for commands which are related to or the opposite of the command accessed without the <keysym>Shift</keysym> key.  See <xref linkend="shortcuts"/> for more information.</para> -->
	  
	<listitem><para>Do not remove command items from the menu when they are unavailable, make them insensitive instead.  This allows the user to infer what functionality the application provides even if it is not currently available, and keeping the menu structure static makes it easier to memorize.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Label the menu item with a trailing ellipsis ("...")  only if the command requires further input from the user before it can be performed. Do not add an ellipsis to items that only present a confirmation dialog (such as <guimenuitem>Delete</guimenuitem>), or that do not <emphasis>require</emphasis> further input (such as <guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem>, <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> or <guimenuitem>About</guimenuitem>).</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>
	</sect3>

	<sect3 id="menu-item-type-mutable">
	  <title>Mutable Command Items</title>
	  <para>A mutable command item changes its label when selected.  For example, <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reload</guimenuitem></menuchoice> in a browser may change to <guimenuitem>Stop</guimenuitem> to allow the user to interrupt the operation if it is taking a long time.</para>

	  <para>Note that mutable menu items can be problematic because the user never sees the menu item changing, so it is not obvious that a different function has become available. </para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
		<listitem><para>If your mutable menu items are <link linkend="menu-item-type-command">command items</link>, and you have sufficient space on your menu, consider providing two adjacent menu items for the commands instead.  Then make the items sensitive or insensitive as the situation demands.  This also makes it easier for the user to tell when different shortcuts are available for each of the commands, for example <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>R</keycap></keycombo> for <guimenuitem>Reload</guimenuitem>, and <keycap>Esc</keycap> for <guimenuitem>Stop</guimenuitem>.</para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>Do not use mutable menu items to toggle a two-state setting (for example, <guimenuitem>Show Toolbar</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Hide Toolbar</guimenuitem>).  Present such items as a single <link linkend="menu-item-type-check">check box item</link> instead.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	</sect3>
	<sect3 id="menu-item-type-check">
	  <title>Einträge mit Ankreuzfeldern</title>

	<figure id="checkbox-items-figure"><title>A group of check box items on a menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-checkbox-group.png" format="PNG" width="231" depth="112"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-checkbox-group.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Screenshot of group on a View menu containing four check box items: Main Toolbar, Side Pane, Location Bar and Status Bar</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

	  <para>A check box menu item shows the current state of a two-state setting, and allows the user to toggle it by selecting the menu item.</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
	  
	  	<listitem><para>Use a check box menu item only when it is obvious from the label what the set and unset states mean.  This usually means that the two states are logical or natural opposites, such as "on" and "off".  If this is not the case, use two <link linkend="menu-item-type-radio">radio button items</link> instead.</para></listitem>
		  <listitem><para>Never change the label of a check box menu item in response to the user selecting the item.</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>

	</sect3>
	<sect3 id="menu-item-type-radio">
	  <title>Einträge mit Radioknöpfen</title>

	<figure id="radiobutton-items-figure"><title>A group of radiobutton items on a menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-radiobutton-group.png" format="PNG" width="167" depth="117"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-radiobutton-group.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Screenshot of group on a menu containing three radiobutton items: view as icons, view as list and view details</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

	  <para>Radio button menu items show which of two or more mutually-exclusive settings are currently selected, and allow the user to choose a different setting by selecting its menu item.</para>

	<itemizedlist>

	  	<listitem><para>If you need to offer a choice of two mutually-exclusive settings to the user,  use a group of two radio button items instead of a single check box menu item if the settings are not clearly opposites.  For example, represent <guimenuitem>View as Icons</guimenuitem> and <guimenu>View as List</guimenu> as two radio button items.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Never change the label of a radio button menu item in response to the user selecting or deselecting the item.</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>

	</sect3>
	
      </sect2>

    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="menus-standard">
      <title>Standardmenüs</title>
      <para>Most applications have many functions in common, such as <guimenu>Cut</guimenu>, <guimenu>Copy</guimenu>, <guimenu>Paste</guimenu> and <guimenu>Quit</guimenu>.  To aid learning and memorability, these menu items, and the menus on which they appear, must appear with the same labels and in the same order in every application.  The same commands must also behave the same way in different applications, to avoid surprising the user.</para>

	<para>This section details the most common menus, menu items and their behaviors.  You will not need all of these menus or menu items in every application you write, but do preserve the order of the menu titles and of the menu items that you do use.</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
		<listitem><para>Platzieren Sie anwendungsspezifische Menüs hinter dem <guimenu>Format</guimenu>-Menü und vor dem <guimenu>Go</guimenu>-Menü</para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>Place application-specific menu items towards the middle of a standard menu, unless they logically fit with one of the standard groups already on the menu.</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>

      <figure id="generic-menu-bar">
	<title>A menubar showing all the standard menu titles in their correct order</title>
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-application.png" width="454" depth="27" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-application.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject>
	    <simplelist type="horiz" columns="9">
	      <member><guimenu><accel>F</accel>ile</guimenu></member>
	      <member><guimenu><accel>E</accel>dit</guimenu></member>
	      <member><guimenu><accel>V</accel>iew</guimenu></member>
	      <member><guimenu><accel>I</accel>nsert</guimenu></member>
	      <member><guimenu>For<accel>m</accel>at</guimenu></member>
	      <member><guimenu><accel>G</accel>o</guimenu></member>
	      <member><guimenu><accel>B</accel>ookmarks</guimenu></member>
	      <!--<member><guimenu><accel>T</accel>ools</guimenu></member>-->
	      <member><guimenu><accel>W</accel>indows</guimenu></member>
	      <member><guimenu><accel>H</accel>elp</guimenu></member>
	    </simplelist>
	  </textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>
      
      <sect2 id="the-file-menu">
	<title>File</title>
		<para>The <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu contains commands that operate on the current document. It is the left-most item in the menubar because of its importance and frequency of use, and because it is a relevant menu in many applications. Historically, because most applications already had this menu, and because the distinction between closing documents and closing windows became blurred over time, the <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu has also become the standard location for <guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem>.</para>

		  <para>The items on the <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu are generally ordered by locality, closest first.  That is, items to save or load from file, followed by printing, followed by sending to a remote user.  Try to maintain this ordering if you have to add new items to the menu.</para>

	        <para>If your application does not operate on documents, name this item for the type of object it displays.  For example, many games should have a <guimenu>Game</guimenu> instead of a <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu.  However, place the <guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem> menu item last on this menu nonetheless.</para>

	<figure id="generic-file-menu"><title>Ein allgemeines Dateimenü</title>
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-file.png" width="290" depth="454" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-file.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject>
<literallayout>
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
<guimenuitem><accel>N</accel>ew                  Ctrl+N</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>O</accel>pen...              Ctrl+O</guimenuitem>

---
<guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>ave                 Ctrl+S</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>Save <accel>A</accel>s...     Shift+Ctrl+S</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>Sa<accel>v</accel>e a Copy...               </guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>evert                     </guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem>Page Set<accel>u</accel>p                 </guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>Print Previe<accel>w</accel>  Shift+Ctrl+P</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>rint...             Ctrl+P</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>end To...              Ctrl+M</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem>Proper<accel>t</accel>ies                 </guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>1</accel>. Recent Document                 </guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>2</accel>. Recent Document                </guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>3</accel>. Recent Document                </guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>4</accel>. Recent Document                </guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>lose               Ctrl+W</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>Q</accel>uit                 Ctrl+Q</guimenuitem>
</literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

        
	<sect3>
	  <title>Operationen zum Erstellen und Öffnen</title>

	<table frame="all"> 
	  <title>Menüeinträge mit Operationen zum Erstellen und Öffnen</title> 

	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
	      	<entry><guimenuitem><accel>N</accel>ew</guimenuitem></entry>
	       <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>N</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Creates a new document. Open a new primary window, with the title <replaceable>Document name</replaceable>, containing a blank document.  How this window is displayed, e.g. as a tab or a separate window, is up to the window manager.
			<para>If your application can create a number of different types of document, you can make the <guimenuitem><accel>N</accel>ew</guimenuitem> item a submenu, containing a menu item for each type. Label these items <guimenuitem>New <replaceable>document type</replaceable></guimenuitem>, make the first entry in the submenu the most commonly used document type, and give it the <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>N</keycap></keycombo> shortcut.</para>
			<para>Note: A blank document will not necessarily be completely blank. For example, a document created from a template may already contain some data.<!-- FIXME: More on templates --></para>
		</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem><accel>O</accel>pen...</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>O</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Opens an existing document in a new window. Present the user with a standard Open File dialog <!-- Ref this elsewhere --> from which they can choose an existing file. If the chosen file is already open in the application, raise that window instead of opening a new one. <!-- If the current window contains a blank untitled document then replace it with the selected file. Otherwise open the file in a new window. -->
		<remark>If your application provides more than two ways to open an object, place all the Open ... items in a submenu, including Recent Files. This keeps the menu less cluttered and in some ways presents a better inteface as the list of recent files is presented in the same menu, and near, the regular open commands. Users hate having to go to the bottom of the file menu to open recent files; the cause of this is that, in the workplace, it is far more common to sort out other peoples already written and saved crap than it is to have to write your own. Most of the users of office application, surveyed in both card sorts and online presentations of speculative menus, do not want or do not even notice when the New... items are absent.</remark>
		  <remark>&gt;Problem to be solved. It may be desirable to open a second read-only view of the same document. How should this be provided? Non-OOUI are particularly nasty in this regard, as in many others. A "Clone Window" command seems quite nasty.</remark>
		  <remark>&gt;As I noted in the first review, the blank window should be kept available; in an OOUI this is a more obvious a way of working.</remark>
			</entry>
		</row>

	  <!-- I think this is totally broken, I'm moving back to having recent files on the main menu itself. -Seth
		<row>
			<entry>Recent Files</entry>
			<entry>none</entry>	
			<entry>Allows the user to open a recently used file. The application should maintain a history of recently opened documents and these should be accessible via a submenu. Selecting one of these files should open that file in the same way that <guimenuitem><accel>O</accel>pen</guimenuitem> does.
			<para>Provide at least ten of the most recent files in the menu; fewer only according to user preferences or absence of recent files.</para>
			</entry>
		</row>
	  -->
		</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>


	<sect3>
	  <title>Saved State Operations</title>

	<table>
	  <title>Saved State Operation menu items</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>ave</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Saves the document with its current filename. If the document already has a filename associated with it, save the document immediately without any further interaction from the user. If there are any additional options involved in saving a file (eg. DOS or UNIX-style line endings in a text file), prompt for these first time the document is saved, but subsequently use the same values each time until the user changes them.
		<para>If the document has no current filename or is read-only, selecting this item should be the same as selecting <guimenuitem>Save As</guimenuitem>.</para>
		</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem>Save <accel>A</accel>s...</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Umschalttaste</keycap><keycap>Strg</keycap><keycap>S</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Saves the document with a new filename. Present the user with the standard Save As dialog, and save the file with the chosen file name. <!-- FIXME: errors, additional information--></entry>

		</row>
		<row>
	      		<entry><guimenuitem>S<accel>a</accel>ve a Copy...</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Prompts the user to enter a filename, with which a copy of the document is then saved.  Do not alter either the view or the filename of the original document.  All subsequent changes are still made to the original document until the user specifies otherwise, for example by choosing the <guimenuitem>Save As</guimenuitem> command.
		<para> Like the <guimenuitem>Save As</guimenuitem> dialog, the <guimenuitem>Save a Copy</guimenuitem> dialog may present different ways to save the data. For example, an image may be saved in a native format or as a PNG.</para></entry>
	      </row>

	    <row>
	      	<entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>evert</guimenuitem></entry>
	      <entry>Keine</entry>
		<entry>Reverts the document to the last saved state. Present the user with a warning that all changes will be lost, and offer the option of cancelling before reloading the file.</entry>

		</row>

		<row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem>Save <accel>V</accel>ersion...</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>An alternative to the <guimenuitem>Save a Copy</guimenuitem> command.  Only use this item in conjunction with the <guimenuitem>Restore Version</guimenuitem>.  <remark>Unless we can describe exactly what this ought to do, should we remove it for now?</remark>command.</entry>
	      </row>

		<row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem>R<accel>e</accel>store Version...</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Prompts the user for a version of the current document to be restored. Present the user with with a warning that all changes will be lost, and offer the option of cancelling before restoring the version. Only use this item in conjunction with the <guimenuitem>Save Version</guimenuitem> command.</entry>
		</row>
	
		<row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem><accel>V</accel>ersions...</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>An alternative to the <guimenuitem>Save Version</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Restore Version</guimenuitem> commands. Use this when more utilities, such as a diff, are available.</entry>
	      </row>

		</tbody>
		</tgroup>

	</table>
	</sect3>

	<sect3>
	  <title>Export-Operationen</title>

	<table>
	  <title>Export Operation menu items</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
	      	<entry><guimenuitem>Page Set<accel>u</accel>p</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry>Keine</entry>
	      	<entry>Allows the user to control print-related settings. Present the user with a dialog allowing the user to set such options as portrait or landscape format, margins, and so on. <remark>We should have a standard dialog for this.</remark></entry>
	      </row>

		<row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem>Print Previe<accel>w</accel></guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Shows the user what the printed document will look like. Present a new window containing an accurate representation of the appearance of the document as it would be printed.  The libgnomeprintui library provides a standard Print Preview window that you should use if possible.</entry>
		</row>

	    <row>
	    	<entry><guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>rint...</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	        <entry>Prints the current document. Present the user with a dialog allowing them to set options like the page range to be printed, the printer to be used, and so on. The dialog must contain a button labelled <guibutton>Print</guibutton> that starts printing and closes the dialog.  The <filename>libgnomeprintui</filename> library provides a standard Print dialog that you should use if possible.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry><guimenuitem>S<accel>e</accel>nd To...</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>M</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	      <entry>Provides the user a means to attach or send the current document as an email or email attachment<!-- (launch $MAILER -a $ATTACHMENT)-->, depending on its format.
		<para>You may provide more than one <guimenuitem>Send</guimenuitem> item depending on which options are available. If there are more than two such items, move them into a submenu. For example, if only <guimenuitem>Send by Email</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Send by Fax</guimenuitem> are available, leave them on the top-level menu  If there is a third option, such as <guimenuitem>Send by FTP</guimenuitem>, place all the options in a <guimenuitem>Send</guimenuitem> submenu.</para>
	      </entry>
	    </row>
	</tbody>
	</tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>
	
	<sect3>
	  <title>Dateieigenschaften</title>
	<table>
	  <title>Menüeinträge für Eigenschaften</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Proper<accel>t</accel>ies</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Return</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	        <entry>Opens the document's <guilabel>Properties</guilabel> window.  This may contain editable information, such as the document author's name, or read-only information, such as the number of words in the document, or a combination of both. The <keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Return</keycap></keycombo> shortcut should not be provided where <keycap>Return</keycap> is most frequently used to insert a new line.</entry>
	    </row>
	  </tbody>
	</tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>
	

	<sect3>
	  <title>Closing Operations</title>
	<table>
	  <title>Closing Operation menu items</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>lose</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	        <entry>Closes the current document. If it has unsaved changes, present the user with a <link linkend="alerts-confirmation">confirmation alert</link> giving the option to save changes, discard them, or cancel the action without closing or saving the document.
		<para>If the window you are closing is the last open document in the application, the correct action depends on your application type:</para>
		<itemizedlist>
			<listitem><para>Single document interface: close the application</para></listitem>
			<listitem><para>Controlled single document interface: leave only the control window open</para></listitem>
			<listitem><para>Multiple document interface: close the current document and create a new blank document</para></listitem>
		</itemizedlist>		
		  <remark>As mentioned on the usability list, Control+W is an Emacs shortcut for Cut. This has already proven deleterious for some users so we should consider dropping the shortcut.  But see also <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=76761">http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=76761</ulink></remark>
	      </entry>
	    </row>
	    
	    <row>
	      <entry><guimenuitem><accel>Q</accel>uit</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Q</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	      <entry><para>Closes the application. If there are unsaved changes in any open documents, present the user with a <link linkend="alerts-confirmation">confirmation alert</link> for each affected document, giving the option to save the changes, discard them, or cancel. If there are no unsaved changes, close the application immediately without presenting any further messages or dialogs.</para>
		<!-- This para in response to bug #73618--><para>In particular, non-document based applications, for example a game or a calculator, should save their state and exit immediately.  This state should be restored the next time the application is started.</para>
	      </entry>
	    </row>
	  </tbody>
	</tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>
	
      </sect2>
      <sect2 id="menu-standard-edit">
	<title>Bearbeiten</title>

	<para>The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu contains items relating to editing both the document (clipboard handling, search and replace, and inserting special objects) and the user's preferences.  Preferences are edited here rather than on a <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> menu, because:</para>

	<itemizedlist>
		<listitem><para>most applications' preferences windows are accessed via a single menu item, and single-item menus offer poor usability</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>most applications already contain a suitable <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	<figure id="generic-edit-menu">
	  <title>A generic Edit menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-edit.png" width="226" depth="417" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-edit.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
<literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>E</accel>dit</guimenu>
<guimenuitem><accel>U</accel>ndo                 Ctrl+Z</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>edo           Shift+Ctrl+Z</guimenuitem>
-
<guimenuitem>Cu<accel>t</accel>                  Ctrl+X</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>opy                 Ctrl+C</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>aste                Ctrl+V</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>Paste <accel>S</accel>pecial...                Shift+Ctrl+V</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>elete               Del</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>elect All           Ctrl+A</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>Du<accel>p</accel>licate           Ctrl+U</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>Dese<accel>l</accel>ect All   Shift+Ctrl+A</guimenuitem>
-
<guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>ind...              Ctrl+F</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>Find Ne<accel>x</accel>t            Ctrl+G</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>Find Pre<accel>v</accel>ious  Shift+Ctrl+G</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>R<accel>e</accel>place...              Ctrl+R</guimenuitem>
-
<guimenuitem><accel>I</accel>nsert...              </guimenuitem>
-
<guimenuitem>Pr<accel>e</accel>ferences</guimenuitem>
</literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>


	<sect3>
	  <title>Modification History</title>
	  <para>Document-based applications should maintain a history of modifications to a document and the state of the document between each action. The <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Redo</guimenuitem> commands move backwards and forwards through this history.</para>

	<table frame="all"> 
	  <title>Modification History menu items </title> 

	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
	  	<entry><guimenuitem><accel>U</accel>ndo <replaceable>action</replaceable></guimenuitem></entry>
	       <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Undoes the effect of the previous action in the undo history list. Revert the document to its state before the previous action was performed. If your application supports undo, and the user undoes all changes since it was last saved, treat the document as unmodified.
		<para>Note: provide a separate <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Redo</guimenuitem> menu item even if your application only supports one level of undo.</para></entry>
	      </row>

		<row>
	      	  <entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>edo <replaceable>action</replaceable></guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	      		<entry>Performs the next action in the undo history list, after the user has moved backwards through the list with the <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> command.  Move the user one step forwards again, restoring the document to the state it was in after that action was originally performed.
			<para>Note: provide a separate <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Redo</guimenuitem> menu item even if your application only supports one level of undo.</para></entry>
	      </row>
		</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>

	<sect3>
	  <title>Bearbeiten ausgewählter Daten</title>

	<table frame="all"> 
	  <title>Menüeinträge zum Bearbeiten ausgewählter Daten</title> 

	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Cu<accel>t</accel></guimenuitem></entry>
	      	<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>X</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Removes the selected content and places it onto the clipboard. Visually, remove the content from the document in the same manner as <guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>elete</guimenuitem>.</entry>
	      </row>

		<row>
	    		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>opy</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>C</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Copies the selected content onto the clipboard.</entry>
	      </row>
	    
	    <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>aste</guimenuitem></entry>
	      <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>V</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the document.  If there is no current selection, use the caret as the insertion point.  If there is a current selection, replace it with the clipboard contents.</entry>
	    </row>
	    
	    <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Paste <accel>S</accel>pecial...</guimenuitem></entry>
	      <entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>V</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Inserts a non-default representation of the clipboard contents into the document.  Open a dialog presenting a list of the available formats from which the user can select.  For example, if the clipboard contains a PNG file copied from a file manager, the image may be embedded in the document, or a link to the file inserted so that changes to the image on disk are always reflected in the document.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Du<accel>p</accel>licate</guimenuitem></entry>
	      <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>U</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Creates a duplicate copy of the selected object.  Do not prompt for a name for the duplicate object, but give it a sensible default (for example, <filename>Copy of ShoppingList.abw</filename>) and allow the user to change it later.  Place the duplicate copy as near the original as possible without overlapping it, even if this means breaking the current sort order within the container, so the user sees it immediately.</entry>
	    </row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>elete</guimenuitem></entry>
		      <entry><keycap>Delete</keycap></entry>
			<entry>Removes the selected content without placing it on the clipboard.
		      <remark>Should Delete be provided on a menu? The command is as obvious as using the arrow keys to move about.</remark></entry>
	      </row>

		<row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem>Select <accel>A</accel>ll</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>A</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Selects all content in the current document.</entry>
	    	</row>
	    
		<row>
		  <entry><guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>eselect All</guimenuitem></entry>
	      	  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>A</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Deselects all content in the current document. Only provide this item in situations when no other method of undoing selection is possible or apparent to the user.  For example, in complex graphics applications where selection and deselection is not usually possible simply by using the cursor keys.
		<para>Note: Do not provide <guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem> in text entry fields, as <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>hex digit</keysym></keycombo> is used to enter unicode characters so its shortcut will not work.</para></entry>
	      </row>

	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	 </table>
	</sect3>

	<sect3>
	  <title>Suchen und Ersetzen</title>

	<table frame="all"> 
	  <title>Menüeinträge zum Suchen und Ersetzen</title> 

	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
	      <entry>Find...</entry>
	      <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Opens a window or dialog allowing the user to search for specific content in the current document.  Highlight each match in-place.
		<para>If the command allows the user to search for content in places other than the current document, for example other open documents, other documents on disk, or a remote network location, label this item <guimenuitem>Search</guimenuitem> instead of <guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem>.</para></entry>
	      </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry><guimenuitem>Find Ne<accel>x</accel>t</guimenuitem></entry>
	      <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>G</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	      <entry>Selects the next instance of the last Find term in the current document.  <remark>What to do if there is no next instance?  Disable the menu item, which could be confusing, or pop up an annoying alert saying 'no matches found'?</remark></entry>
	      </row>

		<row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem>Find Pre<accel>v</accel>ious</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>G</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Selects the previous instance of the last Find term in the current document.</entry>
	      </row>

		<row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>eplace...</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>H</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Opens a window or dialog allowing the user to search for specific content in the current document, and replace each occurrence with new content. 	    
		 	<remark>Replace is not always descriptive of what the user may do with the utility window. Formatting a section is also a possibility. Ideally, these would all be merged into a simple utility window</remark>
		</entry>
	      </row>
		</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>


	<sect3>
	  <title>Einfügen spezieller Objekte</title>
	  <para>Where applicable, provide items on the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu that insert special objects such as images, links, GUI controls or the current date and time. </para>

	<para>If you have up to three types of object that can be inserted, add them as individual items to this menu, for example <guimenuitem>Insert Image</guimenuitem>, or <guimenuitem>Insert External Link</guimenuitem>.  If you have between three and six types, place them on an <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Insert</guimenuitem></menuchoice> submenu.  If you have more than six, add a separate <link linkend="menu-standard-insert"><guimenu>Insert</guimenu> menu</link> to the menubar.</para>

	</sect3>


	<sect3>
	  <title>Benutzereinstellungen</title>

	<table>
	<title>Menüeinträge für Benutzereinstellungen</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
		      <entry><guimenuitem>Pr<accel>e</accel>ferences</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Opens a <link linkend="preference-windows">preferences window</link> allowing the user to change preferences for the whole application.  Changes will apply to all running and subsequent instances of the application.</entry>
		</row>
		</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>

      </sect2>
      <sect2 id="menu-standard-view">
	<title>View</title>
	<para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu contains only items that affect the user's view of the current document.  Do not place any items on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu that affect the content of the current document.  (Exception: <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reload</guimenuitem></menuchoice> may change the current contents if, for example, the document is a webpage that has been recently updated on the server).</para>

	<figure id="generic-view-menu">
	  <title>A generic View menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-view.png" width="166" depth="300" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-view.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
	      <literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>V</accel>iew</guimenu>
<guimenuitem><accel>T</accel>oolbar</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>tatusbar</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>I</accel>cons</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>L</accel>ist</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>etails</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>ort By...</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>ilter...</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>Z</accel>oom in       Ctrl++</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>Zoom <accel>O</accel>ut  Ctrl+-</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>N</accel>ormal Size   Ctrl+=</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>B</accel>est Fit    </guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>efresh     Ctrl+R</guimenuitem>

	      </literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>


	<sect3>
	<title>Werkzeugleiste und Statusleiste</title>
	<table>
	<title>Toolbar and Statusbar menu items</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
	 	      <entry><guimenuitem><accel>T</accel>oolbar</guimenuitem></entry>
	      		<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Shows or hides the application's toolbar.  This is a <link linkend="menu-item-type-check">check box menu item</link>. Include this item in every application that has a single toolbar.  See <xref linkend="toolbars-controlling-display"/> for information on how to deal with multiple toolbars.</entry>
		</row>

		<!-- Suggest removing this for now, see bug #????
		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>tatusbar</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>None</entry>
			<entry>Shows or hides the application's statusbar.  This is a <link linkend="menu-item-type-check">check box menu item</link>.  Include this item in every application that has a statusbar.</entry>
		</row>
		-->

		</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>

	<sect3>
	<title>Content Presentation</title>
	<table>
	<title>Content Presentation menu items</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>I</accel>cons</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Shows the contents of the selected container as rows and columns of large icons, each with its name underneath.  This is a <link linkend="menu-item-type-radio">radio button menu item</link>.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>L</accel>ist</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Shows the contents of the selected container as a list of small icons, possibly in multiple columns, each with its name on its right-hand side.  This is a <link linkend="menu-item-type-radio">radio button menu item</link>.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>etails</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Shows the contents of the selected container as single column of small icons, each with its name on its right-hand side.  Additional columns give extra information about the object each icon represents, for example the size and modification date of files in a file manager.  This is a <link linkend="menu-item-type-radio">radio button menu item</link>.
			<para>If your application has no need for both <guimenu>List</guimenu> and <guimenu>Details</guimenu> modes, use the <guimenu>List</guimenu> item for whichever of the two modes you support.</para></entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem>S<accel>o</accel>rt By...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Sorts the contents of a container by user-specified criteria.  Open a dialog allowing the user to choose from pre-defined sort keys (for example, Name, Size, or Modification Date in a file manager), or to specify their own if applicable.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>ilter...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Hides objects that are not of interest to the user.  Open a dialog allowing the user to choose from a list of types of object they want to display, or to enter their own criteria (for example, a regular expression matched against a particular property of the objects).</entry>
		</row>


		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>Z</accel>oom In</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>+</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Zooms into the document.  Make the center of the new view the same as the center of the previous view. <remark>Should probably encourage apps to support Ctrl+= as well.</remark></entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem>Zoom <accel>O</accel>ut</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>-</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Zooms out of the document.  Make the center of the new view the same as the center of the previous view.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>N</accel>ormal Size</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>0</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Resets the zoom level back to the default value, normally 100%.  Make the center of the new view the same as the center of the previous view.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>B</accel>est Fit</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Makes the document fill the window.  Show the document, or the current page of the document, at as high a zoom level as will fit in the window whilst allowing the whole document or page to be visible without scrolling.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>efresh</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>R</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Redraws the current view of the document from local storage.  For example, in a web browser application, this would redraw the page from the browser page cache.</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>eload</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>R</keycap></keycombo></entry>

			<entry>Redraws the current view of the document, checking the data source for changes first.  For example, checks the web server for updates to the page before redrawing it.
			<para>If your application requires both <guimenuitem>Reload</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem>, use <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>R</keycap></keycombo> as the shortcut for <guimenuitem>Reload</guimenuitem>.</para></entry>
		</row>

		</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>
      </sect2>

      <sect2 id="menu-standard-insert">
	<title>Insert</title>
	<para>The <guimenuitem>Insert</guimenuitem> menu lists the type of special objects that can be inserted into the document at the current caret position, for example images, links, page breaks or GUI objects.  Only provide this menu if you have more than about six types of object that can be inserted, otherwise place individual items for each type on the <link linkend="menu-standard-edit"><guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu</link>.</para>

	<figure id="generic-insert-menu">
	  <title>A generic Insert menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-insert.png" width="118" depth="245" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-insert.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
	      <literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>P</accel>age Break</guimenu>
<guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>ate and Time...</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>ymbol...</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>heet...</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>ows...</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>olumns...</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>I</accel>mage...</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>G</accel>raph...</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>rom File...</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>E<accel>x</accel>ternal Link...</guimenuitem>

	      </literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>
	
	<para>The types of object will vary between applications, but the table below shows some common types that may be applicable.</para>

	<table>
	<title>Einträge für das Insert-Menü</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>age Break</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Inserts a page break at the caret position.  Show the page break visually, for example as a dotted line across the page, unless the user has specifically requested not to see them.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>ate and Time...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Inserts the current date and/or time at the caret position.  Open a dialog giving a choice of date and time formats.  If applicable, also offer the choice to insert either as plain text, so the specified date and time will always appear in the document, or as a special field that will updated every time the document is opened, refreshed or printed.</entry>
			</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem>Sy<accel>m</accel>bol...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Inserts a special symbol, such as a mathematical symbol or foreign character, at the caret position.  Open a dialog showing all the available symbols as a table, from which the user can choose.  The user must be able to add multiple symbols to the document at one time without having to close and re-open the dialog.</entry>
			</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>heet...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Adds a new sheet to the current workbook.  Do not prompt for a name, but choose a sensible default (such as <guilabel>Sheet-2</guilabel>) and allow the user to change it later.</entry>
			</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>ows...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Adds new rows to a table in which one or more rows or cells are currently selected.  Open a dialog asking whether to insert rows above or below the current selection, and for any other required information.  Copy the row format from the last or first row of the current selection respectively, unless the user specifies otherwise.</entry>
			</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>olumns...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Adds new columns to a table in which one or more columns or cells are currently selected.  Open a dialog asking whether to insert columns to the left or right of the current selection, and for any other required information.  Copy the column format from the right- or left-most column of the current selection respectively, unless the user specifies otherwise.</entry>
			</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>I</accel>mage...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Inserts an image into the document from a file.  Present a standard Open File dialog filtered on acceptable file types, from which the user can choose an image file to insert.</entry>
			</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>G</accel>raph...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Inserts a graph into the document.  Open a dialog or assistant that allows the user to build (or open from a file) a graph of their choice, using the current selection as an indication of which values, axis labels and data labels to use.</entry>
			</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>rom FIle...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Inserts an object from any acceptable file type, for example plain text, formatted text, or an image.  Present a standard Open File dialog filtered on acceptable file types, from which the user can choose a file to insert.</entry>
			</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem>E<accel>x</accel>ternal Link...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Inserts a link to an object stored in a different file, or on a remote system.  The object is not embedded in or saved with the document, only a link to it.  Open a dialog in which the user can type or choose the name of the object, for example a filename or a webpage URL.  Show the link in the document in as informative way as possible.  For example, show a link to an image as a thumbnail of that image, unless the user specifies otherwise.</entry>
			</row>

		</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>


      </sect2>


      <sect2 id="menu-standard-format">
	<title>Format</title>

		<para>A <guimenu>Format</guimenu> menu contains commands to change the visual appearance of the document.  For example, changing the font, color, or line spacing of a text selection.</para>
		<para>The difference between these commands and those on the <link linkend="menu-standard-view"><guimenuitem>View</guimenuitem> menu</link> is that changes made with Format commands are persistent and saved as part of the document, for example as HTML or RTF tags.</para>

	<figure id="generic-format-menu">
	  <title>A generic Format menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-format.png" width="163" depth="265" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-format.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
	      <literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>S</accel>tyle...</guimenu>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>ont...</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>aragraph...</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>B</accel>old	Ctrl+B</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>I</accel>talic	Ctrl+I</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>U</accel>nderline	Ctrl+U</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>ells...</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>L</accel>ist...</guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem>L<accel>ayer</accel>...</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem>P<accel>a</accel>ge...</guimenuitem>

	      </literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>


	<para>Items found on the <guimenu>Format</guimenu> will be very application-specific, but some common items are listed in the table below.</para>

	<table>
	<title>Format menu items</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>tyle...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Sets the style attributes of the selected text or objects either individually or to a named, predefined style.  Open a dialog allowing the user to set attributes such as bold, italic, size and spacing individually, and to create their own named styles where applicable.</entry>

		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>ont...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Sets the font properties of the selected text or objects.  Open a dialog allowing the user to choose font, size, style, color, or whatever other attributes are applicable.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>aragraph...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Sets the properties of the selected paragraph.  Open a dialog allowing the user to choose style, line spacing, tabulation, or whatever other attributes are applicable.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>B</accel>old</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>B</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Toggles the boldness of the current text selection on or off.  If some of the selection is currently bold and some is not, this command should bolden the selected text.</entry>

		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>I</accel>talic</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>I</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Toggles the italicisation of the current text selection on or off.  If some of the selection is currently italicised and some is not, this command should italicise the selected text.</entry>

		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>U</accel>nderline</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>U</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Toggles underlining of the current text selection.  If some of the selection is currently underlined and some is not, this command should underline the selected text.</entry>

		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>ells...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Sets the properties of the selected table cells.  Open a dialog allowing the user to choose alignment, borders, shading, text style, number format, or whatever other attributes are applicable.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>L</accel>ist...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Sets the properties of the selected list, or turns the selected paragraphs into a list if they are not already formatted as such.  Open a dialog allowing the user to choose number or bullet style, spacing, tabulation, or whatever other attributes are applicable.</entry>
		</row>


		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem>Laye<accel>r</accel>...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Sets the properties of all or selected layers of a multi-layered document.  Open a dialog allowing the user to choose name, size, visibility, opacity, z-ordering, or whatever other attributes are applicable.</entry>
		</row>


		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem>P<accel>a</accel>ge...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Sets the properties of all or selected pages of the document.  Open a dialog allowing the user to choose paper size, orientation, columns, margins, or whatever other attributes are applicable.</entry>
		</row>

		</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>

      </sect2>


      <sect2 id="menu-standard-bookmarks">
	<title>Lesezeichen</title>

	<para>Provide a <guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu> menu in any application that allows the user to browse files and folders, help documents, web pages or any other large information space.</para>
	<note><title>Symbole</title><para>Show icons for bookmark entries on the Bookmarks menu that indicate the type of the bookmark, even if the user has globally turned off icons for other menu items on the desktop.</para></note>

	<figure id="generic-bookmarks-menu">
	  <title>A generic Bookmarks menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-bookmarks.png" width="190" depth="49" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-bookmarks.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
	      <literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>B</accel>ookmarks</guimenu>
<guimenuitem><accel>A</accel>dd Bookmark   </guimenuitem><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>D</keycap></keycombo>
<guimenuitem><accel>E</accel>dit Bookmarks </guimenuitem><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>B</keycap></keycombo>
	      </literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

	<table>
	<title>Bookmark menu items</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>A</accel>dd Bookmark</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>D</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Adds a bookmark for the current document to the default bookmark list.  Do not pop up a dialog asking for a title or location for the bookmark, instead choose sensible defaults (such as the document's title or filename as the bookmark name) and allow the user to change them later using the <guimenuitem>Edit Bookmarks</guimenuitem> feature.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>E</accel>dit Bookmarks</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>B</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Allows the user to edit the application's bookmark list.  Open a window in which the user can arrange bookmarks into a hierarchy, move, copy, and delete bookmarks, and change their properties.</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
			<entry><emphasis>Bookmark List</emphasis></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>The user's current list of bookmarks for the application.</entry>
		</row>
		</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>

      </sect2>
      <sect2 id="menu-standard-go">

	<title>Go</title>

	<para>A <guimenu>Go</guimenu> menu provides commands for quickly navigating around a document or collection of documents, or an information space such as a directory structure or the web.</para>

	<para>The contents of the menu will vary depending on the type of application.  Different standard menus are presented here for browser-based and document-based applications , but your application may require a combination of both.</para>

	<figure id="generic-browser-go-menu">
	  <title>A generic Go menu for a browser application</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-go-browser.png" width="178" depth="127" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-go-browser.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
<literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>G</accel>o</guimenu>
<guimenuitem><accel>B</accel>ack       Alt+Left</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>orward	Alt+Right    </guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>U</accel>p		Alt+Up         </guimenuitem>
---
<guimenuitem><accel>H</accel>ome	Alt+Home       </guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>L</accel>ocation...  Ctrl+L</guimenuitem>
</literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>


	<table>
	<title>Go menu items for a browser application</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>B</accel>ack</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Left</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Navigates to the previous document in the browser's history list.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>orward</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Right</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Navigates to the next document in the browser's history list.</entry>		
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>U</accel>p</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Up</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Navigates to the current document's (or folder's) parent document (or folder).  For a document browser, such as an online help viewer, this usually means navigating to the enclosing sub-section, section, chapter or contents page.</entry>		
		</row>
	
		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>H</accel>ome</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Home</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Navigates to a starting page defined by the user or the application.</entry>
		</row>


		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>L</accel>ocation...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>L</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Navigates to a user-specified URI.  Open a dialog into which the user can type a suitable URI, or select one from a list where applicable (for example, a file selection dialog for applications that can handle file:// URIs).</entry>		
		</row>

			</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>

	<figure id="generic-document-go-menu">
	  <title>A generic Go menu for document-based applications</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-go-document.png" width="206" depth="127" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-go-document.eps" width="210" depth="121" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
<literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>G</accel>o</guimenu>
<guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>revious Page 	PgUp </guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>N</accel>ext Page      		PgDn</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>G</accel>o to Page...</guimenuitem>
-
<guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>irst Page    		Ctrl+Home </guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>L</accel>ast Page		Ctrl+End</guimenuitem>
</literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

	<table>
	<title>Go menu items for a document-based application</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>revious Page</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycap>PageUp</keycap></entry>
			<entry>Navigiert zur vorherigen Seite im Dokument.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>N</accel>ext Page</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycap>PageDown</keycap></entry>
			<entry>Navigiert zur nächsten Seite im Dokument.</entry>		
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>G</accel>o to Page...</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Navigates to a user-specified page number.  Open a dialog into which the user can type a page number.
			<para>Text-based applications may also include a <guimenuitem>Go  to Line...</guimenuitem> menu item, which allows the user to jump to a specified line number.</para></entry>		
		</row>
	
		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>irst Page</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Home</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Navigates to the first page in the document.</entry>
		</row>


		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>L</accel>ast Page</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>End</keycap></keycombo></entry>
			<entry>Navigates to the last page in the document.</entry>		
		</row>

			</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>

      </sect2>

<!-- CFB Commenting out until we have anything to go on it :/
      <sect2 id="menu-standard-tools">
	<title>Tools</title>
	<figure id="generic-tools-menu">
	  <title>A generic Tools menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/generic-tools-menu.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/generic-tools-menu.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
	      <literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>T</accel>ools</guimenu>
	      </literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>
	<para>FIXME</para>
      </sect2>

-->

      <sect2 id="application-windows-menu">
	<title>Fenster</title>
		<para>The Windows menu contains commands that apply to all of the application's open windows.  Only use a Windows menu in <link linkend="mdi">multiple document interface</link> (MDI) applications.</para>

      <note><title>MDI Applications</title><para>The use of MDI is discouraged, as they have a number of inherent usability problems.</para></note>
	
		<para>You may also label this menu <guimenu><accel>D</accel>ocuments</guimenu>, <guimenu><accel>B</accel>uffers</guimenu>, or similar according to the type of document handled by your application.</para>
	
	<para>The last items on this menu are a numbered list of the application's primary windows, for example <guimenuitem><accel>1</accel>shoppinglist.abw</guimenuitem>.  Selecting one of these items raises the corresponding window.</para>

	<figure id="generic-windows-menu">
	  <title>A generic Windows menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-windows.png" width="151" depth="172" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-windows.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
	      <literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>W</accel>indows</guimenu>
<guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>ave All</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>lose All</guimenuitem>
	      </literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>
	

<table>
	<title>Windows menu items</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">
		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>ave All</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Saves all open documents.  If any documents have no current filename, prompt for a filename for each one in turn using the standard Save dialog.</entry>		
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>lose All</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Closes all open documents.  If there are any unsaved changes in any documents, post a <link linkend="alerts-confirmation">confirmation alert</link> for each one in turn.</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>1</accel>. <replaceable>first open window title</replaceable></guimenuitem>
			<para><guimenuitem><accel>2</accel>. <replaceable>second open window title</replaceable></guimenuitem></para>
			<para>etc.</para></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Raises the corresponding window to the top of the window stack.</entry>
		</row>
			</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>

	
      </sect2>
      <sect2 id="menu-standard-help">
	<title>Hilfe</title>
	<para>The <guimenu>Help</guimenu> menu provides access to all online documentation for your application.  This includes both the user guide, and the <guimenuitem>About</guimenuitem> window which includes a brief description of your application's functionality.</para>

	<figure id="generic-help-menu">
	  <title>A generic Help menu</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-help.png" width="118" depth="45" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/menus-help.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
	      <literallayout class="monospaced">
<guimenu><accel>H</accel>elp</guimenu>

<guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>ontents      F1</guimenuitem>
<guimenuitem><accel>A</accel>bout</guimenuitem>
	      </literallayout>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

	<table>
	<title>Help menu items</title>
	 <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead> 
	      <row> 
		<entry>Bezeichnung</entry> 
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	    <tbody valign="top">

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>ontents</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycap>F1</keycap></entry>
			<entry>Opens the default help browser on the contents page for the application.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>A</accel>bout</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry>Keine</entry>
			<entry>Opens the About dialog for the application.  Use the standard dialog provided by the GNOME libraries, which contains the name and version number of the application, a short description of the application's functionality, author contact details, copyright message and a pointer to the licence under which the application is made available.</entry>		
		</row>

			</tbody>
		</tgroup>
	</table>

      </sect2>
    </sect1>
  </chapter>



<chapter id="toolbars">
  <title>Werkzeugleisten</title>
  <para>A toolbar is a strip of controls that allows convenient access to commonly-used functions. Most toolbars only contain graphical buttons, but in more complex applications, other types of controls such as drop-down lists, can also be useful.</para>

  <!-- This bit more relevant to the utility windows section
  <note><para>Although the latter is just a side-effect of the fact that palettes can't be created with the standard toolbar widgets— it would be rather nice if they could, especially as they would then automatically feature in the toolbar keyboard navigation order.</para></note>
  -->
    
  <figure id="mail-toolbar-example">
    <title>Beispiel für eine einfache Werkzeugleiste in einer E-Mail-Anwendung</title>
    <mediaobject>
      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/toolbars-mail.png" format="PNG" width="428" depth="48"/></imageobject>
      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/toolbars-mail.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
      <textobject><phrase>Example mail application toolbar</phrase></textobject>
    </mediaobject>
  </figure>

  <!-- Notes from GJM:
  Text-on-the-side toolbars are now part of Gtk+.
  Stock items have mnemonics/access keys. I don't think they should.
  -->
 
  <!-- CFB: Assuming for now therefore that we ought to be recommending Gtk toolbars, but trying to keep the text as widget-neutral as possible
  <note>
  <title>For discussion</title>
  <para>A few people only want to recommend one type of toolbar.  Which should it be?  We can't really recommend the GAL one because it's not part of core GNOME.  On the other hand, the Gtk one is somewhat clunky, and projects like Evo, AbiWord etc. are unlikely to switch to it anyime soon.</para>
  </note>
  -->
    
  <para>Careful and consistent toolbar design speeds up the user's task by giving direct access to functions that would otherwise be hidden on a menu.  Use them only for the most important functions, however.  Having too many toolbar controls reduces their efficiency by making them harder to find, and too many rows of toolbars reduces the amount of screen space available to the rest of the application.</para>
    
  <sect1 id="toolbars-appearance">
    <title>Erscheinungsbild und Inhalt</title>
      
    <para>The effectiveness of toolbars is increased by maintaining a level of consistency between different applications.  The toolbar is one of the first parts of your application that a user will see the first time they run it, so by providing a toolbar that looks familiar to them, you can immediately make them feel comfortable about using your application.</para>
      
    <para>As well as following the recommendations and examples given in this section, look at the toolbars in other well-designed GNOME 2.0 applications for guidance when deciding what— and what not— to put on your application's toolbar.</para>
      
    <para>However many toolbars or <link linkend="toolbox-windows">toolbox windows</link> your application offers, provide one main toolbar by default that contains a representative subset of the application's overall functionality.  Many of the buttons on this toolbar will be the same regardless of the type of application.</para>
      
    <para>For example, the main toolbar in an office application will nearly always have <guilabel>New</guilabel>, <guilabel>Open</guilabel> and <guilabel>Save</guilabel> as its first three toolbar buttons.  Similarly, the first few buttons in a browser application should always include <guilabel>Back</guilabel>, <guilabel>Forward</guilabel>, <guilabel>Stop</guilabel> and <guilabel>Reload</guilabel>, in that order.</para>
      
    <!-- CB-Fig: A composite figure for all the listitems might be useful. --> 
    <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
	
      <listitem><para>Place only the most commonly-used application functions on your toolbars.  Don't just add buttons for every menu item.</para></listitem>
		
      <listitem><para>By default, have your toolbars appear directly below the main menu bar.</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>Allow toolbars to be turned on and off in your application's <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog and by using the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Toolbar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item.  If there is more than one toolbar, they are turned on and off by individual entries in the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Toolbar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> submenu.</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>All functions that appear on your toolbars must also accessible via the main menu bar, either directly (i.e. an equivalent menu item) or indirectly (e.g. in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Options</guimenu><guimenuitem>Settings</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog).</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>Arrange toolbar buttons in the same order and groupings as their equivalents on the main menu bar. In particular, always group sets of mutually-exclusive toolbar buttons.</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>Don't add buttons for <guilabel>Help</guilabel>, <guilabel>Close</guilabel> or <guilabel>Quit</guilabel> to your toolbar by default, as these are rarely used and the space is better used for more useful controls.  Similarly, only provide buttons for <guilabel>Undo</guilabel>, <guilabel>Redo</guilabel> and the standard clipboard functions if there is space on the toolbar to do so without sacrificing more useful, application-specific controls.</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>Provide options to show toolbar buttons as text, graphics or both— see <xref linkend="view-toolbar"/> for the menus to use for controlling toolbar display.  Also provide an option to return all toolbars in your application to the control center default for this setting.</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>Allow users to configure toolbars to contain their own selection of commands, in whatever order they choose.  Provide an option in the configuration dialog to return the toolbars to their default configuration.</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>Save your application's toolbar position and contents as part of the application configuration, and restore them when the application is restarted.</para></listitem>
	
    </itemizedlist>
      
    <sect2 id="vertical-toolbars">
      <title>Senkrechte Werkzeugleisten</title>

      <para>In general, don't use vertical toolbars.  The eye does not scan vertically as well as it does horizontally, groups of mutually exclusive buttons are less obvious when arranged vertically, and showing button labels is more awkward and less space-efficient.  Also, some toolbar controls just cannot be used vertically, such as drop-down lists.</para>
  	
      <para>Only consider using a vertical toolbar if:</para> 
	
      <itemizedlist>

	<listitem><para>the configuration of the application window means there would be a lot of wasted space if a horizontal toolbar was used instead, or</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>your application would otherwise require three or more rows of toolbars to appear below the main menu bar by default.  Note however that in this situation, the better alternative is usually to display fewer toolbars by default.</para></listitem>

      </itemizedlist>

      <para>If you must use a vertical toolbar, ensure the user can configure it to appear horizontally if they prefer.</para>
      
    </sect2>

	<sect2 id="toolbars-media">
		<title>Werkzeugleisten von Anwendungen zur Medienwiedergabe</title>
		<para>Many applications are able to play sound or video clips.  For consistency, always present the buttons that control playback in the same order and with the same stock icons.</para>
		<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
			<listitem><para>Show separate Stop and Pause buttons. Do not change Play to Pause while the clip is playing.</para></listitem>
		</itemizedlist>
	</sect2>

  </sect1>
    
  <sect1 id="toolbars-controlling-display">
    <title>Steuerung von Anzeige und Erscheinungsbild</title>
      
    <para>For each toolbar in your application, the user should be able to choose whether or not to show that toolbar, and whether to show its contents as icons only, text only or both.</para>
                  
    <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
	
      <listitem><para>Allow the user to override the control center toolbar defaults for your particular application in the application's <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog.  In particular, ensure that the user can:</para>
	  
	<itemizedlist>
	    
	  <listitem><para>separately choose to show each toolbar in your application as icons only, text only, or both</para></listitem>
	    
	  <listitem><para>return the icon/text/both status for all toolbars in your application to the system default</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>choose to show text labels either to the side of some or below all toolbar icons, and to return this setting to the system default</para></listitem>
	    
	  <listitem><para>return the layout and ordering of all toolbars in your application to the application default</para></listitem>
	    
	</itemizedlist>
	  
      </listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>If your application has a single toolbar, allow the user to turn it on or off with a <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Toolbar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> check box menu item.</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>If your application has two or three toolbars, allow the user to turn them on or off individually by placing a menu item for each one on the application's <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.  For example, <guimenuitem>Main Toolbar</guimenuitem>, <guimenuitem>Drawing Toolbar</guimenuitem>, <guimenuitem>Formatting Toolbar</guimenuitem>. Place the items together in a single group on the menu, with <guimenuitem>Main Toolbar</guimenuitem> first (if your application has one), followed by the others in alphabetical order.</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>If your application has more than three toolbars, allow the user to turn them on or off individually by placing a menu item for each one in a <guisubmenu>Toolbars</guisubmenu> sub-menu on the application's <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.  Place the <guimenuitem>Main Toolbar</guimenuitem> item first (if your application has one), followed by the others in alphabetical order.</para>
	  
	<figure id="view-toolbar">
	  <title>Example View menu fragments for applications with one toolbar (left), two or three toolbars (middle), or four or more toolbars (right)</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/toolbars-configure-menu.png" format="PNG" width="488" depth="135"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/toolbars-congfigure-menu.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Example View menu for application with single toolbar</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>
	  
      </listitem>
	
    </itemizedlist>

  </sect1>
  <sect1 id="toolbars-labels-tooltips">
    <title>Beschriftungen und Minihilfen</title>
      
    <para>Most controls that appear on your toolbar will require a text label that appears on, below or beside it.  Keep this description as short as possible, preferably a single verb.  For example, <guibutton>Open</guibutton> or <guibutton>Undo</guibutton>.</para>
      
    <para>Every control that appears on your toolbar should have a tooltip, whether or not that control has an associated text label.  The tooltip should be a concise description of the control, but should provide more information than its text label where possible.  For example, <guilabel>Open an existing document</guilabel>, or <guilabel>Undo last operation</guilabel>.</para>
            
    <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem><para>For buttons that correspond directly to menu items, make the text label the same as the menu item, but without any trailing ellipsis.  For example, <guibutton>Open</guibutton>, <guibutton>Save</guibutton>.</para></listitem>

      <listitem><para>Do not provide access keys for toolbar buttons.  Since toolbars are in the same keyboard focus context as the menubar, it would be too difficult to provide unique access keys for every menu title and toolbar control.  Toolbars are primarily intended as a shortcut for mouse users, although they are keyboard-navigable for accessibility reasons.</para></listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>If your toolbar is configured to show labels below button icons, show a label for every control on the toolbar.  For example:</para>
	  
	<figure>
	  <title>Toolbar with labels under all buttons</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/toolbars-labels-below.png" format="PNG" width="381" depth="56"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/toolbars-labels-below.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Toolbar showing labels under all controls</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

      </listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>If your toolbar is configured to show labels beside button icons rather than below them (using the "priority text" setting), do not show labels for every button.  Show labels only for the buttons that will be most-frequently used.  Choose no more than four such icons on any one toolbar, otherwise the effect will be diluted and the toolbar will become very wide.  For example:</para>
	  
	<figure>
	  <title>Toolbar with "priority text" labels beside the first few buttons only</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/toolbars-labels-beside.png" format="PNG" width="459" depth="35"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/toolbars-labels-beside.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Toolbar with "priority text" labels beside the first few items only</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

	<para>If you are unsure which buttons will be most frequently used, choose the first few buttons on your toolbar and provide labels for those only.</para>
      </listitem>
	
      <listitem><para>Ensure all toolbar controls have tooltips. The tooltip should be more descriptive than the corresponding menu item, if it has one, but still concise.  For example, <guilabel>Create new document</guilabel> for the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> toolbar button.  Use sentence capitalization for tooltips—see <xref linkend="layout-capitalization"/> for more information.</para></listitem>
	
    </itemizedlist>
      
  </sect1>
    
  <!-- Removed for now until we decide how much/little specific guidance to give for application types
    
  <sect2>
  <title>Default Toolbar Layout— Office Application</title>
    
  <para>However many toolbars or palette windows your application provides, by default there should be one main toolbar that provides a subset of the application's overall functionality.  Many of the buttons on this toolbar will be the same regardless of the type of application.</para>
    
  <para>The following operations should be included on the main toolbar in the following order, if your application supports them.  Application-specific functions should be slotted onto the toolbar according to the position on which they appear on the main menu bar.  For functions that don't appear on the <guimenu>File</guimenu>, <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> or <guimenu>Help</guimenu> menus, this means they will normally appear between the <guibutton>Replace</guibutton> and <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons.</para>
    
  <figure>
  <title>Buttons that should appear on the main toolbar of an office application.</title>
  <mediaobject>
  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/GtkToolbar_productivitydefault.png" format="PNG" width="720" depth="54"/></imageobject>
  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/GtkToolbar_productivitydefault.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
  <textobject>
  <phrase>New-Open-Save|Print|Undo-Redo|Find-Replace|Cut-Copy-Paste-Delete</phrase>
  </textobject>
  </mediaobject>
  </figure>
    
  <para>If your application supports all of these functions and you want to simplify your toolbar, consider leaving off the <guibutton>Undo</guibutton> and <guibutton>Redo</guibutton> buttons, or the <guibutton>Cut</guibutton>, <guibutton>Copy</guibutton>, <guibutton>Paste</guibutton> and <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> buttons, as most users prefer to use keyboard or menu for these functions.  However, you should include an option to re-add these buttons in your <menuchoice><guimenu>Toolbars</guimenu><guimenuitem>Customize</guimenuitem></menuchoice>... menu.</para>
    
  <para>If you wish to add a <guibutton>Help</guibutton> toolbar button, it should be placed last (rightmost, in western locales) on the main toolbar.  However, adding a <guibutton>Help</guibutton> button to the toolbar is not generally recommended, as usability studies suggest that it will be rarely used.  (N.B. This finding applies only to toolbars, not <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons in dialogs).</para>
    
    
    
  </sect2>
    
  <sect2>
  <title>Default Toolbar Layout— Browser Applications</title>
    
  <para>Applications for browsing documents or other objects, such as web, file, help or documentation browsers, should use the following layout for their main toolbar:</para>
    
  <para>Back Forward [Other Navigation] Stop Reload | Home | [Other App-Specific]</para>
    
  <para>Application-specific buttons (other than navigation buttons) should be placed in the button group following <guibutton>Home</guibutton>, in the order that they appear on the main menu bar.</para>
    
  <para>Following this model, some current GNOME browser apps would have their toolbars re-ordered as follows:</para>
    
  <figure>
  <title>Nautilus 1.0 toolbar rearranged to follow recommended standard toolbar layout for browser applications</title>
  <mediaobject>
  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/GtkToolbar_browserdefault.png" format="PNG" width="486" depth="58"/></imageobject>
  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/GtkToolbar_browserdefault.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject>
	      <phrase>Back Forward Up Stop Reload | Home | WebSearch Services</phrase>
	    </textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>
	
	<table>
	  <title>Proposed toolbar re-ordering for Nautilus</title>
	  <tgroup cols='2' align='left'>
	    	    
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry>Nautilus (1.0.x)</entry>
		<entry>Back Forward Up Refresh Home WebSearch Services Stop</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>Nautilus (proposed)</entry>
		<entry>Back Forward Up Stop Reload | Home | WebSearch Services </entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>

	<table>
	  <title>Proposed toolbar re-ordering for Galeon</title>
	  <tgroup cols='2' align='left'>

	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry>Galeon (0.12.x)</entry>
		<entry>Back Forward Reload Home Stop Zoom [URL] Go</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>Galeon (proposed)</entry>
		<entry>Back Forward Stop Reload | Home | Zoom [URL] Go </entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>
	
	<table>
	  <title>Proposed toolbar re-ordering for GNOME Help (deprecated, for illustration purposes only)</title>
	  <tgroup cols='2' align='left'>

	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry>GNOME Help (0.4)</entry>
		<entry>Back Forward Refresh Index History Bookmarks Help</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>GNOME Help (proposed)</entry>
		<entry>Back Forward Stop Reload | Index History Bookmarks</entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>

	<para>Note: In browser applications, use <guilabel>Reload</guilabel> rather than <guilabel>Refresh</guilabel> when the data will be actually re-read from its original source, rather than just re-painted on the screen.</para>


      </sect2>
-->

  </chapter>
  <!-- Note from GJM: I think palettes should go with toolboxes/utility windows. -->
  <!--
<sect1 id="toolbars-palettes">
<title>TODO : Palettes</title>
  
<para>A palette is much like a floating toolbar.  However, its size and shape is usually more customizable, and it typically has a titlebar of its own and appears in the GNOME task list.</para>
  
</sect1>
</chapter>
  -->
  


<chapter id="controls">
  <title>Bedienelemente</title>

  <sect1 id="controls-usage">
    <title>Effektive Verwendung von Bedienelementen</title>

    <para>GNOME provides a set of controls, also known as widgets, which allow
    users to interact with your applications. Using these controls
    appropriately and not altering their standard behavior is important. This
    allows users to predict the effects of their actions, and thus learn to
    use your application more quickly and efficiently. Controls that behave in
    non-standard ways break the user's mental model of how your
    application works, and dilute the meaning of the interface's visual
    language.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-terminology">
    <title>Terminologie</title>

    <para>Although they are known as "widgets" in the GNOME APIs and
    developer documentation, do not use this term in your user interface or
    user documentation. Refer to them by their specific names (for example,
    "buttons" or "menus"), or by the generic name
    "controls".</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-sensitivity">
    <title>Empfindlichkeit</title>

    <!--      <remark>Do we really want to include GTK calls here? -Seth</remark> -->

    <!--	 CFB have removed the GTK calls for the basic stuff, although left it in for the 
		 more obscure things that hackers currently aren't doing -->

    <para>Sometimes it does not make sense to allow the user to interact with
    a control in the current context, for example, to press a
    <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> button when the clipboard is empty. At these
    times, make the control insensitive <!--(for example, using the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtkwidget.html#GTK-WIDGET-SET-SENSITIVE"><function>gtk_widget_set_sensitive()</function></ulink> function, for GTK controls)-->
    to minimize the risk of user error. While a control is insensitive, it
    will appear dimmed and will not be able to receive the focus, although
    assistive technologies like screenreaders will still be able to detect and
    report it.</para>

    <para>It is usually better to make a control insensitive than to hide it
    altogether. This way, the user can learn about functionality they may be
    able to use later, even if it is not available right now.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Two check boxes: sensitive (top) and insensitive (bottom)</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="76" fileref="images/controls-sensitivity.png" format="PNG" width="258"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-sensitivity.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Screenshot showing the visual appearance of sensitive and
          insensitive check box controls</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!--
      <para>Sometimes, however, a large group of controls always become insensitive or sensitive simultaneously as the direct result of user action, such as checking a box or pressing a button.  In this case it is sometimes better to hide or show the controls (for example, using the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtkwidget.html#GTK-WIDGET-SHOW"><function>gtk_widget_show()</function></ulink> and <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtkwidget.html#GTK-WIDGET-HIDE"><function> gtk_widget_hide()</function></ulink> functions, for GTK controls) rather than making them sensitive or insensitive.  For example, if all the controls on a <link linkend="controls-notebooks">notebook tab</link> are insensitive, it is usually better to hide the tab altogether.</para>
-->

    <!-- CB-Ed: Hmm. Not sure about the preceding paragraph and the suggestion it makes.  Usually you don't want to change an interface as drastically as removing an entire tab when a user clicks a button - it's jarring, first of all, and secondly, you want to keep the UI as consistent as possible: one of the reasons for disabling, say, a menu item, and not just making it disappear when it is unavailable, is to train the user's eye and behavior to know where certain things are located. You may want to back this up or verify the suggestion's strength before finalizing the HIG. -->

    <sect2 id="controls-locked">
      <title>Gesperrte Bedienelemente</title>

      <para>In a network-managed environment, like a computer lab, system
      administrators usually want to "lock down" the values of certain
      settings, or remove them from the user interface altogether. This makes
      it easier for them to troubleshoot any problems that their users may
      encounter. In GNOME, the correct way for the system administrator to do
      this is by restricting write access to the GConf keys corresponding to
      those settings.</para>

      <para>When you are designing your application, consider which settings a
      system administrator might want to make unavailable to users. These may
      typically include:</para>

      <itemizedlist>
        <listitem>
          <para>Settings that, if set wrongly, could prevent the application
          from functioning at all. For example, proxy settings in a network
          application.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Settings that could refer to networked resources. For example,
          the Templates directory in an office application, where shared
          stationery such as fax cover sheets might be stored.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Settings that customize the user interface, other than those
          required for accessibility. For example, certain menu, keyboard or
          toolbar customization options.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <para>Your application needs to decide every time these controls are
      displayed whether or not they are available for editing, depending on
      the writeable state of the GConf key that holds its value. In the
      simplest case, your code for each control could look like that in the
      example below.</para>

      <!-- CB-Ed: Again, reconsider who your readers are.  Some may not be comfortable with terms such as "runtime."  Use language that is more inclusive; you may reword the first sentence to say "...decide when you start up your machine whether..." or something along those lines. -->

      <example>
        <title>Sample code fragment showing how to make a GConf-locked control
        insensitive</title>

        <programlisting>if (!gconf_key_is_writable (http_proxy))
        gtk_widget_set_sensitive (http_proxy_field, FALSE);</programlisting>
      </example>

      <para>Include a section for system administrators in your user guide,
      explaining which settings they can lock, and their corresponding GConf
      keys.</para>

      <para>Explain to the user why these controls cannot be edited at this
      time. You can do this with static text, tooltips or online help,
      depending on the situation. For example:</para>

      <figure>
        <title>Example of a dialog with locked controls</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="216" fileref="images/controls-locked.png" format="PNG" width="475"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/controls-locked.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Screenshot showing disabled proxy controls in a web
            browser's property dialog, under the caption "Only the
            system administrator can change these settings"</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <!-- CB-Fig: Figure is good, add callouts, taking some text from the caption, and make caption more succinct: "Dialog with locked settings/controls."  When referring to figures, use the figure number, preferably with the following format: chapter_no - figure_no so that figures can be referred to from outside its housing chapter. -->

      <para>Note that although they cannot be edited, the settings are still
      visible and selectable, and may be copied to the clipboard.<!--In some cases, it may be better to hide the affected controls altogether, for example if a whole notebook page or dialog is affected.  Be aware of the possible documentation issues if you do this, however.  If users see controls in user guides and screenshots that they don't see on their screen, at best they will lose faith in the user guide, and at worst they may give up trying to use your application altogether.--></para>

      <!-- CB-Ed: Second sentence in above paragraph: "In some cases?"  Please provide solid examples and reasons for why you suggest such a thing as hiding "affected controls."  -->
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-entry">
    <title>Eingabefelder für Text</title>

    <para>Text entry fields are used for entering one or more lines of plain
    text. In GTK 2, the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtkentry.html">GtkEntry</ulink>
    control is used for single-line text entry, and <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtktextview.html">GtkTextView</ulink>
    for multiple-line text entry.<!--Although GtkTextView can also be used for formatted, multi-lingual text editing and display, when used in dialogs for simple text entry its behavior should be kept as close as possible to that of a GtkEntry control.--></para>

    <!-- CB-Ed: The second and third sentences are baffling.  It seems to be just directed at the developer; it is not inclusive to readers who are not coders.  This probably isn't what you want to get people like visual/UI designers to read and use this guide. -->

    <figure>
      <title>Ein- oder mehrzeilige Eingabefelder</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="153" fileref="images/controls-text.png" format="PNG" width="545"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-text.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Screenshot of part of a dialog, containing both single and
          multi-line entry fields</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!-- CB-Fig: Dialog "fragment?"  Use callouts.  Succinct caption: "Text fields." or "Single and Multi-line Entry Fields"-->

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label the entry field with a text label above it or to its left,
        using <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence capitalization</link>.
        Provide an access key in the label that allows the user to give focus
        directly to the entry field.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Right-justify the contents of entry fields that are used only
        for numeric entry, unless the convention in the user's locale
        demands otherwise. This is useful in windows where the user might want
        to compare two numerical values in the same column of controls. In
        this case, ensure the right edges of the relevant controls are also
        aligned.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>When the user gives focus to an entry field using the keyboard,
        place the text cursor at the end of the existing text and highlight
        its contents (but don't overwrite the existing PRIMARY clipboard
        selection<!-- FIXME: is this currently possible?-->). This makes it
        easy to immediately overtype or append new text, the two most common
        operations performed on entry fields.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Size text entry fields according to the likely size of the
        input. This gives a useful visual cue to the amount of input expected,
        and breaks up the dialog making it easier to scan. Don't make all
        the fields in the dialog the same width just to make everything line
        up nicely.</para>
      </listitem>

      <!-- CB-Ed: Try to cluster input text fields so that fields of similar "types" end up together, and end up having uniform sizes.  Usually you want to size text entry fields to the width of the largest input expected in each clustering.  A clean and orderly visual flow is indeed important for the user; that is, line things up so that "everything line[s] up nicely" where possible.  The figure (3) actually shows this well. -->

      <listitem>
        <para>In an instant-apply <link linkend="windows-utility">property or
        preference window</link>, validate the contents of the entry field
        when it loses focus or when the window is closed, not after each keypress. 
	Exception: if the field accepts only a fixed
        number of characters, such as a hexadecimal color code, validate and
        apply the change as soon as that number of characters have been entered.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Provide a static text prompt for text boxes that require input
        in a particular format or in a particular unit of measurement. For
        example:</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Text entry field with static text prompt</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="31" fileref="images/controls-text-prompt.png" format="PNG" width="130"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-text-prompt.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>A text entry field in which the user must input a time,
              with the label "hh:mm" beside it to indicate the
              required format</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <!-- CB-Fig: Good fig, provide callouts to "static text prompt," shorten caption and fix fig no. -->
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Where possible, provide an additional or alternative control
        that limits the required input to the valid range. For example,
        provide a <link linkend="controls-spin-boxes">spinbox</link> or <link linkend="controls-sliders">slider</link> if the required input is one
        of a fixed range of integers, or provide access to a <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtkcalendar.html">GtkCalendar</ulink>
        control if the user has to enter a valid date:</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Text entry field requiring a date as input, with a button
          beside it to pop up a GtkCalendar control to simplify the task</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="41" fileref="images/controls-text-choose.png" format="PNG" width="298"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-text-choose.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>A text entry field in which the user must input a date,
              with a button labelled "Choose" beside it that opens a
              GtkCalendar control to simplify the task</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <!-- CB-Fig: Provide a larger image including examples of "spinbox" or "slider." Same comments apply here as to all figuers in the HIG: callouts, shorter caption, figure number. -->

        <para>This is less error-prone than expecting the user to format their
        text input in some arbitrary format. You may still want to provide the
        entry field control as well, however, for expert users who are
        familiar with the required format.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If you implement an entry field that accepts only keystrokes
        valid in the task context, such as digits, play the system warning
        beep when the user tries to type an invalid character. If the user
        types three invalid characters in a row, display an <link linkend="windows-alert">alert</link> that explains the valid inputs
        for that textfield.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>The cursor blink rate is globally defined by the XSettings
        "gtk-cursor-blink" and "gtk-cursor-blink-time".
        Standard toolkit controls use these and they must <!-- a11y, right? -->
        not be altered in applications by any means. New controls with text
        cursors must respect these global values.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <sect2 id="controls-text-return">
      <title>Verhalten der Eingabetaste</title>

      <para>Normally, pressing <keycap>Return</keycap> in a dialog should
      activate the dialog's default button, unless the focused control
      uses <keycap>Return</keycap> for its own purposes. You should therefore
      set the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtkentry.html#GTK-ENTRY-SET-ACTIVATES-DEFAULT"><function>activates-default</function></ulink>
      property of most entry fields to TRUE. (Note that GtkTextView does not
      have such a setting— pressing <keycap>Return</keycap> always inserts a
      new line.).</para>

      <para>However, if your dialog contains several entry fields that are
      usually filled out in order, for example <guilabel>Name</guilabel>,
      <guilabel>Address</guilabel> and <guilabel>Telephone Number</guilabel>,
      consider setting the <function>activates-default</function> property on
      those entry fields to FALSE. Pressing <keycap>Return</keycap> should
      then move focus on to the next control instead. <!-- CB-Ed: Do you have data to back up the previous suggestion?  My first instinct would be to press TAB to go to the next entry field, not RETURN. -->
      <!-- CFB: yes, we had numerous emails while discussing this on the mailing lists to suggest that novice users in particular tend to press Return rather than Tab while form-filling -->
      Doing this will help prevent the user from accidentally closing the
      window before they have entered all the information they wanted to.</para>

      <para>As a further safeguard, remember not to set the default button in
      a dialog until the minimum amount of required information has been
      entered, for example, both a username and a password in a login dialog.
      Again, in this case you should move focus to the next control when the
      user presses <keycap>Return</keycap>, rather than just ignoring the
      keypress.</para>

      <para>If you need to provide a keyboard shortcut that activates the
      default button while a GtkTextView control has focus, use
      <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Return</keycap></keycombo>.</para>

      <note>
        <title>Anmerkung</title>

        <para>Gtk does not currently move focus to the next control when
        <keycap>Return</keycap> is pressed and either <function>activates-default=FALSE</function>,
        or there is no default button in the window. For now,
        <keycap>Return</keycap> does nothing in these situations, so remember
        to implement the focus change behavior yourself.</para>
      </note>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="controls-text-tab">
      <title>Verhalten der Tabulatortaste</title>

      <para>Normally, pressing <keycap>Tab</keycap> in a single-line entry
      field should move focus to the next control, and in a multi-line entry
      field it should insert a tab character. Pressing <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo>
      in a multi-line entry field should move focus to the next control.</para>

      <para>If you need to provide a keyboard shortcut that inserts a tab
      character into a single line entry field, use <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo>.
      You are unlikely to find many situations where this is useful, however.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-spin-boxes">
    <title>Einstellfelder</title>

    <para>A spin box is a text box that accepts a range of values. It
    incorporates two arrow buttons that allow the user to increase or decrease
    the current value by a fixed amount.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Beispiel für ein Einstellfeld</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="32" fileref="images/controls-spin-box.png" format="PNG" width="204"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-spin-box.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>A simple spin box used to specify the spacing between
          applets on a panel</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!-- CB-Fig: Callout, shorten caption, fig no -->

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use spin boxes for numerical input only. Use a list or option
        menu when you need the user to select from fixed data sets of other
        types.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use a spin box if the numerical value is meaningful or useful
        for the user to know, and the valid input range is unlimited or fixed
        at one end only. For example, a control for specifying the number of
        iterations of some action, or a timeout value. If the range is fixed
        at both ends, or the numerical values are arbitrary (for example, a
        volume control), use a slider control instead.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label the spin box with a text label above it or to its left,
        using <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence capitalization</link>.
        Provide an access key in the label that allows the user to give focus
        directly to the spin box.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Right-justify the contents of spin boxes, unless the convention
        in the user's locale demands otherwise. This is useful in windows
        where the user might want to compare two numerical values in the same
        column of controls. In this case, ensure the right edges of the
        relevant controls are also aligned.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-sliders">
    <title>Schieberegler</title>

    <para>A slider allows the user to quickly select a value from a fixed,
    ordered range, or to increase or decrease the current value. The control
    looks like the type of slider that you might find on an audio mixing desk
    or a hi-fi's graphic equalizer. In gtk, you implement a slider using
    the GtkHScale or GtkVScale controls, for horizontal or vertical sliders
    respectively.</para>

    <figure id="controls-slider-figure">
      <title>Ein einfacher Schieberegler</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="27" fileref="images/controls-slider.png" format="PNG" width="208"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-slider.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>A slider control used to change the stereo audio balance
          between left and right speakers</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Verwenden Sie einen Schieberegler, wenn:</para>

        <itemizedlist>
          <listitem>
            <para>adjusting the value relative to its current value is more
            important than choosing an absolute value. For example, a volume
            control: the average user will usually think about turning the
            volume up or down to make a sound louder or quieter, rather than
            setting the peak output to a specific decibel value.</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>it is useful for the user to control the rate of change of
            the value in real time. For example, to monitor the effects of a
            color change in a live preview window as they drag the RGB
            sliders.</para>
          </listitem>
        </itemizedlist>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label the slider with a text label above it or to its left,
        using <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence capitalization</link>.
        Provide an access key in the label that allows the user to give focus
        directly to the slider.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Mark significant values along the length of the slider with text
        or tick marks. For example the left, right and center points on an
        audio balance control in <xref linkend="controls-slider-figure"/>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>For large ranges of integers (more than about 20), and for
        ranges of floating point numbers, consider providing a text box or
        spin box that is linked to the slider's value. This allows the
        user to quickly set or fine-tune the setting more easily than they
        could with the slider control alone.</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Schieberegler mit verknüpften Einstellfeldern</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="85" fileref="images/controls-slider-spinbox.png" format="PNG" width="356"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-slider-spinbox.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>Three slider controls used to change RGB values, each
              with a spinbox beside them to facilitate direct numeric entry</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-buttons">
    <title>Knöpfe</title>

    <para>A button initiates an action when the user clicks it.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Typische Knöpfe in einem modalen Dialog</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="47" fileref="images/controls-buttons.png" format="PNG" width="190"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-buttons.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>OK and Cancel buttons as found in a modal dialog</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label all buttons with imperative verbs, using <link linkend="layout-capitalization">header capitalization</link>. For
        example, <guilabel>Save</guilabel>, <guilabel>Sort</guilabel> or
        <guilabel>Update Now</guilabel>. Provide an access key in the label
        that allows the user to directly activate the button from the
        keyboard.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>After pressing a button, the user should expect to see the
        result of their action within 1 second. For example, closing the
        window or opening another. See <xref linkend="feedback"/> for
        guidance on what to do if your application cannot respond this
        quickly.</para>
      </listitem>

      <!-- CB-Ed: Do you use ms in other parts of the HIG?  Might want to just use ms and not s as a measure, to keep things consistent and in case you need to finer granualarity than this later -->

      <listitem>
        <para>Use an ellipsis (...) at the end of the label if the action
        requires further input from the user before it can be carried out. For
        example, <guilabel>Save As...</guilabel> or <guilabel>Find...</guilabel>.
        Do not add an ellipsis to commands like <guilabel>Properties</guilabel>,
        <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel>, or <guilabel>Settings</guilabel>, as
        these open windows that do not <emphasis>require</emphasis> further
        input.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Once a dialog is displayed, do not change its default button
        from one button to another. You may add or remove default status from
        the same button if it helps prevent user error, however. Changing the
        default from one button to another can be confusing and inefficient,
        especially for users relying on assistive technologies.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If your button can display text, an icon, or both, choose which
        label to display at runtime according to the user's preference in
        the GNOME Menus and Toolbars Preferences dialog. However, you may
        over-ride this preference when there is no suitable icon to describe
        the button's action graphically, for example.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not use more than one or two different widths of button in
        the same window, and make all of them the same height. This will help
        give a pleasing uniform visual appearance to your window that makes it
        easier to use.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not assign actions to double-clicking or right-clicking a
        button. Users are unlikely to discover these actions, and if they do,
        it will distort their expectations of other buttons on the desktop.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Make invalid buttons insensitive, rather than popping up an
        error message when the user clicks them.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>In a dialog, one button may be made the default button, which is
    shown with a different border and is activated by pressing
    <keycap>Return</keycap>. Often this will be the <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
    or equivalent button. However, if pressing this button by mistake could
    cause a loss of data, do not set a default button for the window. Do not
    make <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> the default button instead. See <xref linkend="default-buttons"/> for more information.</para>

    <!-- CB-Fig: Add a figure here to illustrate a default button. -->

    <para>If it does not make sense to have a default button until several
    fields in the dialog have been correctly completed—for example, both the
    <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel> fields in
    a login dialog—do not set the default button until they have both been
    completed.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-check-boxes">
    <title>Ankreuzfelder</title>

    <para>Check boxes are used to show or change a setting. Its two states,
    set and unset, are shown by the presence or absence of a checkmark in the
    labelled box.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Eine typische Gruppe von Ankreuzfeldern</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="140" fileref="images/controls-check-boxes.png" format="PNG" width="143"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-check-boxes.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>A typical group of five check boxes in a dialog</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!-- CB-Fig: callouts. -->

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not initiate an action when the user clicks a check box.
        However, if used in an instant-apply <link linkend="windows-utility">property
        or preference window</link>, update the setting represented by the
        check box immediately.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Clicking a check box should not affect the values of any other
        controls. It may sensitize, insensitize, hide or show other controls,
        however.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If toggling a check box affects the sensitivity of other
        controls, place the check box immediately above or to the left of the
        controls that it affects. This helps to indicate that the controls are
        dependent on the state of the check box.<!--FIXME: pic required)--></para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence
        capitalization</link> for check box labels, for example
        <guilabel>Use custom font</guilabel>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label check boxes to clearly indicate the effects of both their
        checked and unchecked states, for example, <guilabel>Show icons in
        menus</guilabel>. Where this proves difficult, consider using two
        radio buttons instead so both states can be given labels. For example:</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Ambiguous check box (top), radio buttons work better in this
          case (bottom)</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="70" fileref="images/controls-check-box-ambiguous.png" format="PNG" width="279"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-check-box-ambiguous.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>Two images: one showing a single check box ambiguously
              labelled "Progress bar in left of statusbar", the other
              making the choice explicit with radio buttons labelled
              "Left" and "Right" under the heading "Status
              bar progress indicator position:"</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <para>The single check box in this example is ambiguous, as it is not
        clear where the "progress indicator" will go if the box is
        unchecked. Two radio buttons are better in this case, as they make the
        options clear.</para>
      </listitem>

      <!-- CB-Fig: Again, callouts, shorten caption.  The callouts should include other bullet points as well (e.g., access keys).  The referring bullet item is badly phrased.  Perhaps make this the one check box images for the bullets, with different callouts for different bullet points.  -->

      <listitem>
        <para>Provide an access key in all check box labels that allows the
        user to set or unset the check box directly from the keyboard.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If the check box represents a setting in a multiple selection
        that is set for some objects in the selection and unset for others,
        show the check box in its mixed state. For example:</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Check boxes (right) showing properties for a multiple
          selection of files in Nautilus (left)</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="170" fileref="images/controls-check-boxes-mixed.png" format="PNG" width="223"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-check-boxes-mixed.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>Check boxes showing the Hidden, Readable and Writeable
              states of two selected files in Nautilus. Both files are hidden,
              neither are writeable, but one is readable. The Readable check
              box is therefore shown in its mixed state.</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <para>In this example, both selected files are hidden (since their
        filenames start with "."), and the emblems on their icons show
        that neither file is writeable, but one is readable. The
        <guilabel>Readable</guilabel> check box is therefore shown in its
        mixed state. <remark>At time of writing, the exact visual appearance
        of a mixed state check box in gtk was undecided</remark>.</para>

        <para>When a check box is in its mixed state:</para>

        <itemizedlist>
          <listitem>
            <para>clicking the box once should check the box, applying that
            setting (when confirmed) to all the selected objects</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>clicking the box a second time should uncheck the box,
            removing that setting (when confirmed) to all the selected objects</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>clicking the box a third time should return the box to its
            mixed state, restoring each selected object's original value
            for that setting (when confirmed)</para>
          </listitem>
        </itemizedlist>

        <!-- CB-Ed: Mixed state check boxes are a polemic-ridden issue.  Data to back this up? -->
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label a group of check boxes with a descriptive heading above or
        to the left of the group.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use a frame around the group if necessary, but remember that
        blank space often works just as well and results in a less
        visually-cluttered dialog.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not place more than about eight check boxes under the same
        group heading. If you need more than eight, try to use blank space,
        heading labels or frames to divide them into smaller groups.
        Otherwise, consider using a check box list instead— but you probably
        also need to think about how to simplify your user interface.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Try to align groups of check boxes vertically rather than
        horizontally, as this makes them easier to scan visually. Use
        horizontal or rectangular alignments only if they greatly improve the
        layout of the window.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-radio-buttons">
    <title>Radioknöpfe</title>

    <para>Radio buttons are used in groups to select from a mutually exclusive
    set of options. Only one radio button within a group may be set at any one
    time. As with check boxes, do not use radio buttons to initiate actions.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Eine typische Gruppe von Radioknöpfen</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="105" fileref="images/controls-radio-buttons.png" format="PNG" width="352"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-radio-buttons.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>A typical group of three radio buttons in a dialog</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Only use radio buttons in groups of at least two, never use a
        single radio button on its own. To represent a single setting, use a
        check box or two radio buttons, one for each state.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Exactly one radio button should be set in the group at all
        times. The only exception is when the group is showing the properties
        of a multiple selection, when one or more of the buttons may be in
        their mixed state.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not initiate an action when the user clicks a radio button.
        However, if used in an instant-apply <link linkend="windows-utility">property
        or preference window</link>, update the setting represented by the
        radio button immediately.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Clicking a radio button should not affect the values of any
        other controls. It may sensitize, insensitize, hide or show other
        controls, however.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If toggling a radio button affects the sensitivity of other
        controls, place the radio button immediately to the left of the
        controls that it affects. This helps to indicate that the controls are
        dependent on the state of the radio button.<!--FIXME: pic required--></para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence
        capitalization</link> for radio button labels, for example
        <guilabel>Switched movement</guilabel>. Provide an access key in the
        label that allows the user to set the radio button directly from the
        keyboard.</para>
      </listitem>

      <!-- CB-Fig: "guilabel" may need to be more generic, like: Button Label, so that people don't get confused when scanning text about literals, particularly because you guys are using a lot of code references and lingo. -->

      <listitem>
        <para>If the radio button represents a setting in a multiple selection
        that is set for some objects in the selection and unset for others,
        show the radio button in its mixed state. For example:</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Radio buttons (right) showing properties for a multiple
          selection of shapes in a drawing application (left)</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="105" fileref="images/controls-radio-button-mixed.png" format="PNG" width="314"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-radio-button-mixed.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>Radio buttons showing the Thick, Thin and Dashed drawing
              styles of two selected shapes in a drawing application. One
              shape is drawn in the thick style, the other in the dashed
              style. The Thick and Dashed radio buttons are therefore shown in
              their mixed state, and the Thin radio button is unset.</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <!-- CB-Fig: Show context for drawing application.  -->

        <para><remark>At time of writing, the exact visual appearance of a
        mixed state radio button in gtk was undecided</remark>. In this
        situation, clicking any radio button in the group should set the
        clicked button, and unset all the others. Thereafter, the group should
        behave like a normal radio button group— there is no way to reset a
        radio button to its mixed state by clicking on it. Provide a
        <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> button or equivalent in the window that
        allows the previous mixed settings to be restored without closing the
        window or cancelling the dialog.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label a group of radio buttons with a descriptive heading above
        or to the left of the group.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use a frame around the group if necessary, but remember that
        blank space often works just as well and results in a less
        visually-cluttered dialog.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not place more than about eight radio buttons under the same
        group heading. If you need more than eight, consider using a
        single-selection <link linkend="controls-lists">list</link> instead—
        but you probably also need to think about how to simplify your user
        interface.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Try to align groups of radio buttons vertically rather than
        horizontally, as this makes them easier to scan visually. Use
        horizontal or rectangular alignments only if they greatly improve the
        layout of the window.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-toggle-buttons">
    <title>Umschaltknöpfe</title>

    <para>Toggle buttons look similar to regular <link linkend="controls-buttons">Buttons</link>, but are used to show or change
    a state rather than initiate an action. A toggle button's two states,
    set and unset, are shown by its appearing "pushed in" or
    "popped out" respectively.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Eine typische Gruppe von Umschaltknöpfen</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="46" fileref="images/controls-toggle-buttons.png" format="PNG" width="137"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-toggle-buttons.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>A group of four toggle buttons representing a choice of
          measurement units: inches, centimeters, feet and meters</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!-- CB-Fig: callouts -->

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not use groups of toggle buttons in dialogs unless space
        constraints force you to do so, or you need to provide consistency
        with a toolbar in your application. <link linkend="controls-check-boxes">Check boxes</link> or <link linkend="controls-radio-buttons">radio buttons</link> are usually
        preferable, as they allow more descriptive labels and are less
        easily-confused with other types of control.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Only use toggle buttons in groups, so they are not mistaken for
        regular buttons. Make the group behave like either a group of check
        boxes or a group of radio buttons, as required.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Provide an access key in the label of all toggle buttons that
        allows the user to set or unset the button directly from the keyboard.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label a group of toggle buttons with a descriptive heading above
        or to the left of the group, as you would with a group of check boxes
        or radio buttons.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use a frame around the group of buttons if necessary, but
        remember that blank space often works just as well and results in a
        less visually-cluttered dialog.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Try to align groups of toggle buttons horizontally rather than
        vertically. This is how toggle buttons normally appear on a toolbar,
        so the user will be more familiar with this arrangement.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not leave any space between toggle buttons in a group,
        otherwise they may look unrelated or may be mistaken for regular
        buttons.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use <link linkend="layout-capitalization">header capitalization</link>
        for toggle button labels, for example <guibutton>No Wallpaper</guibutton>,
        <guibutton>Embossed Logo</guibutton>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If your toggle button can display text, an icon, or both, choose
        which to display at runtime according to the user's setting in the
        GNOME Menus and Toolbars preference dialog.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use the same text or graphical label for a toggle button whether
        it is set or unset.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If the toggle button represents a setting in a multiple
        selection that is set for some objects in the selection and unset for
        others, show the button in its mixed state. For example:</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Toggle buttons (right) showing properties for a multiple
          selection of shapes in a drawing application (left)</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="108" fileref="images/controls-toggle-button-mixed.png" format="PNG" width="467"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-toggle-button-mixed.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>Toggle buttons showing the Thick, Thin and Dashed
              drawing styles of two selected shapes in a drawing application.
              One shape is drawn in the thick style, the other in the dashed
              style. The Thick and Dashed toggle buttons are therefore shown
              in their mixed state, and the Thin toggle button is unset.</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <!-- CB-Fig: There's probably a better figure for fig 16 than this one. Also, my 2 cents on the mixed state visual issue: mixed state MUST be visually DISTINCT from "set." What I see here isn't enough (I know this isn't set yet.) -->
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-option-menus">
    <title>Drop-down Lists</title>

    <para>Drop-down lists are used to select from a mutually exclusive set of
    options. They can be useful when there is insufficient space in a window
    to use a group of radio buttons or a single-selection list, with which
    they are functionally equivalent.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>A drop-down list showing current selection (left) and the list of
      available choices when clicked on (right)</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="178" fileref="images/controls-option-menu.png" format="PNG" width="377"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-option-menu.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Two images, one of a drop-down list displaying its current
          setting, and the other showing its popup menu of available choices
          when clicked on</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!-- CB-Fig: Callouts, shortened caption.  This can probably be collapsed into one snapshot. -->

    <para>Empfehlungen:</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
        <para>Do not use drop-down lists with fewer than three items, or more
        than about ten. To offer a choice of two options, use <link linkend="controls-radio-buttons">radio buttons</link> or <link linkend="controls-toggle-buttons">toggle buttons</link>. To offer a
        choice of more than ten options, use a <link linkend="controls-lists">list</link>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not initiate an action when the user selects an item from an
        drop-down list. However, if used in an instant-apply <link linkend="windows-utility">property or preference window</link>, update
        the setting that the menu represents immediately.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Selecting an item from a drop-down list should not affect the
        values of any other controls. It may sensitize, insensitize, hide or
        show other controls, however.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label the drop-down list with a text label above it or to its left,
        using <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence capitalization</link>.
        Provide an access key in the label that allows the user to give focus
        directly to the drop-down list.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence
        capitalization</link> for drop-down list items, for example
        <guilabel>Switched movement</guilabel></para>
      </listitem>

      <!-- CB-Ed: Change guilabel to something less literal-seeming: Menu item. -->

      <listitem>
        <para>Assign an access key to every drop-down list item. Ensure each
        access key is unique within the enclosing window or dialog, not just
        within the menu.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not assign shortcut keys to drop-down list items by default. The
        user may assign their own shortcut keys in the usual way if they wish,
        however.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not use a drop-down list in a situation where it may have to
        show a property of a multiple selection, as drop-down lists have no
        concept of mixed state. Use a group of radio or toggle buttons
        instead, as these can show set, unset or mixed states.</para>
      </listitem>

      <!-- CB-Fig: The bullet points probably could be illustrated in a main drop-down lists figure (17 would work) -->

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not use submenus on a drop-down list.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>You should normally use <link linkend="controls-radio-buttons">radio
    buttons</link> or a <link linkend="controls-lists">list</link> instead of
    drop-down lists, as those controls present all the available options at once
    without any further interaction. However, drop-down lists may be preferable
    in a window where:</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
        <para>there is little available space</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>the list of options may change over time</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>the contents of the hidden part of the menu are obvious from its
        label and the one selected item. For example, if you have an option
        menu labelled "Month:" with the item "January"
        selected, the user might reasonably infer that the menu contains the
        12 months of the year without having to look.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>Drop-down lists can also be useful on toolbars, to replace a group of
    several mutually-exclusive toggle buttons.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-combo-boxes">
    <title>Drop-down Combination Boxes</title>

    <!-- CB-Fig: Be aware that some people may not distinguish between drop-down lists and combo boxes; that is, they are taken as two types of combo boxes, editable and uneditable (see JLF DG). -->

    <!-- How odd, the whole point of a combo box is that it's a combination of a text field and a list... as such, therefore there is no such thing as an 'uneditable combo box' :o)  -->

    <para>Drop-down combination boxes combine a text entry field and a drop-down list of
    pre-defined values. Selecting one of the pre-defined values sets the entry
    field to that value.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>A drop-down combination box before and after its drop-down list is displayed</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="200" fileref="images/controls-combo.png" format="PNG" width="304"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-combo.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Two images, one of a drop-down combination box entry field displaying its
          current selection, and the other showing its drop-down list of
          available choices when clicked on</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!-- CB-Fig: callouts, shorten caption. -->

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Only use a drop-down combination box instead of a list, drop-down list or radio
        button group when it is important that the user be able to enter a new
        value that is not already amongst the list of pre-defined choices.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not initiate an action when the user selects an item from the
        list in a drop-down combination box. If used in an instant-apply <link linkend="windows-utility">property or preference window</link>, update
        the setting represented by the drop-down combination box immediately if possible. If
        this isn't possible due to the contents of the entry field being
        invalid while the user is still typing into it, update the related
        setting when the drop-down combination box loses focus instead.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If the user types a value into the drop-down combination box that is not already
        in the drop-down list, add it to the list when the drop-down combination box loses
        focus so they can select it next time.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Interpret user input into a drop-down combination box in a case-insensitive way.
        For example, if the user types <userinput>blue</userinput>,
        <userinput>Blue</userinput> and <userinput>BLUE</userinput> into the
        same drop-down combination box on different occasions, only store one of these in the
        combo's drop-down list, unless your application makes a distinction
        between the different forms (which is usually a bad idea).</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label the drop-down combination box with a text label above it or to its left,
        using <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence capitalization</link>.
        Provide an access key in the label that allows the user to give focus
        directly to the drop-down combination box.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence
        capitalization</link> for the drop-down list items, for example
        <guilabel>Switched movement</guilabel>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <!-- CB-Ed: Make guilabel less literal: "List item." -->
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-scrollbars">
    <title>Rollbalken</title>

    <para>Often an object (such as a document or a list) will not be fit within
    the confines of its viewer control. In these cases a scrollbar can be affixed
    to the viewer control. The scrollbar alters which part of the object is
    currently visible inside the viewer control: it slides the view across the object
    in one axis (horizontal or vertical).</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Only display scrollbars when they are required for sliding the view. If
        an object fits inside the viewer control, don't draw scrollbars. If you are
        using a GtkScrolledWindow, call <function>gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy</function>
        setting the appropriate axis (or axes) to GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use scrollbars as a replacement for a 
        <link linkend="controls-sliders">slider</link>. Scrollbars should only be
        used affixed to a view that they actively alter, not used as a generic
        continuous input control.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Affix scrollbars to the right side of a viewer control (to slide the view
        vertically), or to the bottom side (to slide the view horizontally). Do <emphasis>not</emphasis>
        affix scrollbars on the top or left sides of a viewer control.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Scrollbars should be aligned in both directions with the view they are
        affixed to on the axis they control. In other words, horizontal scrollbars
        should span the full length of the viewer control, and vertical scrollbars
        should span the full height of the viewer control.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If both horizontal and vertical scrollbars are acting upon a view,
        alignment will require that small rectangle in the lower right corner where
        the horizontal and vertical scrollbars meet will be blank. This is OK.</para>
      </listitem>
       
      <listitem>
        <para>Scrollbars should affect the view to which they are affixed in realtime:
        as the user drags or clicks the view should change. Time lag will be
        disconcerting and negatively impact a users ability to navigate content inside
        the view.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>



  <sect1 id="controls-lists">
    <title>Listen</title>

    <para>A list control allows the user to inspect, manipulate or select from
    a list of items. Lists may have one or more columns, and contain text,
    graphics, simple controls, or a combination of all three.</para>

    <!-- CB-Fig: Looks like a table, to me, complete with table row striping and column headers.  Lists are usually one column, scrollable... lists! Of text or, rarely, graphics which can be selected in order to be manipulated. Sorting also happens in tables, not lists, from my experience. -->

    <!-- CFB: It's not a table because there is no way to select or manipulate individual cells, only complete rows. -->

    <figure>
      <title>Eine einfache zweispaltige Liste</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="149" fileref="images/controls-list.png" format="PNG" width="179"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-list.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Picture of list control containing two unsorted columns of
          text</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Always give list controls a label, positioned above or to the
        left of the list, in <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence
        capitalization</link>. Provide an access key in the label that allows
        the user to give focus directly to the list.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Make the list control large enough that it can show at least
        four items at a time without scrolling. For lists of ten or more
        items, increase this minimum size as appropriate.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If the list appears in a dialog or utility window, consider
        making the window and the list within it resizable so that the user
        can choose how many list items are visible at a time without
        scrolling. Each time the user opens this dialog, set its dimensions to
        those that the user last resized it to.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not use lists with less than about five items, unless the
        number of items may increase over time. Use <link linkend="controls-check-boxes">check boxes</link>, <link linkend="controls-radio-buttons">radio buttons</link> or an <link linkend="controls-option-menus">drop-down list</link> if there are fewer
        items.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Verwenden Sie Spaltenköpfe nur dann, wenn:</para>

        <itemizedlist>
          <listitem>
            <para>die Liste mehr als eine Spalte enthält, oder</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>die Liste nur eine Spalte enthält, aber der Benutzer die Reihenfolge der Liste umstellen kann. Das ist allerdings kaum nützlich bei einer einspaltigen Liste.</para>
          </listitem>
        </itemizedlist>

        <para>In den meisten anderen Situationen nehmen Spaltenköpfe nur unnötig Raum ein, und das zusätzliche Label erzeugt eine gewisse visuelle Zersplitterung.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Beschriften Sie stets vorhandene Spaltenköpfe. Falls die Spalte für eine Beschriftung zu schmal ist, verwenden Sie eine Minihilfe für diese Spalte. Ungeachtet des eigentlichen Zwecks stellt dies sicher, dass Hilfstechnologien den Benutzern mit visuellen Einschränkungen eine Beschreibung zur Verfügung stellen können.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Consider using a check box list for multiple-selection lists, as
        these make it more obvious that multiple selection is possible:</para>

        <figure>
          <title>A simple check box list</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="133" fileref="images/controls-list-checkbox.png" format="PNG" width="160"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-list-checkbox.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>Picture of list control with two columns. The first
              column consists of check boxes showing whether or not the
              corresponding item in the second column is selected for further
              action.</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <para>If you do this, you should normally set the list control itself
        to be single-selection, but this depends on the particular task for
        which it will be used.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>For multiple selection lists, show the number of items currently
        selected in a static text label below the list, for example,
        <guilabel>Names selected: 3</guilabel>. Such a label also makes it
        more obvious that multiple selection is possible.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Consider providing <guibutton>Select All</guibutton> and
        <guibutton>Deselect All</guibutton> buttons beside multiple selection
        lists, if appropriate.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <sect2 id="controls-lists-sortable">
      <title>Sortierbare Listen</title>
      <para>Users often prefer to sort long lists, either alphabetically or
	      numerically, to make it easier to find items. Allow users
	      to sort long or multi-column lists by clicking on the column
	      header they want to sort.
      </para>
      <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
	      <listitem><para>
		Indicate which column is currently sorted by showing an
		upward or downward facing arrow in its header:</para>
	  <informaltable frame="all">
            <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
                <thead>
	              <row>
		      <entry>Sortierreihenfolge</entry>
                      <entry>Pfeilrichtung</entry>
		      <entry>Beispiel</entry>
                    </row>
                </thead>
            <tbody>
                  <row>
		  <entry>Natürlich</entry>
		  <entry>Down</entry>
		 <entry>Alphabetical; smallest number first;
			  earliest date first; checked items first</entry>
                </row>
                  <row>
		  <entry>Umkehren</entry>
		  <entry>Pfeiltaste hoch</entry>
		  <entry>Reverse alphabetical; largest number first;
		  	most recent date first; unchecked items first)</entry>
                </row>
            </tbody>
             </tgroup>
              </informaltable>
      </listitem>
      <listitem><para>Clicking an unsorted column header sorts the 
		      column in natural order, indicated by showing a
		      down arrow in its header.</para></listitem>

      <listitem><para>Clicking a column header sorted in natural order
		      re-sorts it in reverse order, indicated by
		      showing an up arrow in its header.</para>
	      
		      <note><title>Unsortierte Listen</title>
	    		<para> Occasionally, 
		      an unsorted state may be useful, for example to
		      show items in the order in which the user added 
		      them to the list.
		      In such cases, clicking a column sorted in reverse
		      order should un-sort it, indicated by removing the
		      arrow from the column header.</para>
	    	      <para>Usually, however,
		      this is better achieved by adding an extra column
		      that the user can sort in the usual way, such as a 
		      sequence
		      number column in this example.
      		</para></note>
	</listitem>

	</itemizedlist>

    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-trees">
    <title>Baumansichten</title>

    <para>A tree control allows the user to inspect, manipulate or select from
    a hierarchichal list of items. Trees may have one or more columns, and
    contain text, graphics, simple controls, or a combination of all three.</para>

    <tip>
      <title>Verwenden Sie Baumansichten sparsam!</title>

      <para>Because of their complexity compared to other controls, novice and
      some intermediate users often have problems using and understanding tree
      controls. If your application is designed for that type of user, you
      might want to consider alternative ways of presenting the information,
      such as the Nautilus list or icon view, or the hierarchical browser
      lists found in <ulink url="http://www.gnustep.it/enrico/gworkspace/viewer.html">GNUstep's
      File Viewer</ulink>.</para>
    </tip>

    <figure>
      <title>A simple tree control with one level of hierarchy</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="277" fileref="images/controls-tree.png" format="PNG" width="343"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-tree.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Picture of tree control showing months of the year as top
          level nodes, and public holidays in those months as their children</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!-- CB-Fig: Trees are usually used for navigation, so it's probably best to illustrate a tree in that context (GnomeCC, for example). -->

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Always give tree controls a label, positioned above or to the
        left of the tree, in <link linkend="layout-capitalization">sentence
        capitalization</link>. Provide an access key in the label that allows
        the user to give focus directly to the tree.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use column headers when:</para>

        <itemizedlist>
          <listitem>
            <para>the tree has more than one column</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>the tree has only one column, but the user may wish to
            re-order the tree. This should rarely be true of single column
            trees.</para>
          </listitem>
        </itemizedlist>

        <para>In den meisten anderen Situationen nehmen Spaltenköpfe nur unnötig Raum ein, und das zusätzliche Label erzeugt eine gewisse visuelle Zersplitterung.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Beschriften Sie stets vorhandene Spaltenköpfe. Falls die Spalte für eine Beschriftung zu schmal ist, verwenden Sie eine Minihilfe für diese Spalte. Ungeachtet des eigentlichen Zwecks stellt dies sicher, dass Hilfstechnologien den Benutzern mit visuellen Einschränkungen eine Beschreibung zur Verfügung stellen können.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Consider using a check box tree for multiple-selection trees, as
        these make it more obvious that multiple selection is possible:</para>

        <figure>
          <title>A simple check box tree</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="297" fileref="images/controls-tree-checkbox.png" format="PNG" width="349"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-tree-checkbox.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>Picture of tree control with two columns. The first
              column consists of check boxes showing whether or not the
              corresponding item in the second column is selected for further
              action.</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <para>If you do this, you should normally set the tree control itself
        to be single-selection, but this depends on the particular task for
        which it will be used.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>For multiple selection trees, show the number of items currently
        selected in a static text label below the tree, for example,
        <guilabel>Names selected: 3</guilabel>. Such a label also makes it
        more obvious that multiple selection is possible.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Consider providing <guibutton>Select All</guibutton> and
        <guibutton>Deselect All</guibutton> buttons beside multiple selection
        trees, if appropriate to the task.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <sect2 id="controls-trees-sortable">
	    <title>Sortierbare Baumansichten</title>
	    <para>As with lists, the user may find it useful to sort long or
	    multi-column trees. See the guidelines in 
	    <xref linkend="controls-lists-sortable"/> for 
	    more information.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-notebooks">
    <title>Reitermappen</title>

    <para>A tabbed notebook control is a convenient way of presenting related
    information in the same window, without having to display it all at the
    same time. It is analogous to the divider tabs in a ring binder or a file
    cabinet.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>A typical notebook control with three tabs</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="270" fileref="images/controls-notebook.png" format="PNG" width="341"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-notebook.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Picture of notebook control with three tabs</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!-- CB-Fig: Maybe I'm off, so if I am, then just ignore, but I'm concerned with terminology in the HIG at this point; maybe it's just one of those wizard/druid issues that are just here to stay because GNOME is GNOME, but I think people are more familiar with the term "Tabs" instead of the term "Pages," and "Tabbed pane" instead of "notebooks."  That's what they are called in JLF, anyway.   Callouts would also be nice here. -->

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not put too many pages in the same notebook. If you cannot
        see all the tabs without scrolling or splitting them into multiple
        rows, you are probably using too many and should use a list control
        instead. See the <link linkend="controls-too-many-tabs">example below</link>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label tabs with <link linkend="layout-capitalization">header
        capitalization</link>, and use nouns rather than verbs, for example
        <guilabel>Font</guilabel> or <guilabel>Alignment</guilabel>. Try to
        keep all labels in a notebook the same general length.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not assign access keys to tab labels, as this means you
        cannot use those access keys for any other control on
        <emphasis>any</emphasis> of the notebook pages without conflict. Even
        if you are able to assign access keys that would not conflict, it is
        better not to as it may be impossible to avoid the conflict when your
        application is translated to other languages. Assign an access key to
        every other control on each page, however.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not design a notebook such that changing controls on one page
        affects the controls on any other page. Users are unlikely to discover
        such dependencies.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If a control affects only one notebook page, place it on that
        notebook page. If it affects every page in the notebook, place it
        outside the notebook control, for example beside the window's
        <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use tabs that are proportional to the width of their labels.
        Don't just set all the tabs to the same width, as this makes them
        harder to scan visually, and limits the number of tabs you can fit
        into the notebook without scrolling. For example:</para>

        <figure>
          <title>Fixed- and proportional-width tabs (preferred)</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="92" fileref="images/controls-notebook-tabs.png" format="PNG" width="475"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-notebook-tabs.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>Side-by-side comparison of one notebook whose tabs are
              all the same width, and one whose tabs are only wide enough to
              accommodate the tab labels. The latter takes up around 33% less
              screen space.</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>
      </listitem>

      <!-- CB-Fig: callouts, shorter caption -->

      <listitem>
        <para>Although the contents of each page in a notebook will take up a
        different amount of space, do not use larger than normal spacing
        around the controls in the "emptier" pages, and do not center
        the controls on the page.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If your tab labels include icons, choose whether or not to show
        the icons at runtime based on the user's preference in the GNOME
        Menus and Toolbars desktop preferences dialog. Always show the text
        part of the label, however.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>If you have more than about six tabs in a notebook, use a list
    control instead of tabs to switch between the pages of controls. For
    example:</para>

    <figure id="controls-too-many-tabs">
      <title>Use of list control where there would be too many tabs to fit
      comfortably in a notebook</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="200" fileref="images/controls-notebook-list.png" format="PNG" width="370"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-notebook-list.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Part of a window including a list control with 7 items, each
          item representing a category of settings such as
          "Appearance" and "Navigation". The controls in the
          rest of the window change depending on which item is selected in the
          list.</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <para>As in this example, place the list control on the left-hand side of
    the window, with the dynamic portion of the window immediately to its
    right. <remark>Should this be reversed for right-to-left locales?</remark></para>

	<sect2 id="controls-tab-status">
	  <title>Statusanzeiger</title>
	  <para>In some tabbed windows, such as preference windows, it might be desirable to indicate the status of a particular tab. This can be used to notify the user that a web page that is still loading or has been loaded, a new message is waiting in a particular instant messaging conversation, or that a document has not been saved. Such a status indicator should be an icon that is placed directly to the left of the tab label. Additionally, the tab label's color might be changed to indicate a certain status. Do not simply rely on a different coloring scheme for status indication.</para>
	</sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-progress-bars">
    <title>Fortschrittsbalken</title>

    <para>Progress bars are visual indicators of the progress of a task being
    carried out by the application, and provide important <link linkend="feedback-types">feedback</link>. For information on using a
    progress bar within a progress window, see <xref linkend="windows-progress"/>.</para>

    <para>You can use two main types of progress bars in your application—
    measured-progress bars and indeterminate-progress bars (the kind that
    bounce back and forth). In addition there are three types of measured
    progress bars.</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Always use a measured progress bar when the length of a task can
        be precisely or approximately predicted. Otherwise, use an <link linkend="indeterminate-progress">indeterminate progress indicator</link>
        or a <link linkend="progress-checklists">checklist window</link>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Ensure that a measured-progress bar measures an operation's
        total time or total work, not just that of a single step. An exception
        is a progress bar that measures the total time or work of the current
        step in a progress checklist.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <sect2 id="time-remaining">
      <title>Time-remaining Progress Indicator</title>

      <para>An animation consisting of a bar whose changing length indicates
      how much time remains in an operation, and text stating how much time
      remains before the operation will be complete. Time-remaining bars are
      the most useful type of progress bar.</para>

      <figure>
        <title>A simple 'time remaining' progress bar</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata width="386" fileref="images/controls-progress-time.png" format="PNG" depth="38"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/controls-progress-time.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>A simple time-remaining progress dialog</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <para>Use a time-remaining bar if your application will display an
      initial estimate of an operation's remaining time and then
      periodically display updated estimates. Each updated estimate should be
      based on changes that have occurred and that will cause the operation to
      finish more quickly or more slowly. If the operation will finish more
      slowly, your application can display an updated estimate that is greater
      than the estimate previously displayed.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="typical-time">
      <title>Typical-time Progress Indicator</title>

      <para>A bar whose changing length indicates how much time remains if an
      operation takes as long as it typically does. Typical-time bars are the
      least precise type of measured-progress bar, but they are more useful
      than indeterminate-progress bars.</para>

      <figure>
        <title>A simple 'typical time remaining' progress bar</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="32" fileref="images/controls-progress-typical.png" format="PNG" width="385"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/controls-progress-typical.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>A simple 'typical time remaining' progress dialog</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <para>For some operations, you cannot estimate the time remaining or the
      proportion of work completed. However, if you can estimate the typical
      time for that operation, you can provide feedback with a typical-time
      bar.</para>

      <para>If your application overestimates the completed amount of work,
      the length of the bar can indicate "almost complete" until the
      operation is complete. If your application underestimates how much work
      is complete, the application can fill the remaining portion of the bar
      when the operation is complete.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="indeterminate-progress">
      <title>Indeterminate-progress indicator</title>

      <para>An animated bar indicating only that an operation is ongoing, not
      how long it will take. One example is the "throbber" in a web
      browser. Indeterminate-progress bars are the least precise type of
      progress bar.</para>

      <figure>
        <title>A simple 'indeterminate time' progress bar; the slider
        moves from left-to-right and back again until the operation is
        complete</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="210" fileref="images/controls-progress-indeterminate.png" format="PNG" width="409"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/controls-progress-indeterminate.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>A simple 'indeterminate time' progress dialog,
            showing a slider moving back and forth until the operation is
            complete</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <!-- CB-Fig: Above figure may benefit from showing the slider away from the right or left edge; otherwise it looks like the other progress bars, slightly modified. -->

      <para>Use an indeterminate-progress bar to provide feedback only for
      operations whose duration you cannot estimate at all.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-status-bars">
    <title>Statusleisten</title>

    <para>A statusbar is an area at the bottom of a window that can be used
    to display brief information about the status of the application.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Eine einfache Statusleiste</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="53" fileref="images/controls-status-bar.png" format="PNG" width="244"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-status-bar.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>A statusbar at the bottom of a document window, showing
          current zoom level and a status message indicating that the document
          has been modified since it was last saved</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!-- CB-Fig: callouts -->

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use statusbars only in application or document windows. Do not
        use them in dialogs, alerts or other secondary windows.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Only place a statusbar along the bottom of a window.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Only use statusbars to display non-critical information. This
        might include:</para>

        <itemizedlist>
          <listitem>
            <para>general information about the document or application. For
            example, current connection status in a network application, or
            the size of the current document in a text editor.</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>information about the task the user is currently performing.
            For example, while using the selection tool in a drawing
            application, "Hold Shift to extend the selection"</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>progress of a background operation. For example,
            "Sending to printer", "Printing page 10 of 20",
            "Printing Complete".</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>a description of the control or area of the window under the
            mouse pointer. For example, "Drop files here to upload
            them"</para>
          </listitem>
        </itemizedlist>

        <para>Remember that statusbars are normally in the user's
        peripheral vision, and can even be turned off altogether using the
        application's <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Status
        Bar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item. The user may therefore never
        see anything you display there, unless they know when and where to
        look for it.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>When there is no interesting status to report, leave a status
        bar panel blank rather than displaying something uninformative like
        "Ready". This way, when something interesting does appear in
        the statusbar, the user is more likely to notice it.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If you want to make all or part of your statusbar interactive,
        use the following conventions:</para>

        <itemizedlist>
          <!--<listitem><para>Raised or button-like appearance for areas that respond to a single click</para></listitem>-->

          <listitem>
            <para>Inlaid appearance for areas that respond to a double click</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>Flat appearance for areas that are not interactive</para>
          </listitem>
        </itemizedlist>

        <!-- CB-Ed: I have never seen a button in a statusbar area before.  I'll bet this is deprecated, or should be.  Do you have data to back this up?  And doesn't this conflict with one of the previous bullet points: Only use statusbars to display non-critical information?  A cancel button is certainly not trivial. -->

        <!-- CFB: removed this recommendation for now -->

        <para>In <xref linkend="status-bar-figure"/>, the appearance
        indicates that the left area would respond to a double click (perhaps
        by saving the document), and the progress indicator on the right is
        non-interactive.</para>

        <figure id="status-bar-figure">
          <title>Eine interaktive Statusleiste</title>

          <mediaobject>
            <imageobject>
              <imagedata depth="58" fileref="images/controls-status-bar-interactive.png" format="PNG" width="461"/>
            </imageobject>

            <imageobject>
              <imagedata fileref="images/controls-status-bar-interactive.eps" format="EPS"/>
            </imageobject>

            <textobject>
              <phrase>A statusbar with a text panel that responds to a double
              click, a button that responds to a single click, and a
              non-interactive progress area</phrase>
            </textobject>
          </mediaobject>
        </figure>

        <para>Ensure that double-clicking in the status area does not provide
        any functionality that is not also available in the main application
        menu bar, or by some other accessible means.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Provide a drag handle in the bottom right corner of the status
        bar of resizeable windows. Subclasses of GtkStatusbar should use the
        drag handle provided by that class. A reimplementation of a status
        bar, which is discouraged, should also reimplement the GtkStatusbar
        drag handle in both appearance and function.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="controls-frames">
    <title>Rahmen und Trenner</title>

    <para>A frame is a box with a title that you can draw around controls to
    organise them into functional groups. A separator is a single horizontal
    or vertical line that you can use to divide windows into functional
    groups.</para>

    <para>Frames with a border around their perimeter have traditionally been
    used for denoting groups of related controls. This is advantageous because
    it physically separates dissimilar controls, and also avoids repetition of
    the frame's label in individual member control labels. Unfortunately,
    they add visual noise that can both make a window appear more complex than
    it really is, and reduce the ability to quickly scan window elements.</para>

    <para>Rather than using bordered frames, use frames without borders, bold
    labels to make the categories stand out, and indented contents. This,
    combined with good layout and spacing, is usually a better alternative to
    bordered frames.</para>

    <figure>
      <title>Preferred frame style, using bold labels, spacing and indentation</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="256" fileref="images/controls-frames.png" format="PNG" width="288"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-frames.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Frame showing the preferred style described above</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <figure>
      <title>Traditional frame style, using borders (deprecated)</title>

      <mediaobject>
        <imageobject>
          <imagedata depth="275" fileref="images/controls-old-frames.png" format="PNG" width="296"/>
        </imageobject>

        <imageobject>
          <imagedata fileref="images/controls-old-frames.eps" format="EPS"/>
        </imageobject>

        <textobject>
          <phrase>Frame showing the traditional style described above</phrase>
        </textobject>
      </mediaobject>
    </figure>

    <!--    <para>See <xref linkend="window-layout-spacing"/> for technical details on implementing the preferred frame style in gtk.</para> -->

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Before you add a frame with a visible border or separator to any
        window, consider carefully if you really need it. It is usually better
        to do without, if the groups can be separated by space alone. Do not
        use frames and separators to compensate for poor control layout or
        alignment.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not mix framed and unframed groups in the same window.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Do not nest one frame inside another. This results in visual
        clutter.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If all the items in a group are disabled, disable the group title too.</para>
      </listitem>

    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>
</chapter>


<chapter id="feedback">
  <title>Rückmeldungen</title>

  <sect1 id="feedback-responsiveness">
    <title>Characteristics of Responsive Applications</title>

    <para>Although highly responsive applications can differ widely from one
    another, they share the following characteristics:</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
        <para>They give immediate feedback to users, even when they cannot
        fulfill their requests immediately.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>They handle queued requests as users would expect, discarding
        requests that are no longer relevant and reordering requests according
        to users' probable priorities.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>They let users do other work while long operations proceed to
        completion— especially operations not requested by users— such as
        reclaiming unused memory or other "housekeeping" operations.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>They provide enough feedback for users to understand what they
        are doing, and organize feedback according to users' abilities to
        comprehend and react to it.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>They let users know when processing is in progress.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>They let users know or estimate how long lengthy operations will
        take.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>They let users set the pace of work, when possible, and they let
        users stop requested tasks that have started but not finished.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <!-- CB-Ed: Collapse some of the items in the list above, they are similar or have lots of overlap.  -->

    <para>Highly responsive applications put users in control by quickly
    acknowledging each user request, by providing continuous feedback about
    progress toward fulfilling each request, and by letting users complete
    tasks without unacceptable delays.</para>

    <para>Even applications with attractive, intuitive user interfaces can
    lack responsiveness. Typically, unresponsive applications have at least
    one of the following problems:</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
        <para>They provide late feedback— or no feedback— for users'
        requests, leaving users wondering what the application has done or is
        doing.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>When performing extended operations, they prevent users from
        doing other work or cancelling the extended operation.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>They fail to display estimates of how long extended operations
        will last, forcing users to wait for unpredictable periods.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>They ignore users' requests while doing unrequested
        "housekeeping", forcing users to wait at unpredictable times—
        often without feedback.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>You can sometimes possible to improve an application's
    responsiveness without speeding up the application's code. For tips on
    how to make such improvements, see <xref linkend="feedback-responding-to-user"/>.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="feedback-response-times">
    <title>Akzeptable Reaktionszeiten</title>

    <para>Some user interface events require shorter response delays than
    others. For example, an application's response to a user's mouse
    click or key press needs to be much faster than its response to a request
    to save a file. The table below shows the maximum acceptable response
    delay for typical interface events.</para>

    <table frame="all">
      <title>Maximale akzeptable Reaktionszeiten für typische Events</title>

      <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
        <thead>
          <row>
            <entry>UI Event</entry>

            <entry>Maximale akzeptable Reaktionszeit</entry>
          </row>
        </thead>

        <tbody>
          <row>
            <entry>Mouse click, pointer movement, window movement or resizing,
            keypress, button press, drawing gesture, other UI input event
            involving hand-eye co-ordination</entry>

            <entry>0,1 Sekunde</entry>
          </row>

          <row>
            <entry>Displaying progress indicators, completing ordinary user
            commands (e.g. closing a window), completing background tasks
            (e.g. reformatting a table)</entry>

            <entry>1,0 Sekunde</entry>
          </row>

          <row>
            <entry>Displaying a graph or anything else a typical user would
            expect to take time (e.g. displaying a new list of all a
            company's financial transactions for an accounting period)</entry>

            <entry>10,0 Sekunden</entry>
          </row>

          <row>
            <entry>Accepting and processing all user input to any task</entry>

            <entry>10,0 Sekunden</entry>
          </row>
        </tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </table>

    <para>Make each response delay in your application as short as possible,
    unless users need time to see the displayed information before it is
    erased. The acceptable response delay for each event is based on a typical
    user's sense that the event is a logical point at which to stop or
    pause. The greater that sense is, the more willingly the user will wait
    for a response. Verify that your application responds to users'
    requests within the limits listed in the table above. If your application
    cannot respond within those limits, it probably has one or more general
    problems caused by a particular algorithm or module.</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Verify that your application provides feedback within 100
        milliseconds (0.1 second) after each key press, movement of the mouse,
        or other physical input from the user.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Verify that your application provides feedback within 100
        milliseconds (0.1 second) after each change in the state of controls
        that react to input from the user— for example, displaying menus or
        indicating drop targets.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Verify that your application takes no longer than 1 second to
        display each progress indicator, complete each ordinary user command,
        or complete each background task.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Verify that your application takes no longer than 10 seconds to
        accept and process all user input to any task—including user input to
        each step of a multistep task, such as a wizard.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="feedback-responding-to-user">
    <title>Reaktion auf Benutzereingaben</title>

    <para>If your application takes too long to respond, users will become
    frustrated. Use these techniques to improve the responsiveness of your
    application.</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Display feedback as soon as possible.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If you cannot display all the information that a user has
        requested, display the most important information first.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Save time by displaying approximate results while calculating
        finished results.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If users are likely to repeat a time-consuming command in rapid
        succession, save time by faking the command's effects instead of
        repeatedly processing the command. For example, if a user adds several
        rows to a table stored in a database, you might display each new row
        immediately but delay actually creating each new row in the database
        until the user finished adding all the rows.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Work ahead. Prepare to perform the command that is most likely
        to follow the current command. That is, use idle time to anticipate
        users' probable next requests. For example, as the user of an
        email application reads the currently displayed new message, the
        application might prepare to display the next new message.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use background processing. Perform less important tasks —such as
        housekeeping— in the background, enabling users to continue working.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Delay work that is not urgent. Perform it later, when more time
        is available.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Discard unnecessary operations. For example, to move back
        several pages in a web browser, a user might click the browser's
        <guibutton>Back</guibutton> button several times in rapid succession.
        To display the final requested page more quickly, the browser might
        not display the pages visited between the current page and that final
        page.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use dynamic time management. At run time, change how your
        application prioritizes user input and other processing, based on the
        application's current state. For example, if a user is typing text
        in one word-processing document while printing another, the
        word-processing application might delay the printing task if the user
        shifts to an editing task (such as cutting and pasting text) that
        requires greater resources.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>In your application, display an estimate of how long each
        lengthy operation will take.</para>

        <itemizedlist>
          <listitem>
            <para>If a command might take longer than 5 seconds to complete
            its work on an object, allow users to interact with any parts of
            the object and parts of the application that are not directly
            affected by the command.</para>
          </listitem>

          <listitem>
            <para>If a command provides lengthy output, show partial results
            as they become available. Scroll the results (if necessary) until
            the user moves input focus to a component (e.g. a scrollbar or
            text area) involved in the scrolling.</para>
          </listitem>
        </itemizedlist>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="feedback-types">
    <title>Typen visueller Rückmeldungen</title>

    <para>You can use two types of visual feedback for operations in your
    application— pointer feedback and progress animations.</para>

    <sect2 id="pointer-feedback">
      <title>Rückmeldung über den Mauszeiger</title>

      <para>Pointer feedback changes the shape of the pointer. For example, a
      busy pointer indicates that an operation is in progress and that the
      user cannot do other tasks. A busy-interactive pointer indicates that an
      operation is in progress but the window is still interactive.</para>

      <figure>
        <title>Busy pointer (left) and Busy-Interactive pointer (right)</title>

        <mediaobject>
          <imageobject>
            <imagedata depth="28" fileref="images/feedback-pointers-busy.png" format="PNG" width="58"/>
          </imageobject>

          <imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/feedback-pointers-busy.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>

          <textobject>
            <phrase>Busy pointer (left) and busy-interactive pointer (right)</phrase>
          </textobject>
        </mediaobject>
      </figure>

      <!-- CB-Fig: Replace above figure with one that is cleaned up.  -->
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="progress-animations">
      <title>Progress Animations</title>

      <para>Progress animations show either how much of an operation is
      complete, or only that an operation is ongoing. Normally, these take the
      form of either a progress bar or a progress checklist.</para>

      <itemizedlist>
        <title>Richtlinien</title>

        <listitem>
          <para>When displaying a progress animation, open it as soon as
          possible after you know it is required, and close it automatically
          as soon as the associated operation is complete.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>Use a measured-progress bar if your application can estimate
          either how long the operation will take, or what proportion of the
          operation is complete.</para>
        </listitem>

        <listitem>
          <para>If your application can make neither estimate, and the
          operation only has one step, use an <link linkend="indeterminate-progress">indeterminate-progress bar</link>.
          For operations with two or more steps, use a <link linkend="progress-checklists">progress checklist</link> that
          dynamically displays a check mark for each completed step.</para>
        </listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <sect3 id="progress-bars">
      <title>Fortschrittsbalken</title>
      <para>For information on different types of progress bars and when to use
            them see <xref linkend="controls-progress-bars"/>.</para>

        <sect4 id="progress-windows-vs-status-bar">
          <title>Progress Windows vs. the Statusbar</title>

          <para>In an application where the <link linkend="windows-primary">primary
          windows</link> contain a <link linkend="controls-status-bars">status
          bar</link> (which in turn contains a progress bar), it will often be
          the case that an operation's feedback could be presented in
          either the statusbar or a <link linkend="windows-progress">progress
          window</link>. A rule of thumb is to use the statusbar when an
          operation is expected to take fewer than ten seconds, otherwise use
          a progress window. However, do consider the following when choosing
          between the two:</para>

          <itemizedlist>
            <listitem>
              <para>Opening a new window, particularly when an operation is
              short, can needlessly disrupt the user's workflow.</para>
            </listitem>

            <listitem>
              <para>Progress windows can convey more information.</para>
            </listitem>

            <listitem>
              <para>Multiple progress windows can be open at once, whereas
              only a single operation can be presented in a statusbar.</para>
            </listitem>

            <listitem>
              <para>Progress windows provide a <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
              button.</para>
            </listitem>
          </itemizedlist>
        </sect4>
      </sect3>

      <sect3 id="progress-checklists">
        <title>Checklisten-Fenster</title>

        <para>A checklist window shows the sequence of stages in an operation.
        See <xref linkend="progress-window-checklists"/>.
	
	<figure><title>A Checklist Window</title>
	
	<mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/feedback-checklist-running.png" format="PNG" width="336" depth="220"/></imageobject>
	<textobject><phrase>A
        checklist window showing a sequence of steps</phrase></textobject>
	
	<imageobject>
            <imagedata fileref="images/feedback-checklist-running.eps" format="EPS"/>
          </imageobject>
        </mediaobject>
	  
	  </figure></para>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="feedback-choosing">
    <title>Choosing Appropriate Feedback</title>

    <para>To determine which type of visual feedback to provide for a
    particular operation, consider these factors:</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
        <para>Whether your application can provide an estimate of the
        operation's progress.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Whether the operation blocks the user from issuing further
        commands in your application.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Whether your application has a dedicated space, such as a status
        bar, for indicating the status of operations.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>The table below shows which type of feedback to provide for
    operations that usually take at least 1 second to finish. In the
    "Appropriate Feedback" column, "Internal progress
    animations" means progress animations displayed in an
    application's dedicated status area, and "External progress
    animations" means progress animations displayed somewhere other than
    in a dedicated status area— typically, in an alert box.</para>

    <table frame="all">
      <title>Visual feedback types for operations that take at least 1 second</title>

      <tgroup align="left" cols="4">
        <thead>
          <row>
            <entry>Typical Duration &gt; 5 seconds?</entry>

            <entry>User blocked from issuing further commands?</entry>

            <entry>Application has dedicated status area?</entry>

            <entry>Appropriate feedback</entry>
          </row>
        </thead>

        <tbody>
          <row>
            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Internal animation plus pointer feedback</entry>
          </row>

          <row>
            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>Pointer feedback</entry>
          </row>

          <row>
            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Internal animation</entry>
          </row>

          <row>
            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Internal animation plus pointer feedback</entry>
          </row>

          <row>
            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>External animation plus pointer feedback</entry>
          </row>

          <row>
            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>Ja</entry>

            <entry>Internal animation</entry>
          </row>

          <row>
            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>Nein</entry>

            <entry>External animation</entry>
          </row>
        </tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </table>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Use a busy pointer whenever users are blocked from interaction
        with your application for 1 second or longer. Display the busy pointer
        less than 1 second after the operation begins.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>If a command will likely take 10 seconds or longer to finish,
        provide a <guibutton>Stop</guibutton> or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
        button, which can also be activated by pressing <keycap>Esc</keycap>,
        that lets users terminate the command's processing even if your
        application cannot undo the command's effects. See <xref linkend="feedback-interrupting"/>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>When using an external animation, leave the window containing
        the animation on-screen for at least 1 second after the operation has
        completed, with a successful completion message. Change the
        <guibutton>Stop</guibutton> or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to
        an <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button during this period— pressing this
        button should close the window immediately.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="feedback-interrupting">
    <title>Allowing Interruptions</title>

    <para>Users sometimes need to stop a command— for example, because it is
    taking too long. Your application should let users stop commands in
    progress, even if stopping a command cannot undo or "roll back"
    all the command's effects.</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <title>Richtlinien</title>

      <listitem>
        <para>Place a <guibutton>Stop</guibutton> or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
        button, which can also be activated by pressing <keycap>Esc</keycap>,
        near the progress animation for the interruptable command.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label the button <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> if the whole
        operation can be cleanly abandoned with no side effects, leaving the
        system in the state it was in prior to the operation beginning.
        Terminate the command immediately when the user presses this button.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>Label the button <guibutton>Stop</guibutton> if the command can
        be interrupted, but its effects up to that point cannot (or should
        not) be reversed. When the user presses this button, open an alert box
        that warns of the potential side effects of stopping the command. The
        alert box should have only two buttons: one for continuing the
        command's processing, and one for immediately terminating it.</para>
      </listitem>

      <!-- CB-Fig: Figure here showing example alertbox in context (overlaying the progress animation in a dialog, etc.) with sample alerbox text. JLFDG AT p. 107 shows this. (Fig 66) -->
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>Alternatively, you can place the <guibutton>Stop</guibutton> or
    <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button near the control with which the user
    issued the command that needs to be stopped. Place the button here only
    if:</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
        <para>There is no progress animation for the command, or</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
        <para>The progress animation is in a window's status area or in
        another location that lacks space for a <guibutton>Stop</guibutton> or
        <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>In the alert box that appears after pressing a
    <guibutton>Stop</guibutton> button, ensure the message and button labels
    in the alert box are specific and precise. Ambiguous button labels can
    cause users to terminate or continue a command unintentionally. For
    example, use:</para>

    <para><screen>Continue deleting files? <guibutton>[Continue Deleting]</guibutton>
    <guibutton>[Stop Deleting]</guibutton></screen></para>

    <para>anstelle von</para>

    <para><screen>Operation interrupted, continue? <guibutton>[Yes]</guibutton>
    <guibutton>[No]</guibutton></screen></para>

    <para>since in the latter example, it is not clear whether pressing
    <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> would continue the operation or continue the
    interruption (i.e. cancel the operation).</para>
  </sect1>
</chapter>



<chapter id="design">

  <title>Visuelles Design</title>

  <para>Visual design is not just about making your application look pretty.  Good visual design is about communication.  A well-designed application will make it easy for the user to understand the information that is being presented, and show them clearly how they can interact with that information.  If you can achieve all that, your application <emphasis>will</emphasis> look good to the user, even if it doesn't have any fancy graphics or spinning logos!</para>
  <!-- GJM: This kind of folksy remark really is not appropriate at all. -->
  <!-- TODO:
  - More than any other section this needs to be liberally sprinkled with examples
  -->

  <!-- Color section based on Coleen's HTML draft -->

  <sect1 id="design-color">
    <title>Farbe</title>

    <para>Color is a good tool for communicating information in a user interface. For example, it can be used to:</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem><para>strengthen a desktop's look and feel by enhancing a theme</para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>accent a dynamic alert in a system management application</para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>emphasize an element in a long list to expedite scanning</para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>add aesthetically pleasing details to an icon</para></listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>However, color should always be regarded as a useful addition to your design, not as a necessity. Never depend upon colors alone to display important information, and keep in mind that if colors cannot be perceived correctly (for example, the user has an 8-bit system, or is color-blind), your application should still be usable. </para>

    <sect2 id="Palette">
      <title>Palette</title>
      
      <!-- primary contributor to the href="http://primates.ximian.com/~tigert/new_stock_project/" GNOME stock icon repository -->
      
      <para>A 32-color palette has been developed for the GNOME desktop. The palette may be downloaded from <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gup/images/ximian-palette">http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gup/images/ximian-palette</ulink>. To use it in The GIMP, save it to your <filename>~/.gimp_1.2/palettes</filename> folder, and restart The GIMP. A single, consistently-used palette helps give a unified look and feel to the desktop while minimizing visual distractions. If you need a color that is darker or lighter than the colors in this basic palette (e.g., for anti-aliasing), choose a color that is closest to the hue you need, then darken or lighten as required.</para>

      <figure><title>The basic GNOME 32-color palette</title>
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>The basic GNOME 32-color palette</phrase></textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>
      
      <table frame="none"> 
	<title>RGB and hexadecimal values for the basic palette</title> 
	<tgroup cols="8" colsep="1" rowsep="0" align="left">
	  <thead> 
	    <row rowsep="1" valign="top"> 
	      <entry>Farbe</entry> 
	      <entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      <entry>RGB</entry>
	      <entry>Hex</entry>
	      <entry>Farbe</entry>
	      <entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      <entry>RGB</entry>
	      <entry>Hex</entry>
	    </row>
	  </thead>
	  <tbody valign="middle">
	    <row>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-1.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Basic 3D Hilight</entry>
	      <entry>234 232 227</entry>
	      <entry>#EAE8E3</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-2.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Basic 3D Medium</entry>
	      <entry>186 181 171</entry>
	      <entry>#BAB5AB</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-3.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Basic 3D Dark</entry>
	      <entry>128 125 116</entry>
	      <entry>#807D74</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-4.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-4.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>3D Shadow</entry>
	      <entry>86 82 72</entry>
	      <entry>#565248</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-5.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-5.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Green Hilight</entry>
	      <entry>197 210 200</entry>
	      <entry>#C5D2C8</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-6.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-6.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Green Medium</entry>
	      <entry>131 166 127</entry>
	      <entry>#83A67F</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-7.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-7.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Dunkelgrün</entry>
	      <entry>93 117 85</entry>
	      <entry>#5D7555</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-8.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-8.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Green Shadow</entry>
	      <entry>68 86 50</entry>
	      <entry>#445632</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-9.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-9.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Red Hilight</entry>
	      <entry>224 182 175</entry>
	      <entry>#E0B6AF</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-10.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-10.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Red Medium</entry>
	      <entry>193 102 90</entry>
	      <entry>#C1665A</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-11.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-11.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Dunkelrot</entry>
	      <entry>136 70 49</entry>
	      <entry>#884631</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-12.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-12.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Red Shadow</entry>
	      <entry>102 56 34</entry>
	      <entry>#663822</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-13.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-13.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Purple Hilight</entry>
	      <entry>173 167 200</entry>
	      <entry>#ADA7C8</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-14.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-14.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Purple Medium</entry>
	      <entry>136 127 163</entry>
	      <entry>#887FA3</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-15.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-15.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Dunkelpurpur</entry>
	      <entry>98 91 129</entry>
	      <entry>#625B81</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-16.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-16.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Purple Shadow</entry>
	      <entry>73 64 102</entry>
	      <entry>#494066</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-17.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-17.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Blue Hilight</entry>
	      <entry>157 184 210</entry>
	      <entry>#9DB8D2</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-18.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-18.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Blue Medium</entry>
	      <entry>117 144 174</entry>
	      <entry>#7590AE</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-19.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-19.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Dunkelblau</entry>
	      <entry>75 105 131</entry>
	      <entry>#4B6983</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-20.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-20.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Blue Shadow</entry>
	      <entry>49 78 108</entry>
	      <entry>#314E6C</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-21.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-21.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Face Skin Hilight</entry>
	      <entry>239 224 205</entry>
	      <entry>#EFE0CD</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-22.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-22.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Face Skin Medium</entry>
	      <entry>224 195 158</entry>
	      <entry>#E0C39E</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-23.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-23.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Face Skin Dark</entry>
	      <entry>179 145 105</entry>
	      <entry>#B39169</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-24.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-24.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Face Skin Shadow</entry>
	      <entry>130 102 71</entry>
	      <entry>#826647</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-25.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-25.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Accent Red</entry>
	      <entry>223 66 30</entry>
	      <entry>#DF421E</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-26.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-26.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Accent Red Dark</entry>
	      <entry>153 0 0</entry>
	      <entry>#990000</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-27.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-27.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Accent Yellow</entry>
	      <entry>238 214 128</entry>
	      <entry>#EED680</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-28.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-28.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Accent Yellow Dark</entry>
	      <entry>209 148 12</entry>
	      <entry>#D1940C</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-29.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-29.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Accent Green </entry>
	      <entry>70 160 70</entry>
	      <entry>#46A046</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-30.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-30.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Accent Green Dark</entry>
	      <entry>38 199 38</entry>
	      <entry>#267726</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-31.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-31.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Weiß</entry>
	      <entry>255 255 255</entry>
	      <entry>#ffffff</entry>
	      <entry><mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-32.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-palette-32.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		</mediaobject></entry>
	      <entry>Schwarz</entry>
	      <entry>0 0 0</entry>
	      <entry>#000000</entry>
	    </row>
	  </tbody>
	</tgroup>
      </table>
      
    </sect2>
    
    <sect2 id="hsv">
      <title>Sättigung, Helligkeit, Kontrast</title>
      
      <para>Users with vision disorders, such as color-blindness or low vision, require alternatives to default settings. A good user interface anticipates these needs by providing customizable preferences and support for accessible themes. Even better is an application that is already configured with carefully-chosen color and contrast defaults.</para>

      <para>An estimated 11% of the world population has some sort of color-blindness.  Those affected typically have trouble distinguishing between certain hues such as red and green (deuteranopia or protanopia), or blue and yellow (tritanopia). Therefore it is necessary to allow the user to customize colors in any part of your application that conveys important information. This means that your application must effectively convey information using just the colors from any theme that the user chooses<!--, and that attributes such as hue and brightness are adjustable in your application's preferences dialog -->.</para>
      
      <para>A useful tool for reviewing information about color-blindness and checking legibility of images for color-blind users is <ulink url="http://www.vischeck.com/">Vischeck</ulink>, an online tool that simulates the way an image or a website might appear to a user who has deuteranopia, protanopia, or tritanopia. </para>

      <figure><title>How the earth looks to a user with normal color vision (left), deuteranopia (middle), and tritanopia (right). (Images from <ulink url="http://www.vischeck.com">http://www.vischeck.com</ulink>).</title>
	
	<informaltable frame="none">
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="center">
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
		<entry>
	          <mediaobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-colorblind-normal.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-colorblind-normal.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		    <textobject><phrase>Photo of earth as a normally-sighted user would see it</phrase></textobject>
		  </mediaobject>
	        </entry>
		
		<entry>
	          <mediaobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-colorblind-deutan.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-colorblind-deutan.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		    <textobject><phrase>Photo of earth as a user with red-green color-blindness would see it</phrase></textobject>
		  </mediaobject>
	        </entry>
		<entry>
	          <mediaobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-colorblind-tritan.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-colorblind-tritan.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		    <textobject><phrase>Photo of earth as a user with blue-yellow color-blindness would see it</phrase></textobject>
		  </mediaobject>
	        </entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</informaltable>
      </figure>


      <para>Other users have more problems with contrast levels rather than hue on their screen. Some users require a high level of contrast between background and foreground colors, such as black on white, white on black, or some other high-contrast combination. Others can experience discomfort unless they use low-contrast settings, such as gray text on a lighter gray background.</para>

      <para>You can meet these needs by ensuring your application supports the accessible GNOME themes (found in the gnome-themes module in cvs), which include high and low contrast themes, and large print themes. This means you must supply default and large sizes of high-, low- and regular-contrast icon sets with your application. <!--See <xref linkend=""/> for information on how to design these icons.--></para>

      <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
	<listitem><para>Use the GNOME color palette. If you need a darker or lighter shade, start from one of the colors from the palette and darken or lighten as needed.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Do not use color as the only means to distinguish items of information. All such information should be provided by at least one other method, such as shape, position or textual description.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Ensure your application is not dependent on a particular theme. Test it with different themes, especially high and low contrast accessibility themes, which use fewer colors, to ensure your application respects the settings. For example, all text should appear in the foreground color against the background color specified in the chosen theme.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Select colors carefully.  When they need to be recognizably different, select the light colors from orange, yellow, green or blue-green, and darker colors from blue, violet, purple or red, as most people affected by color-blindness already see blue, violet, purple and red as darker than normal.</para></listitem>

      </itemizedlist>

    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="design-window">
    <title>Fensterlayout</title>
    
    <sect2>
      <title>Allgemein</title> 

      <para>Placement of visual components in an application is important because relationships between elements are indicated by their positions. This is called "layout" in interface design.</para>

      <para>A clean layout is crucial to creating a smooth visual flow of information for the user. This section describes the proper component placement and spacing to use in GNOME applications. The major components discussed will be labels, icons, radio buttons and check boxes, text fields, command buttons, and drop-down menus.</para>

    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="layout-dialogs">
      <title>Dialoge</title>
      
      <para>When a user is scanning a complex preferences dialog consisting of many labels and corresponding check boxes, text fields, and drop-down combination boxes, it is easy to see how she can quickly become hindered by poor layout in the visual design. For information on laying out Alerts, see <xref linkend="alert-spacing"/></para>

      <figure id="improved-layout-figure"><title>Verbessertes Fensterlayout</title>
	
	<informaltable frame="none">
	  <tgroup cols="2" align="center">
	    <tbody valign="top">
	      <row>
		<entry>
	          <mediaobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-layout-poor.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-layout-poor.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		    <textobject><phrase>Initial layout with poor alignment and limited use of white space</phrase></textobject>
		  </mediaobject>
	        </entry>
		
		<entry>
	          <mediaobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-layout-good.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-layout-good.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		    <textobject><phrase>Improved layout with fewer alignment points, frames removed to relieve clutter, and clearer grouping with use of white space</phrase></textobject>
		  </mediaobject>
	        </entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</informaltable>
      </figure>

      <!-- picture here of a complex preferences dialog, badly designed: right-aligned similar length labels, very little spacing between elements (vertically), varying spaces between elements (horizontally) -->

      <para>In <xref linkend="improved-layout-figure"/>, the dialog on the left presents labels which are not left-aligned. The user's eye is not given a proper anchor to scan the dialog quickly.</para>

      <para>As the labels are all similar in length, they should be left-aligned. Now the user has a firm left margin to anchor the eye and scan the list of items vertically more easily. If most of the labels in a group greatly differ in length, right-align them instead, so that the controls do not end up too far away from their corresponding labels.</para>

      <para>Using frames with visible borders to separate groups within a window is deprecated. Use spacing and bold headers instead. This is more effective because there are fewer gratuitous lines to distract the user from the main content in the window. See <xref linkend="controls-frames"/> for more details.</para>

      <para>Try to keep components consonant with each other in terms of size and alignment. This is particularly important within a group of controls, so that the user's ability to quickly scan information is not sacrificed.  Minimize as much as possible the need for the user's eye to jump around when scanning a layout.</para>
      
      <figure id="layout-callouts-figure"><title>Layout specifications</title>
	
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-layout-annotated.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-layout-annotated.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>Improved layout with fewer alignment points, frames removed to relieve clutter, and clearer grouping with use of white space</phrase></textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>
      
      <!-- Figure here of the above paragraph, giving examples -->

      <itemizedlist> <title>Richtlinien</title>
	<listitem><para>Lassen Sie einen 12 Pixel breiten Rand zwischen dem Fensterrahmen und den nächstliegenden Bedienelementen</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Leave a 12-pixel horizontal gap between a control and its label.  (The gap may be bigger for other controls in the same group, due to differences in the lengths of the labels.)</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Labels must be concise and make sense when taken out of context.  Otherwise, users relying on screenreaders or similar assistive technologies will not always be able to immediately understand the relationship between a control and those surrounding it.</para></listitem>
	<!--		<listitem><para>Assign access keys to all editable controls.  Ensure that labels immediately precede their associated control in the tab order, so that the access key will focus to or activate the correct control when pressed.</para></listitem>
	<remark>GJM: I almost missed this instance of this error which is repeated below; except that it says mnemonic instead of access key. This entire section is a repeat, it seems. Adding restated listitem.</remark>
	-->
	<listitem><para>Assign access keys to all editable controls. Ensure that using the access key focuses its associated control.</para></listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

    </sect2>

<!-- 
I'm commenting out this section for the HIG 2.8 release pending "still needs more work" -Seth

    <sect2 id="layout-window-size">
	<title>Size</title>
	<remark>This section taken from Alan's draft in bug #111772, still needs some work</remark>
	<para>GNOME is used on by many different people on a wide variety of
different hardware.  This includes people with older hardware and 
small displays.  Laptop users and users of other portable devices also
need to be able to work on smaller screens. Users who require large fonts, or assistive technologies that take over part of the screen, also have a correspondingly smaller area in which to display application windows and dialogs.</para> 

<para>While these space restrictions are intended primarily to allow people
with smaller displays to use Gnome it is also good discipline to keep
windows and dialogs clear with not to many concepts all at once. 
<remark>The sentiment of this
paragraph might be useful although it would need to be massively
rephrased-AH.</remark></para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Guidelines</title>

	<listitem><para>Try to ensure that the size of a window is no larger than 480 pixels
wide and 640 pixels hight in the default theme (including window
decorations).  Ideally your application should be usable at 600 by 400
pixels which leaves enough room for both top and bottom Panels.</para></listitem>  

	<listitem><para>The Ratio of the screen width to height is 2:3 and things will look
aesthetically pleasing if we can keep (near to) this proportion. <remark>This ratio isn't always the case these days, with widescreen monitors and PDA-type devices becoming more common-CB</remark>.  
<remark> The
space take by window decorations largely spoils this idealism-AH.</remark>
Dialogs [like a properties dialog] should [probably] be 300 by 400.  
Message Dialogs should be 600 by 200.<remark> I'm not sure specifying pixel dimensions for anything we don't really have to is such a good plan- perhaps just stick to the 'golden ratio' guideline that currently lives in next section?- CB.</remark></para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	</sect2>

-->

    <sect2 id="window-layout-spacing">
      <title>Spacing and Alignment</title>
      
      <para>Provide adequate space between controls and groups of controls. This white space will make it easier for the user to find the information they need.</para>

      <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

	<listitem><para>As a basic rule of thumb, leave space between user interface components in increments of 6 pixels, going up as the relationship between related elements becomes more distant. For example, between icon labels and associated graphics within an icon, 6 pixels are adequate. Between labels and associated components, leave 12 horizontal pixels. For vertical spacing between groups of components, 18 pixels is adequate. A general padding of 12 pixels is recommended between the contents of a dialog window and the window borders.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Break long lists of choices into smaller groups. For lists of less than about eight items, use radio buttons or check boxes. For longer lists, use a list control or drop-down list.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Try to keep elements of the same type left-aligned with each other. For instance, in <xref linkend="layout-callouts-figure"/>, the group titles (<guilabel>General</guilabel> and <guilabel>Actions</guilabel>) are left-aligned and justified with each other.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Indent group members 12 pixels to denote hierarchy and association.</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Minimize the number of alignment points in your window. An alignment point is an imaginary vertical or horizontal line through your window that touches the edge of one or more labels or controls in the window.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Right-justification within groups or the overall window (as indicated by the line labelled "justification" in <xref linkend="layout-callouts-figure"/> is pleasing to the eye, but not crucial.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Lay out components left-to-right, top-to-bottom. Generally, the first element the user is meant to encounter should be in the top-left, and the last in the bottom right. Keep in mind that when localized for non-western locales, interfaces may be reversed so that they read from right to left.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Using "white" or blank spacing and indentation to delineate groups is cleaner and preferable to using graphical separators such as frames.
	  </para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Align controls in your layout <emphasis>exactly</emphasis>. The eye is very sensitive to aligned and unaligned objects. If nothing lines up with anything else in a window, it will be very hard for the user to scan the contents and find the information he wants. Two things that almost line up, but not quite, are equally distracting.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Be consistent. Use the same spacing, alignment, and component sizes in all dialogs appearing in your application. The <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons, for example, should all appear exactly 12 vertical and horizontal pixels from the lower right corner of every dialog window.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Ensure that light and dark areas as well as spacing are equally distributed around the window. Keep in mind that every control or group of controls in your window has a visual "weight," depending on its overall size, color, and how much white space it includes. Darker, larger areas are "heavier," while paler, smaller areas are "lighter."</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Do not design windows that are more than 50% longer in one dimension than in the other. People are more comfortable looking at windows and dialogs whose dimensions stay within the golden ratio (about 1.6 to 1), a ratio that artists and architects have used to create aesthetically-pleasing paintings and buildings for thousands of years.</para></listitem>
	
	<!-- <para><listitem>Do not resize components to fit arbitrary or uncommon layout needs. Make it a practice to use GtkTables, GtkVBox and GtkHBox container widgets at their default /* Calum, is there such a thing? */ row, column and border sizes. This will help ensure that a lot of layout and alignment work is done for you automatically.</para></listitem>-->
	
      </itemizedlist>
      <!--
      <note id="frame-layout-tech"><title>Technical Details for Proper Layout</title>
      <para>Set <property>Border Width</property> for the GtkDialog to <userinput>12</userinput>. Place a GtkVBox containing as many rows as you wish to have categories inside the control area of the GtkDialog, and set the <property>Spacing</property> for the GtkVBox to <userinput>18</userinput>.</para>
      <para>In turn, each category should be composed of a GtkVBox with two rows. Set the <property>Spacing</property> to <userinput>6</userinput>.
      <itemizedlist>
      <listitem><para>In the top row, place a label for the category header. Make the label bold using the Pango markup <programlisting>&lt;span weight="bold"&gt;<replaceable>Category Header</replaceable>&lt;/span&gt;</programlisting> Set the label property <property>Use Markup</property> to <userinput>Yes</userinput>, and <property>X Align</property> to <userinput>0.0</userinput> to left align the label.</para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>Place a 2-columned GtkHBox in the lower row of the top-level GtkVBox.
      <itemizedlist>
      <listitem><para>In the left column, place a label containing four space characters. This will serve to indent the category contents.</para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>In the right column, place a GtkVBox containing a row per control you wish to place in the category. Set the <property>Spacing</property> to <userinput>6</userinput>.
      <itemizedlist>
      <listitem><para>For left-side labelled controls such as text boxes, drop-down lists, and many others, place a 2 columned GtkHBox inside the row with a label in the left column and the corresponding control in the right. Set the <property>Spacing</property> on the GtkHBox to <userinput>6</userinput>. Place all labels such as this (for the whole window) in the same GtkSizeGroup (there is currently no way to do this using only Glade, you will have to use code as well). This will align the controls to their right, even between categories, which is important for allowing quick visual scans.</para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>For right-side labelled controls such as check boxes and radio buttons, simply place them directly in the row.</para></listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
    </para></listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
    </para></listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
    </para>
    </note>
      -->
    </sect2>
    
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="design-text-labels">
    <title>Text Labels</title>
    
    <para>To a user with normal vision, textual output provides the majority of the information and feedback in most applications. To a visually-impaired user who may not be able to see or understand any additional graphical output, clear textual output is critical. You must therefore choose and position text carefully on the screen, and leave the choice of fonts and sizes to the user, to ensure that all users are able to use your application effectively.</para>

    <sect2 id="layout-label-position">
      
      <title>Spacing and Alignment</title>

      <para>Use spacing and alignment of text uniformly throughout your application. A basic rule of thumb is to put space between user interface components in increments of 6 pixels, going up as the relationship between related elements becomes more distant.</para>

      <table id="label-placement-example">
	<title>Alignment and spacing for different Text elements</title>
	<tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	  <thead>
	    <row>
	      <entry>Element</entry>
	      <entry>Platzierung</entry>
	      <entry>Beispiel</entry>
	    </row>
	  </thead>
	  
	  <tbody>
	    <row>
	      <entry>Large Icons (file browser)</entry>
	      <entry>Horizontally centered with and (6 pixels, if specification necessary)below large icon</entry>
	      <entry align="center" valign="middle">
		<mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-large-icon-label.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-large-icon-label.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		  <textobject><phrase>Large icon with text label centered below</phrase></textobject>
		</mediaobject>
	      </entry>
	    </row>
	    
	    <row>
	      <entry>Kleine Symbole (Werkzeugleiste)</entry>
	      <entry>Vertically centered with and (6 pixels, if specification necessary) to the right of small icons</entry>
	      <entry align="center" valign="middle">
		<mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-small-icon-label.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-small-icon-label.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		  <textobject><phrase>Small icon with text label to the right</phrase></textobject>
		</mediaobject>
	      </entry>
	    </row>
	    
	    <row>
	      <entry>List control label</entry>
	      <entry>6 pixels above and horizontally left aligned with list control or 12 pixels to the left of and horizontally top aligned with list control</entry>
	      <entry align="center" valign="middle">
		<mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-list-label.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-list-label.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		  <textobject><phrase>List control with text label horizontally aligned above</phrase></textobject>
		</mediaobject>
	      </entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry>Radio button and check box labels</entry>
	      <entry>6 pixels to the right of and vertically center aligned with radio button</entry>
	      <entry align="center" valign="middle">
		<mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-radiobutton-label.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-radiobutton-label.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		  <textobject><phrase>Radio button with text label to its right</phrase></textobject>
		</mediaobject>
	      </entry>

	    </row>

	    <row> 
	      <entry>Beschriftungen von Textfeldern</entry>
	      <entry>6 pixels to the left of and vertically center aligned with textfield control</entry>
	      <entry align="center" valign="middle">
		<mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-textbox-label.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-textbox-label.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		  <textobject><phrase>Textbox with text label to its left</phrase></textobject>
		</mediaobject>
	      </entry>
	    </row>
	    
	    <row>
	      <entry>Knopfbeschriftungen</entry>
	      <entry>12 pixels of padding to either side of centered text (and any accompanying graphic). If appearing in a group of buttons, longest button label sets button size, center all other button labels and accompanying graphics in same-sized buttons</entry>
	      <entry align="center" valign="middle">
		<mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-button-label.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-button-label.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		  <textobject><phrase>Buttons with centered text</phrase></textobject>
		</mediaobject>
	      </entry>
	    </row>
	    <row> 
	      <entry>Other component labels (e.g., spin boxes, text fields </entry>
	      <entry>12 pixels between the longest text label and its associated component, all other text labels in component grouping left aligned with the longest label. All labels vertically center aligned with associated components</entry>
	      <entry align="center" valign="middle">
		<mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-other-labels.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/visdes-other-labels.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		  <textobject><phrase>Drop-down list with label to its left</phrase></textobject>
		</mediaobject>
	      </entry>
	    </row>
	  </tbody>
	</tgroup>
      </table>

      

      <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
	<listitem><para>If the label precedes the control it is labelling, end the label with a colon. For example, <guilabel>Email:</guilabel> to label a text field into which the user should type their email address. This helps identify it as a control's label rather than an independent item of text.  Some assistive technology screen review utilities may also use the presence of a colon to identify text as a control label.</para></listitem>
	
	<!--	<listitem><para>When you use static text to label a control, ensure that the label immediately precedes that control in the Tab order. This will ensure that the access key (underlined character) you assign to the label will move focus to or activate the correct control when pressed.</para></listitem> 
	<remark>GJM: This is just wrong. Glade may have an "auto" target for labels with mnemonics that
	works this way, but it isn't part of GTK+. Adding the next listitem, though it could be better written.</remark>
	-->
	<listitem><para>Ensure that a label with a mnemonic is associated with the control it labels.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Left-align components and labels, unless all the labels in a group have very different lengths. If they do, right-align the labels instead, to ensure that no controls end up too far away from their corresponding labels.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Choose label names carefully. Label objects with names that make sense when taken out of context. Users relying on screenreaders or similar assistive technologies will not always be able to immediately understand the relationship between a control and those surrounding it.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Be consistent with label usage and semantics. For example, if you use the same label in different windows, it will help if it means the same thing in both windows. Equally, don't use labels that are spelled differently but sound the same, e.g., "Read" and "Red", as this could be confusing for users relying on screenreaders.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Don't use the same label more than once in the same window.  This makes life difficult for users relying on tools like magnifiers or screen readers, which cannot always convey surrounding context to the user.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Do not hard-code font styles and sizes. The user should be able to adjust all sizes and typefaces.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Do not use more than two or three different fonts and sizes in your application, and choose visually distinct rather than similar-looking fonts in one window. Too many font sizes and styles will make the interface look cluttered and unprofessional, and be harder to read. In general, always use fonts from the current theme, and specify relative rather than absolute sizes.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Do not use graphical backdrops or "watermarks" behind text, other than those specified by the user's chosen theme. These interfere with the contrast between the text and its background.  This can cause difficulty for users with visual impairments, who will therefore normally choose themes that always use plain backdrops.</para></listitem>
	
      </itemizedlist>
      
    </sect2>
    
    
    <sect2 id="layout-capitalization">
      
      <title>Capitalization</title>

      <para>Two styles of capitalization are used in GNOME user interface elements: 
	<variablelist> 
	  <varlistentry> 
	    <term>Header capitalization</term> 
	    <listitem> 
	      <para>Capitalize all words in the element, with the following exceptions:
		
		<itemizedlist> 
		  <listitem> 
		    <para>Articles: <emphasis>a</emphasis>, <emphasis>an</emphasis>, <emphasis>the</emphasis>.</para>
		  </listitem> 
		  <listitem> 
		    <para>
		      Conjunctions: <emphasis>and</emphasis>,
		      <emphasis>but</emphasis>, <emphasis>for</emphasis>, <emphasis>not</emphasis>,
		      <emphasis>so</emphasis>, <emphasis>yet</emphasis> ... 
		    </para>
		  </listitem> 
		  <listitem> 
		    <para>
		      Prepositions of three or fewer letters:
		      <emphasis>at</emphasis>, <emphasis>for</emphasis>, <emphasis>by</emphasis>,
		      <emphasis>in</emphasis>, <emphasis>to</emphasis> ... 
		    </para>
		  </listitem> 
		</itemizedlist> 
	      </para>
	    </listitem> 
	  </varlistentry> 
	  <varlistentry> 
	    <term>Sentence capitalization</term> 
	    <listitem> 
	      <para>
		Capitalize the first letter of the first word, and any other words
		normally capitalized in sentences, such as application names. 
	      </para>
	    </listitem> 
	  </varlistentry> 
	</variablelist> 
      </para>
     
	<para>
	The following table indicates the capitalization style to use for each type
	of user interface element. 
      </para>

      <table frame="topbot"> 
	<title>Capitalization Style Guidelines for User Interface
	  Elements</title> 
	<tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0" align="left">
	  <thead>
	    <row rowsep="1" valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Element</entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top" align="left">Stil</entry>
	    </row> 
	  </thead> 
	  <tbody> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">
		
		Check box labels 
		
	      </entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top"> 
		
		Command button labels 
		
	      </entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry> 
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top"> 
		
		Column heading labels 
		
	      </entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry> 
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">
		
		Desktop background object labels 
		
	      </entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Dialogmeldungen</entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry>
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">
		
		Drop-down combination box labels 
		
	      </entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">
		
		Drop-down list box labels 
		
	      </entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top"> 
		
		Field labels 
		
	      </entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Dateinamen</entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">
		
		Graphic equivalent text: for example, Alt text on web pages 
		
	      </entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry>
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top"> 
		
		Group box or frame labels 
		
	      </entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry> 
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top"> 
		
		Items in drop-down combination boxes, drop-down list boxes, and
		list boxes 
		
	      </entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top"> 
		
		List box labels 
		
	      </entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Menüobjekte</entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Menüobjekte in Anwendungen</entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Menütitel in Anwendungen</entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry>
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Beschriftungen für Radioknöpfe</entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Beschriftungen für Schieberegler</entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Beschriftungen für Einstellfelder</entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row> 
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Titel für Reiterabschnitte</entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top"> 
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Beschriftungen für Textfelder</entry> 
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry> 
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Beschriftungen für Titelleisten</entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Beschriftungen für Werkzeugleistenknöpfe</entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">Minihilfen</entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Satz</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row valign="top">
	      <entry colname="col1" align="left" valign="top">
		
		Webpage titles and navigational elements 
		
	      </entry>
	      <entry colname="col2" valign="top">Kopfzeilen</entry>
	    </row> 
	  </tbody> 
	</tgroup> 
      </table> 
	 <note><title>Capitalization guidelines for other languages</title>
	<para>Languages other than English may have different rules about capitalization.  For example, Swedish has no concept of Header capitalization. Contact the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gtp/contact.html">GNOME Translation Project</ulink> if you are in doubt about how to capitalize labels in a particular language.</para>
	</note>

    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="design-fonts">
    <title>Schriften</title>
    <para>Only use the fonts that the user has specified in their theme, and in sizes relative to the default size specified in their theme.  This will ensure maximum legibility and accessibility for all users.</para>
    <para>Do not mix more than two or three font sizes and styles (underlined, bold, italicized) in one window, as this will look unprofessional and distract the user from the information being conveyed.</para>
    <para>Provide alternatives to WYSIWYG where applicable. Some users may need to print text in a small font but edit in a larger screen font, for example. Possible alternatives include displaying all text in the same font and size (both of which are chosen by the user); a "wrap-to-window" option that allows you to read all the text in a window without scrolling horizontally; a single column view that shows the window's contents in a single column even if they will be printed in multiple columns; and a text-only view, where graphics are shown as placeholders or text descriptions.</para>
  </sect1>
  </chapter>



<chapter id="icons">
  <title>Symbole</title>
  <para>Icons are a graphical metaphor presenting a visual image that the user associates with a particular object, state or operation. When a user sees a good icon they are immediately reminded of the item it represents, whether that be an application in the panel menu or the "right aligned" state in a word processor toolbar.</para>
  <para>
    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem><para>Icons can assist the user in rapidly scanning a large number of objects to select the desired item. Particularly after a user is accustomed to an icon's appearance, they can identify it more rapidly than a text label.</para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>Icons can augment text by providing visual suggestions to accompany the descriptive text. Some things are easier to communicate with a picture, even a very small one.</para></listitem>
      <listitem><para>Icons can compactly represent a large number of objects when there is insufficient space to display textual descriptions (such as in a toolbar).</para></listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </para>

  <sect1 id="icons-style">
    <title>Stil</title>
    
    <para>GNOME uses a soft, three-dimensional look. This style is achieved by using antialiasing, shading and highlighting techniques. The <ulink url="http://developer.ximian.com/articles/tutorials/icons/"><citetitle>Gnome Icons</citetitle></ulink> tutorial details how one of GNOME's leading artists creates some of these effects.</para>
    <para>Components of an icon style can be broken down into several categories such as perspective, dimentionality, lighting effects and palette. These components play an important part in giving a group of icons a collectively distinctive look. For instance, the Java Look and Feel is recognizable by its use of a primary eight-color palette, interior highlighting and diagonal gradients. The Macintosh Aqua style is recognizable by its use of a cool palette based on blue, lighting effects mimicking reflectivity and antialiasing. The GNOME style exhibits a subdued thirty-two color palette, soft drop shadows and a mix between cartoonish and photorealistic graphics.</para>
    <table frame="topbot" pgwide="1">
      <title>Ein Globus in verschiedenen Symbolstilen</title>
      
      <tgroup cols="3" colsep="0" rowsep="0" align="center">
	<thead>
	  <row valign="top">
	    <entry>Java Metal</entry>
	    <entry>MacOS/X Aqua</entry>
	    <entry>GNOME</entry>
	  </row>
	</thead>
	<tbody>
	  <row valign="middle">
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-style-java.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-style-java.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>Java globe</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-style-aqua.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-style-aqua.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>Aqua globe</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-style-gnome.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-style-gnome.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>GNOME globe</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	  </row>
	</tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </table>

    <sect2 id="icon_style_perspective">
      <title>Perspektive</title>
      <formalpara>
	<title>Table perspective</title>
	<para>Presents objects as if they were sitting on a table or desk in front of the user.</para>
      </formalpara>
      <figure>
	<title>Illustration of the table perspective</title>
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-perspective-table.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-perspective-table.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>illustration of the table perspective</phrase></textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>
      <formalpara>
	<title>Shelf perspective</title>
	<para>Presents objects as if they were propped up on a shelf at eye level. Make it look like a police line-up.</para>
      </formalpara>
      <figure>
	<title>Illustration of the shelf perspective</title>
	<mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-perspective-shelf.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-perspective-shelf.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>illustration of the shelf perspective</phrase></textobject>
	</mediaobject>
      </figure>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="icon_style_lighting">
      <title>Beleuchtung</title>
      <formalpara>
	<title>Oben links</title>
	<para>Design as if there is lighting coming from the upper left corner, with a soft drop-shadow cast within the icon's 48x48 (original design size) borders (120 degrees, 4 pixel distance, 4 pixel blur).</para>
      </formalpara>
      <formalpara>
	<title>Overhead</title>
	<para>Design as if there is a light source placed above the "camera", casting a shadow down. <!-- FIXME: need to make this more detailed --> </para>
      </formalpara>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="icon_style_palette">
      <title>Palette</title>
      <para>Icons should use colors based on the basic thirty-two color palette, darkening or lightening the colours to achieve the desired look. See <xref linkend="Palette"/></para>
    </sect2>

  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="icons-types">
    <title>Arten von Symbolen</title>
    <table frame="all" pgwide="1" id="icon_specifications">
      <title>Specifications for different kinds of icons used within GNOME</title>
      <tgroup cols="4" colsep="1" rowsep="1" align="center">
	<thead>
	  <row>
	    <entry>Symboltyp</entry>
	    <entry>Größen (Pixel)</entry>
	    <entry>Perspektive</entry>
	    <entry>Lichtquelle</entry>
	    <entry>Beispiele</entry>
	  </row>
	</thead>
	<tbody>
	  <row>
	    <entry>Symbole für Objekte / Dokumente</entry>
	    <entry>24x24, 48x48*, 96x96</entry>
	    <entry>Tabelle</entry>
	    <entry>Upper Left</entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-objects.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-objects.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>variety of object icons</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	  </row>
	  <row>
	    <entry>Anwendungssymbole</entry>
	    <entry>24x24, 48x48*</entry>
	    <entry>Tabelle</entry>
	    <entry>Upper Left</entry>
	    <entry>	
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-applications.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-applications.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>variety of application icons</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	  </row>
	  <row>
	    <entry>Werkzeugleistensymbole</entry>
	    <entry>24x24*, 48x48</entry>
	    <entry>Shelf</entry>
	    <entry>Overhead</entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-toolbar.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-toolbar.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>variety of toolbar icons</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	  </row>
	  <row>
	    <entry>Menüsymbole</entry>
	    <entry>16x16</entry>
	    <entry>Shelf</entry>
	    <entry>Overhead</entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-menu.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-menu.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>variety of menu icons</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	  </row>
	</tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </table>
    <para>(* denotes the primary size for this kind of icon)</para>

    <sect2 id="document_icons">
      <title>Dokumentsymbole</title>
      <para>If possible, document icons should convey the type of the file using a physical object. For example a good icon for MPEG video would be a movie reel. Failing the existence of an appropriate object, when a document type corresponds to a specific application, another option is to use a piece of paper with the corresponding application's icon overlayed it as the document icon. This may be appropriate for a document type such as an application's settings files.</para>
      <itemizedlist>
	<listitem><para>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> display a piece of paper behind a document icon unless the document type has a use correspondence with physical paper (or a suitable object was not found and you are using the application icon). For example, the final state of most word processing documents is a piece of paper, so it is appropriate to use a piece of paper in the icon. On the other hand, a movie on the computer has little association with a piece of paper, so a piece of paper behind the movie reel primarily introduces <link linkend="icon_problems_extraneous_information">visual noise</link>. The use of a piece of paper in most or all document types creates an additional problem: it is harder to scan large numbers of icons because they do not possess <link linkend="icon_design_silhouettes">distinct outlines</link>. A useful technique for creating a subtle difference between document types with similar roles (for example, between "JPEG", "PNG", "GIF", etc) is to use different colours. Expert users who need to make this distinction frequently will become accustomed to these differences.</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> include a file extension in the icon. The document icon's job is not to convey such precise information but to allow for rapid visual distinction between documents. Additionally, this text will not be displayed in the user's preferred font and size. Because many document types are associated with multiple file extensions, a file extension embedded in the icon will also frequently be wrong. In a context where the file extension is actually useful, the application should composite the information onto the icon at runtime (thereby using the correct font and size, as well as getting the extension right).</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> customize document icons to a particular Nautilus theme. Document icons are likely to be used in conjunction with a variety of different icon themes, and should work well with all of them.</para></listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="application_icons">
      <title>Anwendungssymbole</title>
      <!-- FIXME: we could give a lot more useful guidance here -->
      <para>Application's that handle documents should reflect the kind of document they handle in the icon. If an application's predominant purpose is to edit a particular kind of document, it should use this document's icon as its icon.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="toolbar_icons">
      <title>Werkzeugleistensymbole</title>
      <para>The idea of a toolbar as a shelf filled with tools should be reflected in toolbar icons. Toolbar icons should have the perspective of being viewed head on, as if they were actually sitting on a shelf at eye-level. Some design guides refer to this perspective as "flush".</para>
      <itemizedlist>
	<listitem><para>Ensure that toolbar icons which will be used together are easy to visually distinguish. Try to <link linkend="icon_design_silhouettes">make the icons' silhouettes distinct</link> from one another.</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>While most user's will view toolbar icons at 24x24 pixels, it is important to include a "large print" set of icons at 48x48 pixels for accesibility reasons.</para></listitem>
	<listitem><para>Often, you will not have to design any toolbar icons yourself as GTK provides a wide variety of stock icons. You should use these whenever representing one of their intended items. This establishes consistent language across applications, and makes it easier for users to search for items on the toolbar. Do not use stock toolbar icons for anything other than their intended purpose, however, as this will make your application inconsistent with others, and could easily confuse your users.</para>
	<para>To browse the available stock icons, install the development packages for GTK version 2.x and run <command>gtk-demo</command>. Double click on <guimenuitem>Stock Item and Icon Browser</guimenuitem> to activate the stock icon browser. Note that icons vary in available resolution, so the images presented in the icon browser should not be taken as indicative of the maximum quality of an image. To view the images in PNG format, look in the GTK 2 source code under <filename class="directory">gtk/stock-icons</filename>.</para></listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="menu_icons">
      <title>Menüsymbole</title>
      <para>Principles of toolbar icon design should be followed with menu icons, just at a smaller size. Where a corresponding toolbar icon exists, a menu icon should mirror its design.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 id="icons-design">
    <title>Entwerfen effektiver Symbole</title>
    <para>
      <tip><title>Rule of Thumb for Icon Metaphors</title><para>"If you have to think about an icon to 'get it', the metaphor is too complex"</para></tip>
    </para>
	
    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
	<formalpara>
	  <title>Design Functionally Suggestive Icons</title>
	  <para>Icons should be suggestive of the functionality with which they are associated. The best icon will suggest to the user the primary purpose of the program or operation without having to read accompanying text. Users recognize functionally suggestive icons more rapidly than other forms because they directly associate with a physical object or action.</para>
	</formalpara>
	<figure>
	  <title>A functionally suggestive icon for a word processor</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-word-processor.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-word-processor.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>A document with a pencil writing on it</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>
	<figure>
	  <title>A functionally suggestive icon for underline</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-underline-text.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-underline-text.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>An underlined character</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>
      </listitem>
      <listitem id="icon_design_silhouettes">
	<formalpara>
	  <title>Make Icon Silhouettes Distinct</title>
	  <para>It is important to make it easy to visually distinguish icons that will be used together, for example toolbar icons and document icons. The human visual system is excellent at making rapid distinctions between items based on shape, thus a good way to help your users sort through a large number of icons is to use different shapes. You can see the shape of an icon most clearly by turning it into a silhouette: blacken all areas of the icon which are not transparent.</para>
	</formalpara>
	<example>
	  <title>Distinct silhouettes from the GNOME icon theme</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-silhouette.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-silhouette.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Silhouettes of various toolbar icons</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</example>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <!-- CB-Ed: Much of this section has good substance, but is communicated poorly.  There seem to be a lot of blanket statements, and the tone is subjective (e.g., text describing figure 12, the Gnumeric icon.  Stick just to the facts, or try to stay closely to objective language, and language that will not be presenting things in a way that can be argued with or questioned. -->
    <!-- Seth: Objective language does not present the entire picture. While its better for laying down hard and fast guidelines, it does not assist designers in understanding the motivation behind various decisions. This document covers the design *philosophy* as well as providing specific guidelines. This is in fact one of my major complaints about the Java guidelines relative to the MacOS guidelines. Java guidelines attempt to maintain a facade of scientific objectivity and in doing so fail to educate designers as well as failing to communicate the real dynamics of good design. Dealing with more subjective issues is particularly important because many of the readers of the GNOME guidelines will not be professional icon artists, or even graphic designers. -->
    

    <!-- FIXME: we need a short section that talks about finding useful metaphors and images for icons -->
    
    <sect2 id="icon_design_process">
      <title>Suggested Design Process For Toolbar and Menu Icons</title>
      <para>For accessibility reasons, you should create high contrast versions of all icons, in addition to the regular contrast icon. A suggested process for conveniently integrating this into your icon design is as follows:</para>
      <orderedlist>
	<listitem>
	  <para>Draw the basic outline as close to 48x48 pixels as possible:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-1.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>Fill in with black and white to create detail. Do not add gratuities such as drop shadows or anti-aliasing:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-2.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>Use the finished image as the large print high contrast icon:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-3.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>GNOME will automatically scale it down to create the 24x24 high contrast icon:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-4.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-4.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>Or you may hand-create a 24x24 version, which will be superior in contrast and sharpness:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-5.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-5.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>Add color and anti-aliasing to the large print high contrast icon:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-6.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-6.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>Fügen Sie Farbverläufe für einen geglätteten, realistischen Effekt hinzu:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-7.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-7.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>Add a drop shadow (120 degree global angle, 4 pixel distance, 4 pixel blur, 40% opacity), and use the finished image as the large print regular contrast icon:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-8.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-8.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>Now you should hand-create a version of this icon at 24x24. Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> simply scale the larger icon, as this icon will be seen by the majority of users and the result of scaling would be less distinct:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-9.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-9.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>Create a layer with the large print regular contrast icon's same outline and size then overlay that on the color icon. Give the overlay layer 40% opacity, and use the finished image as the large print low contrast icon:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-10.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-10.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <para>GNOME will automatically scale it down to create the 24x24 low contrast icon:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-11.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-11.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
      <listitem>
	  <para>Or you may hand-create a 24x24 version, which will be superior in contrast and sharpness:</para>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-12.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icon-design-process-12.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</listitem>
      </orderedlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="icon_problems">
      <title>Zu vermeidende Probleme</title>
      <itemizedlist>
	<listitem>
	  <formalpara>
	    <title>Avoid name suggestive icons</title>
	    <para>Some icons, such as the original Nautilus file manager icon, do not suggest the program's purpose, but instead suggest the program's name. This is less desirable than a functionally suggestive icon, because an extra layer of abstraction is added (rather than associating file management with an icon representing files, they have to associate file management with nautilus with an image of a nautilus shell). Additionally it makes it difficult for new users who may not know what "Nautilus" is, and hence will not recognize a shell icon as the file manager.</para>
	  </formalpara>
	  <figure>
	    <title>The original, name suggestive icon for Nautilus</title>
	    <mediaobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-nautilus.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-nautilus.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	      <textobject><phrase>A picture of a nautilus shell</phrase></textobject>
	    </mediaobject>
	  </figure>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <formalpara>
	    <title>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> include meaningful text in icons</title>
	    <para>Icons that contain the text of the program name in the icon. They effectively contain no metaphor or picture for the user to identify with, and are probably harder to read than the accompanying caption. Since icons draw the eyes, an icon that is harder to identify than text is potentially worse than no icon at all. Hence "text icons" should not be used. Moreover, text should be avoided in icons because it makes the icons difficult to translate. If there is text in icons it should not form words in your native language, a good metric for ensuring that the particular text is not lending to the meaning of the icon.</para>
	  </formalpara>
	  <figure>
	    <title>Text in the original GEdit icon</title>
	    <mediaobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-gedit.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-gedit.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	      <textobject><phrase>The original GEdit icon, a rectangle containing the word "GEdit".</phrase></textobject>
	    </mediaobject>
	  </figure>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <formalpara>
	    <title>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> rely on information your users will not have</title>
	    <para>Random icons appear to have no association with the application (except perhaps some odd connection in the mind of the developer). These icons should <emphasis>never</emphasis> be used and will likely serve to confuse the user more than help them. The icon's purpose should not be to "look pretty"; this is merely a very desirable side effect.</para>
			</formalpara>
	    <para>The SodiPodi project logo is a squirrel, which is used as the application icon. However, because the logo has no obvious connection <emphasis>to a user</emphasis>, it is a poor icon. Make sure that you are not relying on information that users won't necessarily possess.</para>
	  <figure>
	    <title>A seemingly random icon for SodiPodi</title>
	    <mediaobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-sodipodi.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-sodipodi.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	      <textobject><phrase>A squirrel</phrase></textobject>
	    </mediaobject>
	  </figure>
	</listitem>
	<listitem id="icon_problems_extraneous_information">
	  <formalpara>
	    <title>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> include extraneous information</title>
	    <para>Remember that icons will often be viewed in a smaller form. Too much information may render the icon unintelligible when it is shrunk in size (e.g. to be placed on a panel, or in the tasklist). Too much information also makes it easier for users confuse the purpose of the application. For example, in user testing many users thought an older version of the Evolution icon (below) would launch a word processor. They were misled by the pencil and the paper, which could be seen as extraneous information: it is implicit that the mail program will allow you to write messages as well as receive them. A better icon might have been a simple envelope. Foremost in the icon designer's mind should be a consideration of the minimal visual elements necessary to express the purpose of the program.</para>
	  </formalpara>
	  <figure>
	    <title>Extraneous information - the Evolution icon</title>
	    <mediaobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-evolution.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-evolution.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	      <textobject><phrase>The Evolution icon</phrase></textobject>
	    </mediaobject>
	  </figure>
	  <para>
	    This Gnumeric icon (below) is a great icon except for the introduction of extra visual noise. The extra sheet of paper with the 'g' on it behind the spreadsheet and chart adds no significant value to the icon and provides extra visual distraction. In this case the contribution of the extraneous element to the appearance of the icon is negative. Simple, well-balanced icons look more attractive than cluttered icons. An improved icon might contain only the spreadsheet and chart; larger because they can use all of the space in the icon, and hence more visually distinct.
	  </para>
	  <figure>
	    <title>Extraneous information - the old Gnumeric icon</title>
	    <mediaobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-gnumeric.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-gnumeric.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	      <textobject><phrase>The Gnumeric icon</phrase></textobject>
	    </mediaobject>
	  </figure>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <formalpara>
	    <title>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> include body parts in the icon</title>
	    <para> Because GNOME aims to be an international desktop, it needs to avoid imagery that is potentially offensive or crass to other cultures. A prime source of offensive imagery is various body parts in a number of different configurations. Aside from offensive gestures with the hands, arms or fingers; body parts that are considered "clean" in one culture (such as eyes), will be considered tasteless or gross to another (such as a nose). Based on a survey of icons in GNOME, body parts frequently appear in the least communicative icons (often "pointing" at some element in the icon); they are being used as an ineffective crutch for poor metaphor. In these situations body parts should <emphasis>not</emphasis> be used. Even in situations where the metaphor is appropriate (for example an eye representing the sawfish appearance capplet) it is better to avoid using a body part. Often body parts have been used in GNOME to suggest a human "choosing" or "using" something. This is normally an unnecessary point for the icon designer to make. People naturally attempt to understand objects in reference to themselves (show someone a bat and they will think of hitting something with the bat, show someone a tool and they will think of using it, etc). For example, the font selector shows a finger pointing to an "F" suggesting the user choosing between a series of fonts. A better icon would be the text "Aa" presented in an ornate font (calling attention to the font rather than the text). The user doesn't need to be told that they are "choosing" the font, they can infer that easily.</para>
	  </formalpara>
	  <figure>
	    <title>Using body parts - the font selector icon</title>
	    <mediaobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-font-selection-poor.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-font-selection-poor.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	      <textobject><phrase>The original Font Selector Icon</phrase></textobject>
	    </mediaobject>
	  </figure>	    
	  <figure>
	    <title>Ein besseres Symbol für den Schriftwähler</title>
	    <mediaobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-font-selection-good.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-font-selection-good.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	      <textobject><phrase>A simple replacement icon showing an ornate "Aa"</phrase></textobject>
	    </mediaobject>
	  </figure>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <formalpara>
	    <title>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> base icons off word puns</title>
	      <para>This should be avoided for a couple reasons, the most obvious of which is that puns do not translate well. For example, representing the "system log monitor" as a log will likely be uncommunicative in languages other than English. Additionally, most users do not comprehend the word play until it is too late for the icon to assist them. Even after being familiar with the "system log monitor" being represented as a log, users do not form the association fast enough for the icon to assist through in scanning through menu entries. A popular instance of this problem was the proliferation of icons representing the "World Wide Web" as a spider web in the mid 1990s. Part of the value of icons is that they bypass linguistic comprehension and hence are complementary to captions, allowing users to utilize more areas of the mind than linguistic recognition (already used in scanning for captions) when they hunt for items.</para>
	  </formalpara>
	  <figure>
	    <title>Word play - System Log Monitor icon</title>
	    <mediaobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-system-log.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-system-log.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	      <textobject><phrase>A tree log</phrase></textobject>
	    </mediaobject>
	  </figure>
	</listitem>
	<listitem>
	  <formalpara>
	    <title>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> employ violent imagery</title>
	    <para>Just as words like "kill" and "slay" are inappropriate in interfaces, violent or destructive icons should be avoided. The "shut down" icon uses the image of an explosive detonation switch, presumably trying to convey the idea of ending something abruptly. However, this icon is likely to intimidate some users of the computer who will not want to click on the icon for fear of breaking something.</para>
	  </formalpara>
	  <figure>
	    <title>Destructive-looking Shutdown icon</title>
	    <mediaobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-shut-down.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
	      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-shut-down.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	      <textobject><phrase>An explosive detonation button</phrase></textobject>
	    </mediaobject>
	  </figure>
	</listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="icons-design-accessible">
       <title>Designing Accessible Icons</title>
       <para>
	       The GNOME desktop includes a high contrast theme that make the desktop and the applications running on it accessible to users with a range of visual impairments.To be considered fully accessible, all icons in your application
	       must be replaced by a suitable alternative when this
	       themes is used.</para>
	<tip><title>Low Contrast Icons</title>
	<para>Low contrast icon themes were deprecated in GNOME 2.22. It is no longer necessary to deliver low contrast icon equivalents. </para></tip>
       <sect2 id="icons-design-highcontrast">
	<title>High Contrast Icons</title>
	<para>
		High contrast icons are greatly simplified versions of an application's existing regular icons. They are drawn with two colors, black and white, and thicker borders. This style allows high contrast icons to be distinguishable when viewed by a user with a visual impairment. Below is an approximation of what well-designed high contrast icons look like when viewed by someone with a visual impairment.</para>
    <table frame="topbot" pgwide="1">
	    <title>Simulation of low vision user viewing high contrast icons</title>
      
      <tgroup cols="3" colsep="0" rowsep="0" align="center">
	<thead>
	  <row valign="top">
	    <entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	    <entry>High Contrast Icon</entry>
	    <entry>Simulated Appearance</entry>
	  </row>
	</thead>
	<tbody>
	  <row valign="top">
		<entry>Buch</entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-book.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-book.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>Book icon</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-book-blur.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-book-blur.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>Blurred Book icon</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	  </row>
	  <row valign="top">
		<entry>CD-ROM</entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-cdrom.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-cdrom.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>CD-ROM icon</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-cdrom-blur.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-cdrom-blur.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>Blurred CD-ROM icon</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	  </row>
	  <row valign="top">
		<entry>Kopieren</entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-copy.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-copy.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>Copy icon</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	    <entry>
	      <mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-copy-blur.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-copy-blur.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>Blurred Copy icon</phrase></textobject>
	      </mediaobject>
	    </entry>
	  </row>
	</tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </table>

	<para>
		If a regular icon uses a simple, straightforward metaphor the corresponding high contrast icon can often use the same metaphor. In many cases the same metaphor will need to be drawn differently to create a simplified high contrast icon.
	</para>
	 <figure>
		 <title>Simplified representation of metaphors for high contrast icons</title>
	         <mediaobject>
			 <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-metaphors.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
			 <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-hc-metaphors.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
			 <textobject><phrase>Comparison of photorealistic style of regular icons with the simpler, line-art style of high contrast icons</phrase></textobject>
								               </mediaobject>
									             </figure>

	<para>High contrast icons are created in a vector drawing program. Black and white shapes are layered to create a simplified icon. The process feels like layering black and white pieces of construction paper, as if you were assembling a collage.</para>
	 <figure>
		<title>Layered technique for high contrast icons</title>
	         <mediaobject>
			 <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-floppy-dissected.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
		             <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-floppy-dissected.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
			     <textobject><phrase>Exploded view of layers used in high contrast floppy disk icon</phrase></textobject>
								               </mediaobject>
									             </figure>

	<tip><title>Reuse existing shapes</title>
		<para>Often shapes from existing high contrast icons can be resized and reused to more quickly build up a new icon.</para></tip>

	<tip><title>Don't forget the border!</title>
		<para>It is useful to design high contrast icons over a temporary background color so you don't forget to draw the external white border.</para></tip>
     </sect2>
     <sect2 id="icons-design-lowcontrast">
	     <title>Low Contrast Icons</title>

		<tip><title>Low Contrast Icons</title>
		<para>Low contrast icon themes were deprecated in GNOME 2.22. It is no longer necessary to deliver low contrast icon equivalents. </para></tip>
	     <para>
		     The goal of low contrast themes is to eliminate, as much as possible, light values (e.g. a large 'V' value in HSV). To achieve this, the colors in low contrast icons are compressed toward the middle value range, i.e. dark colors are lightened and light colors are darkened.
	     </para>
	     <para>
		     Low contrast icons are generated from the existing regular icons by adjusting the levels in GIMP. The Input Levels are set to 100, 1.25, 200 and the Output Levels are set to 100, 160, as shown in the Levels dialog below. Large numbers of regular icons can be quickly converted to low contrast by using GIMP's scripting facilities.</para>
	      <figure>
	        <title>Levels dialog in GIMP showing correct levels for generating low contrast icons</title>
		<mediaobject>
		  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-lowcontrast-levels.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
                  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/icons-lowcontrast-levels.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		  <textobject><phrase>Levels dialog in GIMP showing input levels set to 100, 1.25, 200, and output levels set to 100 and 160.</phrase></textobject>
		 </mediaobject>
	      </figure>

     </sect2>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

<!-- Keep this comment at the end of the file
Local variables:
mode: xml
sgml-omittag:nil
sgml-shorttag:nil
sgml-namecase-general:nil
sgml-general-insert-case:lower
sgml-minimize-attributes:nil
sgml-always-quote-attributes:t
sgml-indent-step:2
sgml-indent-data:t
sgml-parent-document:nil
sgml-exposed-tags:nil
sgml-local-catalogs:("/usr/lib/sgml/catalog")
sgml-local-ecat-files:("ECAT" "~/sgml/ECAT" "/usr/lib/sgml/ECAT" "/usr/local/lib/sgml/ECAT")
End:
-->



<chapter id="input">
<title>Benutzereingabe</title>
  <sect1 id="input-mouse">
    <title>Maus-Interaktion</title>
    
    <sect2 id="mouse-buttons">
      <title>Knöpfe</title>

	<figure> <title>A plethora of pointing devices: mouse, trackball, foot-operated mouse, joystick, trackpad, and a finger-mounted pointing device.</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-pointing-devices.png" format="PNG" width="480" depth="80"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-pointing-devices.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>Pictures of different types of pointing device, including mouse, trackball, foot-operated mouse and joystick.</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>
      
<!-- CB-Ed: The following paragraphs are VERY GOOD because they lay out terms and definitions for the reader clearly and unequivocally. -->

      <para>For most users, the mouse provides the main way of interacting with graphical user interfaces.  The term "mouse" is used in this chapter to include other pointing devices that can be used to move the pointer around the screen, such as trackballs, trackpads, spaceballs, graphics tablets, or assistive technology devices that emulate a mouse.</para>
	
      <para>For right-handed users, the left button on a conventional mouse is used for the majority of mouse actions. We therefore call it the <mousebutton>left button</mousebutton> here, even though that may not physically be the case.  For this reason, you may sometimes see this button referred to in code or documentation as "Button 1" or the "Selection Button".</para>

      <para>Similarly for right-handed users, the right button on a conventional mouse is used for operations involving pop-up menus. We therefore call it the <mousebutton>right button</mousebutton> in this chapter.  You may sometimes see this button referred to in code or documentation as "Button 3" or the "Menu Button".</para>

      <para>A conventional mouse with three buttons normally has its third button (or a scrollwheel that acts as a button when pushed) between the left and right buttons.  We therefore call it the <mousebutton>middle button</mousebutton>, but you may sometimes see this referred to in code or documentation as "Button 2" or the "Transfer Button".</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Your application uses left button gestures for selecting, activating components, dragging, and the display of drop-down menus.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Your application uses right button gestures to display and select actions from a popup menu.</para></listitem>  
	  
	  <listitem><para>Your application uses the middle button to paste the current PRIMARY (usually the last-highlighted) selection at the pointer position, as follows:</para>
	    
	    <table frame="all">
	      <title>Effect of modifier keys on a <mousebutton>middle button</mousebutton> transfer operation</title>
	      <tgroup cols="2" align="left">
		<thead>
		  <row>
		    <entry>Zusatztaste</entry>
		    <entry>Funktion</entry>
		  </row>
		</thead>
		<tbody>
		  <row>
		    <entry>Unverändert</entry>
		    <entry>Auswahl kopieren</entry>
		  </row>
		  <row>
		    <entry><keycap>Ctrl</keycap></entry>
		    <entry>Auswahl kopieren</entry>
		  </row>
		  <row>
		    <entry><keycap>Shift</keycap></entry>
		    <entry>Auswahl verschieben</entry>
		  </row>
		  <row>
		    <entry><keycombo><keycap>Umschalttaste</keycap><keycap>Strg</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		    <entry>Create link, shortcut or alias to selection</entry>
		</row>

		</tbody>
	      </tgroup>
	    </table>

	<para>Do not over-ride this functionality in any part of your user interface where the transfer action is likely to be useful.  If you do intend to use the middle button for a different purpose somewhere, only do so as a shortcut for experienced users, and only for operations that can also be performed without using the <mousebutton>right button</mousebutton> or <mousebutton>middle button</mousebutton>.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>If present on the mouse, the scrollwheel should scroll the window or control under the pointer, if it supports scrolling. Initiating scrolling in this way should not move keyboard focus to the window or control being scrolled. <remark>If it supports both horizontal and vertical scrolling, perhaps suggest unmodified scrollwheel should scroll vertically, and <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><mousebutton>scrollwheel</mousebutton></keycombo> should scroll horizontally.</remark></para></listitem>

	<listitem><para><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><mousebutton>scrollwheel-up</mousebutton></keycombo> should zoom into the window or control under the mouse pointer, and <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><mousebutton>scrollwheel-down</mousebutton></keycombo> should zoom out.  Zooming in this way should not move keyboard focus to the window or control being zoomed.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Do not depend on input from the middle or right mouse buttons. As well as being physically more difficult to click, some pointing devices and many assistive technology devices only support or emulate the left mouse button.  Some assistive technologies may not even emulate the mouse at all, but generate keyboard events instead.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Ensure that every operation in your application that can be done with the mouse can also be done with the keyboard.  The only exceptions to this are actions where fine motor control is an essential part of the task. For example, controlling movement in some types of action games, or freehand painting in an image-editing application.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Do not warp the mouse pointer, or restrict mouse movement to part of the screen. This can interfere with assistive technologies, and is usually confusing even for users who do not rely on assistive technologies.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Do not require the use of chording (pressing multiple mouse buttons simultaneously) for any operations.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Do not require the use of multiple (triple- or quadruple-) clicking actions for any operations, unless you also provide an accessible alternative method of performing the same action.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Allow all mouse operations to be cancelled before their completion. Pressing the Esc key should cancel any mouse operation in progress, such as dragging and dropping a file in a file manager, or drawing a shape in a drawing application.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Do not assign any actions exclusively to the middle button of a three-button mouse, as not all mice have one.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Do not hard-code mouse target sizes, or make them too small. Define any mouse targets to be at least as large as the arrow button in a GtkSpinBox in the current gtk theme. Bear in mind that a user with impaired dexterity or vision may be using a theme that results in considerably larger widgets than the default theme.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Do not refer to particular mouse buttons in your interface unless absolutely necessary.  Not everybody will be using a conventional mouse with left, middle and right buttons, so any text or diagrams that refer to those may be confusing.</para></listitem>

      </itemizedlist>
      
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="selection">
      <title>Auswählen von Objekten</title>
      <sect3 id="mouse-keyboard-equivalents">
	<title>Mouse and keyboard equivalents</title>

	<para>For controls or windows that contain a number of objects that the
user can select, either singly or multiply, ensure the following mechanisms are in place to allow selections to be made using either the mouse or the keyboard.</para>
	
	<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard mouse and keyboard selection mechanisms</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry/>
		<entry>Maus</entry>
		<entry>Tastatur</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry>Select item, deselect all others</entry>
		<entry>Klicken</entry>
		<entry><keysym>Space</keysym></entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>Add/remove item from selection</entry>
		<entry><keycap>Ctrl</keycap> click (toggles item's selected state)</entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>Space</keysym></keycombo> (toggles focused item's selected state)</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>Extend selection</entry>
		<entry><keycap>Shift</keycap> click</entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keysym>Space</keysym></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Home</keycap></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>End</keycap></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>PageUp</keycap></keycombo>, or <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>PageDown</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>Move focus</entry>
		<entry>Click appropriate item to select it</entry>
		<entry>Cursor keys, <keycap>Home</keycap>, <keycap>End</keycap>, <keycap>PageUp</keycap>, and <keycap>PageDown</keycap> move focus and selection simultaneously.
		<para><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>cursor keys</keysym></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Home</keycap></keycombo>,<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>End</keycap></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>PageUp</keycap></keycombo>, and <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>PageDown</keycap></keycombo> move focus without affecting current selection.</para></entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>Alle auswählen</entry>
		<entry>Click first item, then <keycap>Shift</keycap> click last item</entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>A</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>Alles abwählen</entry>
		<entry>Click container background</entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>A</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>Auswahl aktivieren</entry>
		<entry>Double-click to activate a single selection.  <keycap>Shift</keycap> or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> double-clicking extends or adds item to selection first before activating the entire selection.</entry>
		<entry><keysym>Return</keysym> activates entire selection.  If nothing is currently selected, selects currently-focused item first.</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry>Auswahl umkehren</entry>
		<entry>No mouse equivalent</entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>I</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>
      </sect3>

      <sect3 id="bounding-box-selection">
	<title>Begrenzung der Auswahl</title>

	<para>For a container whose objects may be arranged in two dimensions, for example the icon view in a file manager, allow multiple selection by dragging a bounding box (sometimes called a "rubber band") around one or more objects.  <keycombo action="other" otheraction="drag"><keycap>Shift </keycap><mousebutton>left button</mousebutton></keycombo> <action>drag</action> should add all the objects within the bounding box to the existing selection.  <keycombo action="other" otheraction="drag"><keycap>Ctrl </keycap><mousebutton>left button</mousebutton></keycombo> <action>drag</action> should toggle the selected state of all the objects within the bounding box.</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

		<listitem><para><remark>This guideline needs to be so much better worded :) </remark>Allow a bounding box selection to begin only if the initial mouse button press is made:</para>
		
			<itemizedlist>
				<listitem><para>Within the bounds of the container's background, and</para></listitem>
				<listitem><para>outside the bounds of any another object in the same container that can be dragged.</para></listitem>
			</itemizedlist>
			
		<para>In a drawing application, for example, this means that a bounding box click and drag could start on a blank area of the canvas, or within a shape that had been locked down to prevent accidental editing, but not in an active shape which would itself be dragged instead.</para></listitem>
		
		<listitem><para>Select any objects that lie wholly or partly within the bounding box when the mouse button is released. <remark>This is different from 1.0 advice, need to update figure 10.2 accordingly.</remark></para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>Use dynamic highlighting during the drag to show which objects will be selected.  Do not wait until the mouse button is released.  This avoids any uncertainty about which objects will be selected by the bounding box.</para></listitem>

		<listitem><para>When a bounding box is being dragged out within a scrollable window, support automatic scrolling of that window when the box is dragged near the window's edges.</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>

	<figure> <title>Examples illustrating dynamic selection highlighting during bounding box selection.  In the first example, the folder color and label highlighting changes to indicate selection.  In the second, selection is indicated by the addition of resizing handles to selected objects.</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-select-files.png" format="PNG" width="509" depth="166"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-select-files.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Example illustrating dynamic selection highlighting during bounding box selection</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>

	  <mediaobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-select-graphics.png" format="PNG" width="598" depth="147"/></imageobject>
	    <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-select-graphics.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	    <textobject><phrase>Example illustrating dynamic selection highlighting during bounding box selection</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	  
	</figure>

      </sect3>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 id="drag-drop">
      <title>Ziehen und Ablegen</title>

      <para>Drag and drop is a direct manipulation technique, where you perform actions on selected objects by moving them around the screen with the mouse.  You "drag" an object by clicking it, then holding the button while you move the pointer to the object's target location.  The object is "dropped" at that location by releasing the mouse button.</para>
      
      <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

      	<listitem><para>Use drag and drop only where the user can reasonably guess what the effect might be.  The most common uses are:</para>
		<itemizedlist>
		<listitem><para>to move or copy objects from one place to another</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>to link one object to another</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>to perform an action on the objects by dropping them onto an icon representing that action, such as a trash can or printer icon.</para></listitem>
		</itemizedlist>
	</listitem>
      
      	<listitem><para>Provide visual feedback throughout a drag and drop operation. Highlight valid targets and change the mouse pointer as it passes over them.  Use the "no drop" mouse pointer when passing over invalid drop targets. See also <xref linkend="drag-drop-pointers"/>.</para></listitem>	

	<listitem><para>Augment the mouse pointer with a representation of the objects being dragged.  Keep this representation small or make it translucent, so as not to obscure possible drop targets underneath it. See also <xref linkend="drag-drop-pointers"/>.</para>

		<figure>
		<title>Example of copy pointer augmented by an icon representing the file being copied</title>
		<mediaobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor.png" format="PNG" width="101" depth="129"/></imageobject>
		<imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
		<textobject><phrase>Copy pointer superimposed on icon representing a file being copied, to form a "copy file" pointer</phrase></textobject>
		</mediaobject>
		</figure>
	</listitem>

	<listitem><para>Only allow objects to be copied between applications, not moved.  This avoids any confusion about which application's <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> function reverses the operation.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Allow the user to cancel a drag and drop operation by all of these methods:</para> 
		<itemizedlist>
		<listitem><para>pressing <keycap>Esc</keycap> before releasing the mouse button</para></listitem>
		
		<listitem><para>dropping the object back on its original location</para></listitem>
		
		<listitem><para>performing a <action>query drag</action> and selecting <guimenuitem>Cancel</guimenuitem> on the pop-up menu (see <xref linkend="drag-drop-query"/>)</para></listitem>
		
		<listitem><para>dropping the object on an invalid drop target.</para></listitem>
		</itemizedlist>
	</listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Allow the user to undo the effects a drag and drop operation by selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para></listitem>
	
      	<listitem><para>Allow multiple objects to be dragged by <keycap>Shift</keycap> or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> selecting them, then dragging any one of the selected objects.</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>Ensure that keyboard users can replicate all drag and drop actions using only menu items or keyboard shortcuts, such as <guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem> (<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>C</keycap></keycombo>) and <guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem> (<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>V</keycap></keycombo>).</para></listitem>

	<listitem><para>When an item is being dragged within or into a scrollable window, support automatic scrolling of that window when the mouse is moved near its edges.</para></listitem>
	
	<listitem><para>Pop up a menu when the user attemps to drop multiple objects on a target that only accepts single objects.  On the menu, list all the objects being dragged, and a <guimenuitem>Cancel</guimenuitem> item.</para></listitem>

	<!-- CFB commenting this one out for now because it doesn't mean much the way it's written, and we'd ideally like to aim for more consistency than this anyway
	
	<listitem><para>Move selected objects when the user drags them within a container.  Copy or link to selected objects when the user drags them between containers.  A "container" may be a boundary imposed by the user interface (e.g. a top-level application window), or a user interface representation of a physical container (e.g. a mail server or disk partition).</para>
	
	<para><remark>The whole "dragging between containers" thing concerns me, as it's not always obvious to users what constitues a "container", especially when it gets down to physical details that the user may not even know or care about (e.g. different disk partitions). This is why the right mouse drag menu we're now discrediting came into existence in the first place.  There are also exceptions to the rule, e.g. dragging anything into Trash should presumably move it rather than copy it.</remark></para></listitem>
	-->
	
      </itemizedlist>

	
      
      <sect3 id="drag-drop-override"><title>Overriding drag and drop behavior</title>
      
      	<sect4 id="drag-drop-modifiers"><title>Keyboard Modifiers</title>
      	<para>Allow the user to force the behavior of a drag and drop operation by holding the <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>, <keycap>Shift</keycap> or both keys throughout.  If the user changes modifier keys after they have started the drag, change the mouse pointer immediately and perform the new action when the mouse button is released.</para>

	<table frame="all">
	  <title>Effect of modifier keys during a drag and drop operation</title>
	  <tgroup cols="2" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Zusatztaste</entry>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	    <row>
	      <entry><keycap>Ctrl</keycap></entry>
	      <entry>Kopieren</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row>
	      <entry><keycap>Shift</keycap></entry>
	      <entry>Verschieben</entry>
	    </row>
	    <row>
	      <entry><keycombo><keycap>Umschalttaste</keycap><keycap>Strg</keycap></keycombo></entry>
	      <entry>Create link, shortcut or alias</entry>
	    </row>
	  </tbody>
	</tgroup>
      </table>
      </sect4>
      
      <sect4 id="drag-drop-query"><title>Query Drag</title>
      
      	<para>Allow the user to drag objects with the <mousebutton>middle button </mousebutton>, or with <keycap>Alt</keycap><mousebutton> left button</mousebutton>. Pop up a menu when the mouse button is released, offering the choice of <guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem>, <guimenuitem>Move</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Link</guimenuitem> (or whichever subset of those actions is available), and <guimenuitem>Cancel</guimenuitem>.  Dragging in this way is known as <action>query drag</action> because it prompts the user before changing anything.</para>

      </sect4>
      
      </sect3>

	<sect3 id="drag-drop-pointers">
	  <title>Mouse Pointers to Use for Drag and Drop</title>
	  
	  <para>Use the default GTK drag and drop pointers for the standard transfer operations listed below.  This consistency helps ensure the user will know exactly what to expect when they release the mouse button.  If you have to design a pointer for a non-standard transfer action not listed here, follow the style of the standard pointers.</para>

	  <table frame="all">
	    <title>Mauszeiger für Ziehen und Ablegen</title>
	    <tgroup cols="2" align="left">
	      <thead>
		<row>
		  <entry>Zeigerform</entry>
		  <entry>Bedeutung</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	      
	      <tbody>
		<row>
		  <entry>
	            <mediaobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-move.png" format="PNG" width="31" depth="32"/></imageobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-move.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	              <textobject><phrase>"Move" pointer</phrase></textobject>
	             </mediaobject>
                  </entry>
		  
		  <entry>Move selection. The dragged selection will be moved to the drop location, removing it from its previous location.</entry>
		</row>
		
		<row>
		  <entry>
                    <mediaobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-copy.png" format="PNG" width="33" depth="30"/></imageobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-copy.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	              <textobject><phrase>"Copy" pointer</phrase></textobject>
	             </mediaobject>
                  </entry>
		  <entry>Copy selection.  The dragged selection will be copied to the drop location, leaving the original intact.</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry>
                    <mediaobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-link.png" format="PNG" width="37" depth="33"/></imageobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-link.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	              <textobject><phrase>"Link" pointer</phrase></textobject>
	             </mediaobject>
                  </entry>
		  <entry>Link selection.  A link to the selection will be inserted at the drop location.  How the link appears will be application-dependent, it may be a hyperlink, an icon, or a duplicate of the original selection, for example.</entry>
		</row>

		<row>
		  <entry>
                    <mediaobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-query.png" format="PNG" width="28" depth="32"/></imageobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-query.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	              <textobject><phrase>"Query drop" pointer</phrase></textobject>
	             </mediaobject>
                   </entry>
		   <entry>Middle button or Alt-left button drag.  A pop-up menu will be posted at the drop location to ask whether the user wants to Move, Copy, or Link the selection, or Cancel the operation.</entry>
		  </row>
	
		<row>
		  <entry>
                     <mediaobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-nodrop.png" format="PNG" width="28" depth="32"/></imageobject>
		      <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-drag-cursor-nodrop.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	              <textobject><phrase>"Can't drop here" pointer</phrase></textobject>
	             </mediaobject>
</entry>
		  <entry>Can't drop here.  Show this pointer while the mouse is over an area where the selection cannot be dropped.</entry>
		</row>
	      </tbody>
	    </tgroup>
	  </table>


	</sect3>
	</sect2>
	
	<sect2 id="mouse-interaction-applets">
	  
	  <title>Mouse Interaction with Panel Applications (Applets)</title>

	  <para>All objects on the desktop must behave consistently.  Despite their specialized nature, applets are no exception.</para>
	  
	  <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
	    <listitem><para>The unmodified left mouse button must be sufficient to operate all your applet's controls.  Applets are meant to be simple enough that modified clicking, or clicking with other mouse buttons (except to pop up the applet's menu) is never required.</para></listitem>
	    
	    <listitem><para>Clicking the right button <emphasis>anywhere</emphasis> within the applet's enclosing window must display either the popup menu for the whole applet, or the popup menu for the control under the mouse pointer.  Do not have "dead areas" in your applet that do not respond to a right click.</para></listitem>
	    
	    <listitem><para>Do not use the middle button for anything except dragging the applet to a new location.  Middle-clicking and dragging anywhere within the applet window must move the applet, do not require a drag bar or similar device.</para>
		<para><keycombo action="other" otheraction="drag"><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><mousebutton>left button</mousebutton></keycombo> <action>drag</action> should copy the applet, if moving to another panel; unmodified drag or <keycombo action="other" otheraction="drag"><keycap>Shift</keycap><mousebutton>left button</mousebutton></keycombo> <action>drag</action> should move the applet, if moving to another panel.  If moving within same panel, <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>=switched movement, <keycap>Shift</keycap>=push movement, <keycap>Alt</keycap>=free movement.</para></listitem>

	  </itemizedlist>
	  
	</sect2>
	
    </sect1>
    
    
    <sect1 id="input-keyboard">
      <title>Keyboard Interaction</title>
      
      
      <sect2 id="keyboard-navigation">
	<title>Tastatursteuerung</title>
	
	<para>A well-designed keyboard user interface plays a key role when you are designing applications. Many power-users prefer to perform most operations with the keyboard rather than the mouse. Visually-impaired users can navigate software more effectively using the keyboard, because using the mouse depends on visual feedback of the mouse pointer location. And mobility impairments can prevent a user from successfully navigating using the mouse, because of the fine motor control skills required.</para>
	
	<para>Make all mouse actions available from the keyboard, and include keyboard access to all toolbars, menus, links and buttons. Every function your application provides must be available using the keyboard alone. Hiding your mouse while you test your application is a great way to test this!</para>
	
	
	<figure>
	  <title>Dialog and menu, with some of their access and shortcut keys indicated</title>
	  <mediaobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-accesskeys-shortcuts.png" format="PNG" width="497" depth="399"/></imageobject>
	  <imageobject><imagedata fileref="images/input-accesskeys-shortcuts.eps" format="EPS"/></imageobject>
	  <textobject><phrase>Screenshot of a dialog and a menu with some of their access keys and shortcut keys highlighted</phrase></textobject>
	  </mediaobject>
	</figure>

	<para>Most functionality is easy to make available from the keyboard, by using access keys and shortcut keys, and the toolkit's built-in keyboard navigation features. All controls with labels should have access keys, and frequently-used menu items should be assigned shortcut keys. However, operations that rely on drag-and-drop, for example, may require more thought to make them keyboard accessible.</para>
		
	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Provide efficient keyboard access to all application features. In particular, ensure every control on menus and in dialogs are directly focusable using access keys or shortcut keys.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Use a logical keyboard navigation order. When navigating around a window with the Tab key, keyboard focus should move between controls in a predictable order.  In Western locales, this is normally left to right and top to bottom.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Ensure correct tab order for controls whose enabled state is dependent on check box, radio button or toggle button state. When such a button is selected, all its dependent controls should be enabled, and all the dependent controls of any other button in the group should be disabled. When the user selects a check box, radio button or toggle button that has dependent controls, do not automatically give focus to the first dependent control, but instead leave the focus on the button.  
<!-- See <xref linkend="keynav-examples"/>.--></para></listitem>
	  
	  
	  <listitem><para>Do not over-ride existing system-level accessibility features. For example, the MouseKeys feature in the GNOME <guilabel>Keyboard Accessibility</guilabel> preferences dialog allows mouse movement and button clicks to be simulated using the keypad. Therefore you cannot add features to your application that can only be accessed by pressing keys on the keypad, as users relying on the MouseKeys feature will not be able to use them.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Ensure that any text that can be selected with the mouse can also be selected with the keyboard.  This is a convenience for all users, but especially for those for whom fine control of the mouse is difficult.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Ensure that objects that can be resized or moved by drag and drop can also be resized or moved with the keyboard. For example, icons and windows on the desktop. Where precision sizing and placement is potentially important, e.g. shapes in a diagram, also consider providing a dialog into which you can type co-ordinates, or a means of snapping objects to a user-definable grid.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Do not use general navigation functions to trigger operations. For example, do not use basic <keycap>Tab</keycap> keyboard navigation in a dialog to activate any actions associated with a control.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Show keyboard-invoked menus, windows and tooltips near the object they relate to, but without hiding or obscuring the object to which the menu or tooltip refers,. In GNOME, popup menus are activated with <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo>, and tooltips with <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo>.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Provide more than one method to perform keyboard tasks where possible. Users may find some keys and key combinations easier to use than others.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Do not assign awkward reaches to frequently performed keyboard operations. Some people may only be able to use one hand on the keyboard, so shortcuts that can be easily used with one hand are preferable for common operations.  In any case, having to frequently perform long or difficult reaches on the keyboard can increase muscle strain for all users, increasing the risk of pain or injury.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Do not require repetitive use of simultaneous keypresses. Some users are only able to press and hold one key at a time. Assistive technologies such as the GNOME <guilabel>Keyboard Accessibility</guilabel> preferences dialog do allow users to press the keys sequentially rather than simultaneously, but this of course means the operation will take longer for them.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
	
	</sect2>

      <sect2 id="choosing-access-keys">
	<title>Choosing Access Keys</title>

	<para>Give all labelled components an access key (underlined letter), with the exception of toolbar controls which would use up too many access key combinations.</para>

<!-- Consensus was against giving OK and Cancel additional access keys, but they have them anyway and Owen refuses to remove them...

	<note>
	  <title>For discussion</title>
	  <para>It's been suggested that even OK and Cancel should have access keys, as this is more obvious to newer users.  (KDE does this).  What do we think?  Advantages: means you do not always have to have an Enter-operated default button in dialogs where this might lead you to close the dialog by mistake.  Disadvantages: Adds an extra way for people to do things, potentially adding the "dither" factor; uses up O and C access keys, which could be awkward in larger/tabbed dialogs.</para>
	</note>
-->

	<para>Choose access keys to be as easy to remember as possible.  Normally, this means using the first letter of the label.  However, in complex windows, the choice can become more difficult.  Here are some simple rules:</para>

	<orderedlist>
	    <listitem><para>Assign access keys to the most frequently-used controls first.  If it's not clear which controls will be the most frequently used, assign access keys from left to right, top to bottom (for Western locales).</para></listitem>


	  <listitem><para>Use the first letter of the label, or of one of its other words if it has more than one.  If another letter provides a better association (e.g. "x" in <guilabel>Extra Large</guilabel>) however, consider using that letter instead.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>If the first letter is not available, choose an easy to remember consonant from the label, for example, "p" in <guilabel>Replace</guilabel>.</para></listitem>
 
	  <listitem><para>If no such consonants are available, choose any available vowel from the label.</para></listitem>
	</orderedlist>

	   <para>If duplication of access keys in a window is unavoidable, you should still refrain from duplicating the access keys for any of these buttons that appear in the same window: <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, <guibutton>Close</guibutton>, <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> or <guibutton>Help</guibutton>.</para>

	   <para>Also, it is better not to assign access keys to "thin" letters (such as lowercase i or l), or letters with descenders (such as lowercase g or y) unless it is unavoidable.  The underline does not show up very well on those characters in some fonts.</para>


	<para>Applications using a non-Roman writing system in conjunction with a standard keyboard can have control labels prefixed with Roman characters as access keys.</para>
	
	</sect2>
      
      <sect2 id="shortcuts">
	<title>Choosing Shortcut Keys</title>

	<para>The tables in <xref linkend="standard-shortcuts"/> summarize the standard shortcut keys to use when your application supports those functions.  Your application will not necessarily support all of these functions, see <xref linkend="menus-standard"/> for more information.  However, use the recommended shortcut keys for those functions you do support.</para> 

	<para>You will probably want to add your own shortcut keys for functions specific to your application.  If so, as well as following the guidelines below, look at any other existing similar applications to see which shortcut keys they have defined.  Your users may already be using those or similar applications, so being consistent where it is possible and sensible to do so will provide a better user experience for them when they begin to use yours.</para>

	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title>

	  <listitem><para>Use <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>letter</keysym></keycombo> in preference to other combinations when choosing new shortcut keys.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para><keycap>Insert</keycap>, <keycap>Delete</keycap>, <keycap>Home</keycap>, <keycap>End</keycap>, <keycap>Page Up</keycap> and <keycap>Page Down</keycap> are acceptable shortcut keys for functions that are closely related to those keys' normal system-defined uses.  Do not assign them to unrelated functions just because you've run out of other shortcut key combinations, however.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Only assign shortcut keys to the most commonly-used actions in your application.  Do not try to assign a shortcut key to everything.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Choose new shortcut keys to be as mnemonic as possible, as these will be easier to learn and remember.  For example, <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>E</keycap></keycombo> would be a good shortcut for a menu item called <guimenuitem>Edit Page</guimenuitem>.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Use <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>letter</keycap></keycombo> for functions that reverse or extend another function.  For example, <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo> and <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo> for <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Redo</guimenuitem>.
	<note><title>Unicode entry shortcuts</title><para>Note that you cannot use <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>A-thru-F</keycap></keycombo> or <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>0-thru-9</keycap></keycombo> for your own purposes, as these combinations are used to enter unicode characters in text fields.</para></note>
	</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Do not use <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>number</keycap></keycombo> or numbered function keys as shortcut keys, unless the number has some obvious relevance to the action.  For example, <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>2</keycap></keycombo> and <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>3</keycap></keycombo> may be acceptable shortcut keys for <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>2D View</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>3D View</guimenuitem></menuchoice> in a 3D modelling application.</para></listitem>
	  	  
	  <listitem><para>Do not use <keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>key</keycap></keycombo> combinations for shortcut keys, as these may conflict with window manager or menu access keys.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Do not use symbols that require <keycap>Shift</keycap> or other modifiers as part of a shortcut, for example <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>%</keycap></keycombo>.  Remember that symbols that can be accessed without a modifier key on your keyboard may be more difficult to access on different international keyboards.</para></listitem>
	  
	  <listitem><para>Do not assign shortcut keys to menu items that change over time, for example a list of open windows on the <guimenu>Window</guimenu> menu, or a recently-used file list on the <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu.  Do assign access keys to these items, however.</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Do not use any of the standard shortcut keys listed in <xref linkend="standard-shortcuts"/> for your own purposes,  even if your application doesn't support those functions.  This helps reinforce consistency between all GNOME applications.</para></listitem>

	</itemizedlist>
   </sect2>	
   
   <sect2 id="standard-shortcuts">
   	<title>Standard Application Shortcut Keys</title>	

	<para>If your application uses any of the standard functions listed in the following tables, use the recommended standard keyboard shortcut for that function.</para>
	
	<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard GNOME application shortcut keys and access keys - File menu</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>N</accel>ew</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>N</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Ein neues Dokument erstellen</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>O</accel>pen</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>O</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Ein Dokument öffnen</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>ave</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Das aktuelle Dokument speichern</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>rint</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Das aktuelle Dokument drucken</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>lose</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Das aktuelle Dokument schließen</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>Q</accel>uit</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Q</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Die Anwendung beenden</entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>

	<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard GNOME application shortcut keys and access keys - Edit menu</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>U</accel>ndo</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Letzte Operation rückgängig machen</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>edo</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Letzte Operation rückgängig machen</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Cu<accel>t</accel></guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>X</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Cut the selected area and store it in the clipboard</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>opy</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>C</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Ausgewählten Bereich in die Zwischenablage kopieren</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>P</accel>aste</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>V</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Paste contents of clipboard at mouse/cursor position</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>uplicate</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>U</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Duplicate the currently-selected items and add them to the same window, without affecting the clipboard</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Select <accel>A</accel>ll</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>A</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Select everything in focused control or window</entry>
	      </row>

	    <!--  <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Deselect All</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>A</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Deselect everything in focused control or window</entry>
	      </row>-->
	      
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>In<accel>v</accel>ert Selection</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>I</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Select everything in focused control or window that was previously unselected, and deselect everything that was previously selected</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>D</accel>elete</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycap>Del</keycap></entry>
		<entry>Die Auswahl löschen</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>ind...</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Find matches in the current document, highlighting them in-place</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>earch...</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap></keycombo> (see note below)</entry>
		<entry>Search for matches in multiple documents, files or other external sources</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Find Ne<accel>x</accel>t</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>G</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Find the next match</entry>
	      </row>
<!-- Replace may go depending on response to mpt's comment that Replace should be part of standard Find dialog functionality-->
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>eplace...</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>H</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Find and replace matches</entry>
	      </row>
		  <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>R<accel>e</accel>name</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycap>F2</keycap></entry>
		<entry>Switch the selected item's label into edit mode, allowing user to type in a new name.</entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>

	<note><title>Find and Search</title>
		<para>If your application requires both <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Search</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu items, use <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap></keycombo> as the shortcut for <guimenuitem>Search</guimenuitem>.</para>
	</note>
	
<!--
	<note><title>For discussion</title> -->

<!-- Consensus was for "Deselect All" -->
	  <!-- <para>czr currently proposing "Select None" rather than "Deselect All", which is better?  I prefer the latter because it's more visually distinct on a menu, in English at least.</para> -->
	  <!-- Um, consensus was to be rid of the item, iirc. (GJM) -->
	  <!--<para>Should we call it "Find Next" or "Find Again"?</para> -->

	  <!--<para>czr currently proposing Ctrl+R for "Replace", but this clashes with "Reload" in most browser applications... not a problem until somebody writes a graphical HTML editor that you can also do search/replace in :o)  Ctrl+H is another common shortcut for "Replace", should we use this instead?  (It's not as easy to access with one hand, though, so maybe not).</para> -->

	  <!--<para>mpt suggesting that Replace should be part of Find dialog, so shortcut for Replace may not be required at all.</para>-->

	  <!-- Consensus is to keep Letter-based shortcut keys
	  <para>Kenneth suggests a more F-key-based system, e.g. F5 for Refresh rather than Ctrl+R, as "Ctrl+R" is only memorable if you happen to speak English... what's our view on this?</para>-->

<!--
	  </note>-->

	
	

	<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard GNOME application shortcut keys and access keys - View menu</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Zoom <accel>I</accel>n</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>Plus</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Zoom in on the document <remark>Should probably recommend that Ctrl-Equals work too</remark></entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Zoom <accel>O</accel>ut</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>Minus</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Zoom out of the document</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>N</accel>ormal Size</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>0</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Restore to zoom level to normal size (generally 100%)</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>efresh</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>R</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Redraw current view of document, without checking if content has changed</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>eload</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>R</keycap></keycombo> (see note below)</entry>
		<entry>Reload the current document, updating content from source if necessary</entry>
	      </row>
		  <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Pr<accel>o</accel>perties</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Enter</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Display the selected object's Properties window. May alternatively appear on the <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu if the document itself is the only object in the application whose properties can be inspected.</entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>

	<note><title>Neu laden und aktualisieren</title>
		<para>If your application requires both <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reload</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu items, use <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>R</keycap></keycombo> as the shortcut for <guimenuitem>Reload</guimenuitem>.</para>
	</note>
	
	<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard GNOME application shortcut keys and access keys - Bookmarks menu</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Add <accel>B</accel>ookmark</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>D</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Ein Lesezeichen für den aktuellen Ort hinzufügen</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>E</accel>dit Bookmarks...</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>B</keycap></keycombo> (siehe nachstehenden Hinweis)</entry>
		<entry>Open a window in which the user can edit and organise saved bookmarks</entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>
	
	<note><title>Bold and Edit Bookmarks</title>
		<para>If your application requires both <menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Bold</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and <menuchoice><guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu><guimenuitem>Edit Bookmarks...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu items, use <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>D</keycap></keycombo> as the shortcut for <guimenuitem>Edit Bookmarks</guimenuitem>.</para>
	</note>

	<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard GNOME application shortcut keys and access keys - Go menu</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>B</accel>ack</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keysym>Left</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Go to the previous location in the navigation chain</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Ne<accel>x</accel>t</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keysym>Right</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Go to the next location in the navigation chain</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>U</accel>p</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keysym>Up</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Go up one level in the navigation hierarchy</entry>
		  </row>
	    
		  <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>H</accel>ome</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keysym>Home</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Go to the starting page defined by the user or application</entry>
	      </row>
		  <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>L</accel>ocation...</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>L</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Present or focus an entry field into which the user can type a new address or location to view</entry>
		</row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>

	
	<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard GNOME application shortcut keys and access keys - Format menu</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>B</accel>old</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>B</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Make selected text bold/regular</entry>
		</row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>U</accel>nderline</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>U</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Underline/remove underline from selected text</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>I</accel>talic</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>I</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Make selected text italic/regular</entry>
	      </row>  
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>

<!--	<note><title>For discussion</title>
	  <para>Is it acceptable to specify the same shortcut for <menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Bold</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and <menuchoice><guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu><guimenuitem>Edit Bookmarks</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, given that the two aren't likely to occur in the same application?  Or could/should we provide a second choice for one of them on the off-chance that they do coincide?</para>
	</note>
-->

	<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard GNOME application shortcut keys and access keys - Help menu</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>ontents</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycap>F1</keycap></entry>
		<entry>Show help contents page for the current application</entry>
	      </row>
		  
		  <!-- Doesn't appear on menus so probably doesn't belong in this table
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>(Context Help)</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Show online help for the currently focused control or window</entry>
	      </row>-->
		  
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>

<!--
	<note>
	  <title>For Discussion</title>
	  <para>Greg suggested Ctrl+H for Search Help... this doesn't seem to me to be an important enough function to tie up Ctrl+H with, though, anyone got any other views/alternative suggestions?</para>
	</note>
-->	  

    <sect3 id="window-manager-navigation">
	<title>Standard Window Manager Shortcut Keys</title>
	<para>The following shortcut keys are used by many window managers, and should not normally be over-ridden by your application.</para>

<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard window manager shortcut keys and access keys</title>
	  <tgroup cols="3" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
		<entry>Kürzel</entry>
		<entry>Beschreibung</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry>Switch primary windows</entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Switch focus to the next or previous top level window on the desktop</entry>
	      </row>

	      <row>
		<entry>Switch panels</entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Switch focus to the next or previous panel on the desktop</entry>
	      </row>

	      <row>
		<entry>Abmelden</entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Del</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Den Bestätigungsdialog zum Abmelden von der Sitzung öffnen</entry>
	      </row>

	      <row>
		<entry>Fenstermenü</entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Space</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Das Fenstermenü öffnen</entry>
		</row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>C</accel>lose</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F4</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Das fokussierte Fenster schließen</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>estore</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F5</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Das fokussierte Fenster in seiner ursprünglichen Größe wiederherstellen</entry>
	      </row>
		<row>
			<entry><guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>witch secondary windows</guimenuitem></entry>
			<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F6</keycap></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F6</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Switch focus to the next or previous secondary window associated with the application (<remark>precise functionality for metacity TBD, see bug 94682</remark>)</entry>
		</row>

	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>M</accel>ove</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F7</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Das fokussierte Fenster verschieben</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Re<accel>s</accel>ize</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F8</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Die Größe des fokussierten Fensters ändern</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Mi<accel>n</accel>imize</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F9</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Das fokussierte Fenster minimieren</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem>Ma<accel>x</accel>imize</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Das fokussierte Fenster maximieren</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><guimenuitem><accel>F</accel>ull Screen</guimenuitem></entry>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F11</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Show the window in full screen mode, with no border, menubar, toolbar or statusbar</entry>
	      </row>

	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>
	</sect3>

      <sect3 id="widget-navigation">
	<title>Standard Widget Navigation Shortcut Keys</title>
	<para>The following shortcut keys are reserved for keyboard navigation use by the various widgets used in GNOME, and should not normally be over-ridden by your application.</para>

	<table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	  <title>Standard GNOME keyboard navigation keys for widgets</title>
	  <tgroup cols="2" align="left">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry>Schlüssel</entry>
		<entry>Funktion</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>
	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycap>Tab</keycap>, <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Moves keyboard focus to next/previous control</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Moves keyboard focus out of enclosing widget to next/previous control, in those situations where Tab alone has another function (e.g. GtkTextView)</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Pop up tooltip for currently-focused control</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Show context-sensitive help for currently-focused window or control</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycap>F6</keycap>, <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>F6</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Give focus to next/previous pane in a GtkPaned window</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycap>F8</keycap></entry>
		<entry>Give focus to splitter bar in paned window</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycap>F10</keycap></entry>
		<entry>Give focus to window's menu bar</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Pop up contextual menu for currently-selected objects</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keysym>Space</keysym></entry>
		<entry>Toggle selected state of focused check box, radio button, or toggle button</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keysym>Return</keysym></entry>
		<entry>Activate focused button, menu item etc.</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycap>Home</keycap>, <keycap>End</keycap></entry>
		<entry>Select/move to first item in selected widget</entry>
	      </row>
	      <row>
		<entry><keycap>PageUp</keycap>, <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>PageUp</keycap></keycombo>, <keycap>PageDown</keycap>, <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>PageDown</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		<entry>Scroll selected view by one page up/left/down/right</entry>
	      </row>
 	      </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</table>
	     
      </sect3>
      
	<sect3 id="additional-widget-navigation">
	  <title>Additional Widget Navigation Shortcut Keys</title>
	  
	  <para>The following emacs-style navigation shortcut keys are still available in GNOME 2.0 text entry fields (by selecting the "emacs" scheme in the GNOME <guilabel>Keyboard Shortcuts</guilabel> preferences dialog), but are disabled by default.  Since some users will still want to use them, do not over-ride them for your own purposes in any situations where a text entry control has focus.</para>

	  <table frame="all" pgwide="1">
	    <title>Emacs-style navigation keys for widgets</title>
	    <tgroup cols="2" align="left">
	      <thead>
		<row>
		  <entry>Schlüssel</entry>
		  <entry>Funktion</entry>
		</row>
	      </thead>
	      <tbody>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>A</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Move cursor to beginning of line</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>D</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Delete character following/under cursor</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>E</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Cursor an das Zeilenende setzen</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>K</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Von der Eingabemarke bis zum Ende der Zeile löschen</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>U</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Die aktuelle Zeile löschen</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>In die Zwischenablage ausschneiden</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Y</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Inhalt der Zwischenablage einfügen</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>Space</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Markierung setzen</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Del</keycap></keycombo>, <keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>D</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Von der Eingabemarke bis zum Ende des Wortes löschen</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keysym>Backspace</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Von der Eingabemarke bis zum Anfang des Wortes löschen</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keysym>Space</keysym></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Delete all whitespace around cursor, reinsert single space</entry>
		</row>
		<row>
		  <entry><keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>\</keycap></keycombo></entry>
		  <entry>Delete all whitespace around cursor</entry>
		</row>
	      </tbody>
	    </tgroup>
	  </table>
	  
	</sect3>
	
      </sect2>
      
      <sect2 id="keynav-applets">
	<title>Keyboard Interaction with Panel Applications (Applets)</title>

	<para>Panels have been fully keyboard navigable since GNOME 2.0.  Since your panel application can gain keyboard focus, you must ensure that it is also keyboard navigable.</para>

	<para>The rules for panel application keyboard navigation are mostly the same as those for any other window.  However, there is one imporant difference:</para>

	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem><para>Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key as the means of moving focus between controls in a panel application.  Use the arrow keys for this purpose instead.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	<para>When an object on a panel has focus, the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key normally moves focus to the next object on the panel.  If your panel application also used <keycap>Tab</keycap> for its own internal navigation, the user would have to press <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo> to move focus out of your panel application instead.  This inconsistency would be detrimental to the user experience.</para>
	
      </sect2>
      
  </sect1>
  </chapter>





  <chapter id="language">
    <title>Sprache</title>

    <para>Consistent labelling creates a familiar environment that the user can navigate comfortably. The more familiar the environment, the easier task of finding information.</para>

    <sect1 id="language-labels">
      <title>Beschriftungen</title>
      
      <sect2 id="language-controls"> 
	<title>Bedienelemente</title> 
	<para>Clear, consistent and concise labelling of controls helps users to work out the purpose of a window or dialog they have never seen before. To a visually-impaired user, clear labels are even more important. A user who relies on a screenreader has no assistance from icons, layout, or spacing to work out what the controls do, so clear labelling is essential.</para>
	
	<itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title> 
	  <listitem><para>Keep labels short.  This:
	    <itemizedlist> 
		<listitem><para>Reduces the expansion of text when translated, and thus minimizes the effort required to localize the UI. Translated English text can expand up to 30% in some languages.</para></listitem> 
		
		<listitem><para>Facilitates the use of translation engines.</para></listitem> 
		<listitem><para>Improves speed of comprehension for the user.</para></listitem> 
	      </itemizedlist> 
         </para>
	    
	    <para>Do not shorten your labels to the point of losing meaning, however. A three-word label that provides clear information is better than a one-word label that is ambiguous or vague. Try to find the fewest possible words to satisfactorily convey the meaning of your label.</para></listitem> 
	  
	  <listitem><para>Do not include text in windows that describes <emphasis>how</emphasis> to use the interface, for example <guilabel>You can install a new theme by dropping it here</guilabel>.  As well as adding visual clutter, descriptive labels can also conflict with information provided in documentation.</para></listitem> 
	  
	  <listitem><para>Use standard terms.  You can find a list of standard user interface terms in the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/gdp-style-guide/stable/wordlist.html.en">GNOME Documentation Style Guide, Recommended Terminology</ulink>.</para></listitem> 
	  
	  <listitem><para>Apply standard capitalization rules.  See <xref linkend="layout-capitalization"/> for guidelines about capitalization of user interface labels </para></listitem> 
	</itemizedlist>

      </sect2> 
      
      <sect2> 
	<title>Minihilfen</title> 
	
	<sect3>
	  <title>Minihilfen für Werkzeugleisten</title>
	  
	  <para>A toolbar tooltip is the short description of a toolbar control's functionality that the user sees when they mouse over it.</para>

	  <itemizedlist> <title>Richtlinien</title>
	    <listitem><para>Concisely state the purpose of the control.  The tooltip should be more descriptive than the corresponding menu item name, if there is one, but not verbose.  For example, <guilabel>Undo last action</guilabel> for the <guibutton>Undo</guibutton> button.</para></listitem> 

	    <listitem><para>Use sentence capitalization rules. See <xref linkend="layout-capitalization"/>.</para></listitem> 
	  </itemizedlist>            
	  
	</sect3> 
	
	<sect3>
	  <title>Minihilfen in Anwendungen</title> 

	  <para>An application tooltip is the short description of your application that the user sees when they mouse over the launcher or menu item for your application.  It is stored in the <structfield>comment</structfield> field of your application's <filename>desktop</filename> file. See <xref linkend="menu-item-tooltips"/></para>

	  <itemizedlist><title>Richtlinien</title> 
	    <listitem><para>Create short tooltips. Aim to accurately communicate the functionality of an element with the fewest words possible.</para></listitem> 
	    <listitem><para>Use sentence capitalization rules. See <xref linkend="layout-capitalization"/>.</para></listitem> 
	    
	    <listitem><para>Use standard punctuation rules, with the exception that you do not use a period to end the tooltip.</para></listitem> 
	    
	  </itemizedlist> 
	</sect3> 
      </sect2> 
      
      
      <sect2> 
	<title>Menüs</title> 
	
	<itemizedlist> <title>Richtlinien</title>
	
	  <listitem><para>Use the recommended standard labels for menu items and titles, where they exist. Do not use synonyms such as <guimenuitem>Exit</guimenuitem> instead of <guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem>. See <xref linkend="menus-standard"/> for a list and descriptions of standard menu items and titles.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Use header capitalization rules for all menu items and titles. See <xref linkend="layout-capitalization"/> for more information.</para></listitem> 
	    
	</itemizedlist> 
	
      </sect2>
      
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="language-errors">
      <title>Warnungen und Fehlermeldungen</title>
	<para>Eine gute Warn- oder Fehlermeldung enthält zwei Elemente:</para>
	<orderedlist>
		<listitem><para>Eine Kurzbeschreibung des Problems</para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Eine Liste von Möglichkeiten, wie der Benutzer das Problem beheben kann.</para></listitem>
	</orderedlist>

	<para>Beide dieser Elemente sollten in einer nicht-technischen und jargonfreien Sprache präsentiert werden, es sei denn, Ihr Zielpublikum ist technisch versiert.</para>

	<para>If your application knows enough about the problem to be able to give all this information to the user, it will often be capable of rectifying the problem itself when the user has decided which course of action they want to take.  For example, if the problem is insufficient memory, tell the user which currently-running application is taking up the most memory, and provide a button to close it for them.  (Do not offer to launch a graphical process manager, however, which is something most users should never see!)</para>

	<para>See <xref linkend="windows-alert"/> for more detailed information on writing and presenting errors, warnings and information alerts.</para>
    </sect1>


    <sect1 id="language-help">
      <title>Online-Hilfe</title>
	<para>Writing online help is a specialized task, and is therefore not covered in any depth here.  Refer to the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/gdp-style-guide/stable/">GNOME Documentation Styleguide</ulink> for guidance on writing clear, consistent and helpful documentation for your application.</para>
    </sect1>

  </chapter>





<!-- we can change the title as soon as the content is written
     I want the document to be as usable and correct as possible
     this week -seth

  <chapter id="checklists">
    <title>Checklists</title>
-->


  <chapter id="reality-checks">
    <title>Checklisten</title>
    <sect1 id="checks-yourself">
      <title>Dinge, die Sie selbst tun können</title>
      <sect2>
	<title>Bevor Sie beginnen</title>

	<para>Write down the type of people you expect to use your application.  Then write some "scenarios" for each type of user— a little story that describes the typical tasks those users will use your application for.  These tasks should be along the lines of:</para>

	<blockquote><para>Fred needs to find an email about widgets that he received last week</para></blockquote>

<!-- CB: Flow chart diagram.  Boxes with arrows showing flow of user scenario 
example.  An transitional paragraph probably needs to be added after the "right" vs. "wrong" text examples shown, that basically says: You can use a flow chart, as shown below, to sketch out an expected user scenario. -->

	<para>anstelle von</para>

	<blockquote><para>Fred clicks on the <guibutton>Find</guibutton> button and types <userinput>widgets</userinput> into the dialog.</para></blockquote>

	<para>This way, you can use the same scenarios to test and compare different interface designs, and to spot any missing functionality.</para>

	<para>Include these user descriptions and scenarios with the documentation you commit to CVS.  This way, other contributors will get to understand your users too, can help to develop the application with that knowledge, and can provide more scenarios of their own.</para>
      </sect2>
      
      <sect2>
	<title>Tastaturzugriff und Fokus</title>

	<para>When you have started implementing your interface, hide your mouse, and make sure you can still use it to do everything using only the keyboard. Implement keyboard functionality at the same time as mouse functionality— don't leave it until the end.</para>

<!-- CB: This is a non-figure comment, I couldn't help myself.  The first sentence in the paragraph directly above, is badly written.  The word "it" is ambiguous in the sentence because it likely refers to the mouse!  Please correct. -->

	<para>Using only keyboard commands, move the focus through all menu bars and toolbars in the application. Also confirm that:</para>
	
<!-- CB-Ed: OK I'll just make all non-figures comments tagged with CB-Ed.  The above paragraph should be part of the bulleted list below. -->

<!-- CB-Fig: All figures comments will be tagged with CB-Fig.  A single figure showing an example GUI with callouts highlighting bulleted points would be great. Perhaps visually box bulleted elements and then "zoom" them out with callout text.  -->
	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem><para>Context sensitive menus display correctly (<keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo>).</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Tooltips can be popped up and down for all controls that have them (<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo>, <keycap>Esc</keycap>).</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>All functions listed on the toolbar can be performed using the keyboard.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>You can fully operate every control in the client area of the application and dialogs.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Text and objects within the client area can be selected.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Any keyboard enhancements or shortcut keys are working as designed.</para></listitem>

	  <listitem><para>Verify that when moving among objects, the visual focus indicator is easy to identify at all times.</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
	
      </sect2>
      
      <sect2>
	<title>Themen, Farben und Kontrast</title>

	<para>Test various GNOME themes to ensure that your application respects all the available settings.</para>

	<para>Test your application with black and white, high contrast themes and confirm that all information is still conveyed correctly.  If you don't have a suitable high contrast GNOME theme available to test, print off some screenshots in black and white (not grayscale) and make sure all the important information is still visible— this will approximate what a high contrast theme user will see.</para>
      </sect2>

      <sect2>
	<title>Animation</title>

	<para>Ensure you have implemented an option to turn off any animation in your application (for accessibility reasons), and that it is working as designed.  Turn the animation off. Confirm that all information is still conveyed correctly.</para>
      </sect2>
    </sect1>
    
    <sect1 id="checks-other-people">
      <title>Things You Can Do With Other People</title>
      <sect2>
	<title>Get Early Feedback</title>
	
	<para>It's always tempting, but don't start coding your interface straight away.  Sketch out some ideas on paper first, or in Glade or HTML if you prefer.  (But don't be tempted add any functionality at this point if you do it this way!)</para>

	<para>Show these prototypes to other people— the GNOME mailing lists and IRC are ideal for finding likely candidates.  Ask them to use these prototype interfaces to run through some of the scenarios you came up with earlier.  You'll probably get questions like "how would I do X", "which menu is Y on"... these questions will help you think about the interface from the user's viewpoint.  You'll probably also get a few suggestions about how to do things differently— these ideas may or may not turn out to better than yours, but any idea from a potential user is worth considering!</para>

	<para>You should also consider seeking opinions from the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gup/">GNOME Usability team</ulink>.  They have designed many user interfaces before and may be able to spot potential problems at this early stage, before you take your design too far to change easily.</para>

	<para>Once you've decided on the basic interface design and have started coding parts of it, find somebody to try it out again— it doesn't have to be the same person.  You'll probably find some more problems that were hard to see on your static paper prototype.  By finding these now, it's usually not too late to fix them without too much trouble.</para>
      </sect2>
      
      
      <sect2>
	<title>Internationalisierung und Lokalisierung</title>

	<para>If you intend your application to be translated into different languages, show draft designs of your application to the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gtp/contact.html">GNOME Translation Team</ulink>.  They'll help you find potential translation problems, such as not leaving enough space for translated labels, shortcut keys that cause problems on a different keyboard layout, or using new terms in your app that are hard to translate.</para>

	<para>If possible, try out your application with users from the locales you are targeting.  This will help you determine whether users understand how to use the application, if they perceive the graphics and colors the way you intended, and if there are words or images in the application that may cause offence to users of that locale. </para>
      </sect2>

    </sect1>
  </chapter>




  <chapter id="credits">
    <title>Danksagungen</title>
    <para>(Liste in alphabetischer Ordnung, falls Sie zu Unrecht nicht erwähnt werden, schreiben Sie eine E-Mail an die Autoren oder <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=HIG">erstellen Sie eine Fehlermeldung</ulink>)</para>
    <sect1 id="credits-active-authors">
      <title>Aktive Autoren</title>
      <para>
	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem><para>Calum Benson, <email>calum.benson@sun.com</email></para></listitem>
          <listitem><para>Bryan Clark, <email>clarkbw@gnome.org</email></para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Seth Nickell, <email>seth@gnome.org</email></para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
      </para>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="credits-figures">
	<title>Zusätzliche Illustrationen</title>
	<para>
	  <itemizedlist>
	  	<listitem><para>Mihai Anca, <email>ropiku@gmail.com</email></para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Denis Anisimov, <email>genius@s146.net.ru</email></para></listitem>
		<listitem><para>Wouter Bron, <email>wousser@gmail.com</email></para></listitem>
	  </itemizedlist>
	</para>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="credits-inactive-authors">
      <title>Frühere/inaktive Autoren</title>
      <para>
	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem><para>Coleen Baik</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Adam Elman</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Colin Z. Robertson</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Maciej Stachowiak</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
      </para>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 id="credits-reviewers-contributors">
      <title>Korrekturleser und Mitwirkende</title>

      <para>
	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem><para>Chip Alexander</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Kathy Fernandes</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>John Fleck</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Andrea Mankoski</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Nils Pederson</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Sebastian Rittau</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Christian Rose</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Sharon Snider</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Suzanna Smith</para></listitem>
	  <listitem><para>Matthew Thomas</para></listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
      </para>

</sect1>
</chapter>


<bibliography id="bibliography">
  <para>This bibliography lists books and other resources for software engineers, user interface designers, and human factors specialists, arranged by topic and without a particular ordering. The final section of the bibliography contains information about useful online resources and organizations.</para>
  <bibliodiv>
    <title>Allgemeines Design</title>
    <bibliomixed id="Dreyfus1967">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
        <surname>Dreyfuss</surname>, <firstname>Henry</firstname>
        <title role="book">Designing for People</title>
        <address><city>New York</city>, <state>NY</state></address>:
        <publishername>allworth press</publishername>,
        <pubdate>2003</pubdate>
        <bibliomisc>A reprint of the 1960s design classic by the designer of everything from the modern airplane cabin to the Bell telephone. Perhaps the best book for introducing the general concerns and thought patterns of design (industrial, product, or interaction), as well as an entertaining read.</bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Mandel1997">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<surname>Mandel</surname>, <firstname>Theo</firstname>.
	<title role="book">The Elements of User Interface Design</title>.
	<address><city>New York</city>, <state>NY</state></address>:
	<publishername>Wiley Computer Publishing</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1997</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc>A useful book covering all the basics and a wide scope of environments and new developments like interface agents, wizards, voice interaction, social user interfaces and web design.</bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Norman1990">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<surname>Norman</surname>, <firstname>Donald A.</firstname>
	<title role="book">The Design of Everyday Things</title>.
	<address><city>New York</city>, <state>NY</state></address>:
	<publishername>Doubleday</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1990</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc>An exceptional and entertaining book about the design behind simple daily things.</bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
  </bibliodiv>
  <bibliodiv>
    <title>Grafisches Design</title>
    <bibliomixed id="Horton1994">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<surname>Horton</surname>, <firstname>William</firstname>
	<title role="book">The Icon Book: Visual Symbols for Computer Systems and Documentation</title>.
	<address><city>New York</city>, <state>NY</state></address>:
	<publishername>John Wiley &amp; Sons</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1994</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book -David</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Misjksenaar1999">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<surname>Misjksenaar</surname>, <firstname>Paul</firstname> and
	<firstname>Piet</firstname> <surname>Westendorpp</surname>.
	<title role="book">Open Here: The Art of Instructional Design</title>.
	<address><city>London</city>, <country>UK</country></address>:
	<publishername>Thames &amp; Hudson</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1999</pubdate>
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book -David</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Mullet1995">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<surname>Mullet</surname>, <firstname>Kevin</firstname> and
	<firstname>Darrell</firstname> <surname>Sano</surname>.
	<title role="book">Designing Visual Interfaces: Communication Oriented Techniques</title>.
	<address><city>Englewood Cliffs</city>, <state>NJ</state></address>:
	<publishername>Prentice Hall</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1995</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book -David</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Rubin1994">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<surname>Rubin</surname>, <firstname>Jeffrey</firstname>.
	<title role="book">Handbook of Usability Testing: How to Plan, Design and Conduct Effective Tests</title>.
	<address><city>New York</city>, <state>NY</state></address>:
	<publishername>John Wiley &amp; Sons</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1994</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book -David</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Tufte1990">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<surname>Tufte</surname>, <firstname>Edward R.</firstname>
	<title role="book">Envisioning Information</title>.
	<address><city>Cheshire</city>, <state>CT</state></address>:
	<publishername>Graphics Press</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1990</pubdate>
	<bibliomisc>The second classic work on envisioning information by Tufte.</bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Tufte1992">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<surname>Tufte</surname>, <firstname>Edward R.</firstname>
	<title role="book">The Visual Display of Quantitative Information</title>.
	<edition>Reprint ed.</edition>,
	<address><city>Cheshire</city>, <state>CT</state></address>:
	<publishername>Graphics Press</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1992</pubdate>
	<bibliomisc>The first classic work on envisioning information by Tufte.</bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Williams1994">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<surname>Williams</surname>, <firstname>Robin</firstname>.
	<title role="book">The Non-Designer's Design Book: Design and Typographic Principles for the Visual Novice</title>.
	<address><city>Berkeley</city>, <state>CA</state></address>:
	<publishername>Peachpit Press</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1994</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book -David</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
  </bibliodiv>
  <bibliodiv>
    <title>Benutzerfreundlichkeit</title>
    <bibliomixed id="Arlov1997">
      <bibliomset role="book">
	<surname>Arlov</surname>, <firstname>Laura</firstname>.
	<title role="book">GUI Design for Dummies</title>.
	<address><city>Foster City</city>, <state>CA</state></address>:
	<publishername>IDG Books Worldwide</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1997</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book -David</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Cooper2003">
      <bibliomset role="book">
	<surname>Cooper</surname>, <firstname>Alan</firstname> and
	<surname>Reimann</surname>, <firstname>Robert</firstname>.
	<title role="book">About Face 2.0 : The Essentials of User Interface Design</title>.
	<publishername>John Wiley &amp; Sons</publishername>,
	<pubdate>2003</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Cooper1999">
      <bibliomset role="book">
	<surname>Cooper</surname>, <firstname>Alan</firstname>.
	<title role="book">The Inmates are Running the Asylum : Why High Tech Products Drive us Crazy and How to Restore the Sanity</title>.
	<publishername>SAMS</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1999</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Isaacs2001">
      <bibliomset role="book">
	<surname>Isaacs</surname>, <firstname>Ellen</firstname> and
	<firstname>Alan</firstname> <surname>Walendowski</surname>.
	<title role="book">Designing from Both Sides of the Screen</title>.
	<address><city>Indianapolis</city>, <state>IN</state></address>:
	<publishername>New Riders Publishing</publishername>,
	<pubdate>2001</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book -David</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Nielsen1993">
      <bibliomset role="book">
	<surname>Nielsen</surname>, <firstname>Jakob</firstname>.
	<title role="book">Usability Engineering</title>.
	<address><city>San Francisco</city>, <state>CA</state></address>:
	<publishername>Morgan Kauffman</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1993</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book -David</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Tog1992">
      <bibliomset role="book">
	<surname>Tognazzini</surname>, <firstname>Bruce</firstname>.
	<title role="book">Tog on Interface</title>.
	<address><city>Reading</city>, <state>MA</state></address>:
	<publishername>Addison-Wesley</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1992</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc><remark>Needs quote for this book -David</remark></bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
  </bibliodiv>
<!--
  <bibliodiv><title>Other Style Guides</title>
    <bibliomixed id="Aqua2002">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<corpauthor>Apple Computer, Inc</corpauthor>.
	<title>Inside Mac OS X: Aqua Human Interface Guidelines</title>.
	<address><city>Mountain View</city>, <state>CA</state></address>.
	<publishername>Vervanté</publishername>,
	<pubdate>2002</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc>[This is a print on demand book also available online from <ulink url="http://developer.apple.com/techpubs/macosx/Essentials/AquaHIGuidelines/">http://developer.apple.com/techpubs/macosx/Essentials/AquaHIGuidelines/</ulink> in HTML and PDF forms.] The style guide to everything Aqua, the Mac OS X user interface. Look here for information on a clean and coherent design.</bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="IRIX2001">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<corpauthor>Silicon Graphics, Inc</corpauthor>.
	<title>IRIX Interactive Desktop User Interface Guidelines</title>.
	<address><city>Lincoln</city>, <state>NE</state></address>.
	<publishername>iUniverse</publishername>,
	<pubdate>2001</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc>[This book is also available online from <ulink url="http://techpubs.sgi.com/library/tpl/cgi-bin/browse.cgi?cmd=toc&amp;srch=&amp;toccmd=FE&amp;coll=0650&amp;db=bks&amp;pth=/SGI_Developer/UI_Glines">http://techpubs.sgi.com</ulink> in HTML and PDF forms.][This book may be found online at <ulink url="http://techpubs.sgi.com">http://techpubs.sgi.com</ulink> in HTML and PDF forms.] Style guide to the IRIX Interactive Desktop environment. It contains nice concepts, outstanding among them the varios chapters on 3D applications.
	</bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Mac1992">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<corpauthor>Apple Computer, Inc</corpauthor>.
	<title>Inside Macintosh Human Interface Guidelines</title>.
	<address><city>Reading</city>, <state>MA</state></address>.
	<publishername>Addison-Wesley</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1992</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc>[This book is also available online from <ulink url="http://developer.apple.com/techpubs/mac/HIGuidelines/HIGuidelines-2.html">http://developer.apple.com/techpubs/mac/HIGuidelines/HIGuidelines-2.html</ulink> in HTML and PDF forms.] The style guide to the classic Macintosh "look and feel".</bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>
    <bibliomixed id="Windows1999">
      <bibliomset relation="book">
	<corpauthor>Microsoft Corporation</corpauthor>.
	<title>The Microsoft Windows User Experience</title>.
	<address><city>Redmond</city>, <state>WA</state></address>.
	<publishername>Microsoft Press</publishername>,
	<pubdate>1999</pubdate>.
	<bibliomisc>[This book is also available online from <ulink url="http://msdn.microsoft.com/UI/default.asp">http://msdn.microsoft.com/UI/default.asp</ulink> in HTML form.] The style guide to the Microsoft Windows user interface. Specially good is the chapter on text handling.</bibliomisc>
      </bibliomset>
    </bibliomixed>

  </bibliodiv>
-->
</bibliography>


</book>
